rochester station project db contract documents part ... · rochester station project part 3‐2...

Rochester Station Project

DH34463

DB CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

PART 3

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

July 18, 2013

New York State Department of Transportation

This page is intentionally blank.


SECTON 1. RAILROAD PROPERTY ACCESS REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 1 1.1 Access Requirements onto Amtrak Property .................................................................................... 1

1.2 Access Requirements for CSXT Property .......................................................................................... 1

SECTION 2 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE ........................................................................................... 1 2.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................. 2

2.2 Compliance with Approved NEPA Action ......................................................................................... 2

2.3 Environmental Requirements ........................................................................................................... 2

SECTION 3. COMMUNITY OUTREACH REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 5 SECTION 4 BASIS OF PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 76 4.1 CPM Schedule Submittals ................................................................................................................. 7

4.2 Milestones for Item 800.0600012 Design Build Construction Work ................................................ 8

4.3 Milestone Progress Payments ........................................................................................................... 9

4.4 CPM Schedule Requirements ............................................................................................................ 9

4.5 CPM Schedule Updates and Revisions ............................................................................................ 10

4.6 Extra Work ...................................................................................................................................... 11

4.7 Four Week Look Ahead Schedule ................................................................................................... 12

SECTON 5. SITE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 12 5.1 General Site Requirements ............................................................................................................. 12

5.2 Codes and Standards ...................................................................................................................... 13

5.3 Foundation ...................................................................................................................................... 13

5.4 Structures ........................................................................................................................................ 13

5.5 Utilities ............................................................................................................................................ 14

5.6 Design Loading and Loading Combinations .................................................................................... 16

5.7 Materials ......................................................................................................................................... 16

5.8 Site Layout and Circulation ............................................................................................................. 16

5.9 Other Site Components................................................................................................................... 18

SECTION 6. GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 18 6.1 Standards and References .............................................................................................................. 19

6.2 Personnel Qualification Requirements ........................................................................................... 20

6.3 Design Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 22

6.9 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Construction Monitoring Plan ................................................ 25

6.10 Foundation Design Report .............................................................................................................. 28

6.6 Construction Requirements ............................................................................................................ 37

SECTION 7. TEMPORARY FACILITY REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 58 SECTION 8. TRACK AND PLATFORM REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 59


8.1 Track Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 59

8.2 High Level Platform Requirements ................................................................................................ 60

8.3 Bridge Modification Requirements ................................................................................................ 60

SECTION 9 ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 63 9.1 Code Requirements and Design Standards ..................................................................................... 63

9.2 Description of Proposed Facility ..................................................................................................... 64

9.3 Façade Elements ............................................................................................................................. 65

9.4 Station Ground Level....................................................................................................................... 65

9.5 Station Concourse Level .................................................................................................................. 68

9.6 Space Allocation .............................................................................................................................. 69

9.7‐ Information Systems ............................................................................................................................ 75

9.8 Finishes and Materials .................................................................................................................... 76

9.9 Public Art Installations .................................................................................................................... 77

9.10 Historic Canopy and SHPO Coordination ........................................................................................ 77

SECTION 10. VERTICAL CIRCULATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 78 10.1 Pedestrian Concourse ..................................................................................................................... 79

10.2 Baggage Ramps ............................................................................................................................... 79

SECTION 11. SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 79 11.1 Sustainable Strategies ..................................................................................................................... 80

11.2 Energy Consumption ....................................................................................................................... 82

11.3 Life Cycle Analysis ........................................................................................................................... 82

11.4 Material Selection ........................................................................................................................... 82

11.5 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................ 82

11.6 Documentation ............................................................................................................................... 83

SECTION 12.MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 84 12.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 84

12.2 Codes and Standards ...................................................................................................................... 85

12.3 Vibration Isolation / Seismic Design ............................................................................................... 85

12.4 Mechanical Identification ............................................................................................................... 86

12.5 HVAC SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................ 86

12.6 PLUMBING SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................................... 91

12.7 Fire Protection ................................................................................................................................ 97

SECTION 13. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 98 13.1 General Requirements .................................................................................................................... 98

SECTION 14. COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 178


SECTION 15. FACILITY PARKING AND TRAFFIC REQUIREMENTS ............................................................... 210 15.1 Parking .............................................................................................................................. 210 15.2 Pay Stations ................................................................................................................................... 210

15.3 Bus Access ..................................................................................................................................... 210

15.4 Accommodations for Bicylists ....................................................................................................... 211

SECTION 16. FRA TIGER Grant Submittal Requirements .......................................................................... 211

Rochester Station Project Part 3‐1

Part 3 Project RequirementsJuly 18, 2013

SECTON 1. RAILROAD PROPERTY ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

The Design Builder must adhere to the railroad property access requirements while working on property under the control of either Amtrak or CSXT.

1.1 Access Requirements onto Amtrak Property

A. The Design Builder is required to obtain a Temporary Permit to Enter (TPE) from Amtrak.

B. All field personnel must attend Amtrak contractor safety/security training

a. Available Online: http://www.amtrakcontractor.com

C. The Design Builder is required to submit an overall Site Specific Work Plan and Hazard Analysis (SSWP/Hazard) Form to Amtrak Engineering for review and approval.

D. Temporary fencing and barricades of work zones is required. All fencing must be approved by Amtrak.

E. Station operations and areas must remain open for its normal operations. Temporary station operations staging shall be reviewed and approved by Amtrak.

F. Mandatory Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for all workers worn at all times including:

a. Hard Hat, High visibility Orange Safety Vest with reflective striping (vest must be break‐away), Safety Glasses or goggles, Work boots, Hearing protection and Visible Safety Trained ID card.

G. The Design Builder shall provide to Amtrak Engineering the following:

a. 2 week minimum look ahead schedule of planned work activities, updated weekly.

b. Specific work plans for safe operations prior to work activities being progressed.

c. The Design Builder shall create perform a written daily Job Safety Briefing with all crafts, workers, and anyone involved on the project prior to any work beginning the briefing shall include all tasks and be updated as major changes in work occur, the briefing shall be performed by the Employee in charge who shall keep the briefing in his/her possession and presented to Amtrak or FRA officials if requested.

H. Amtrak Engineering will provide Station Operation Coordination and Inspection services as it relates to Amtrak’s interests.

1.2 Access Requirements for CSXCSXT Property

A. CSXCSXT Railroad is responsible for all flagging operations and separate coordination by the Design Build with CSXCSXT is required.

B. All field personnel must attend CSXCSXT contractor safety/security training, which is different from the Amtrak training.

B.C. The Department will enter into a separate agreement with CSXT to provide flagging for the construction of this project.

SECTION 2 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE



2.1 Scope

An essential component of the Project is the comprehensive integration of environmental compliance into all design and construction activities by the Design‐Builder. Except as otherwise detailed herein, the Design‐Builder shall be responsible for preparing its design, carrying out its construction activities and undertaking other activities as needed to ensure compliance with the Project’s Environmental documentation and all applicable environmental laws and regulations. This Project Requirement identifies certain required actions by the Design‐Builder to ensure that the Environmental Requirements are complied with throughout the Project activities.

2.2 Compliance with Approved NEPA Action

NEPA environmental approval for the subject project has been granted based on analysis and documentation of potential environmental impacts of the identified preferred alternative. This analysis is summarized along with any identified environmental commitments and depicted in the May 2013 Federal Railroad Administration (FRA) Categorical Exclusion Worksheet for the subject project. If during detailed design and/or construction the Design‐Builder introduces design elements, variations, or methodologies that potentially induce environmental impacts that differ from those identified in the approved Categorical Exclusion Worksheet or is unable to comply with established environmental commitments then the NEPA process for this project will need to be re‐evaluated by the Design‐Builder and reviewed by the Department prior to proceeding with construction. This requirement also applies to proposed variations which may affect resources covered under Section 106, Section 4(f), and other applicable federal and state environmental regulations. The need to re‐evaluate the NEPA process may impact the overall project schedule.

2.3 Environmental Requirements

2.3.1 General

A) Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, the Department will be responsible for obtaining all Environmental Approvals as identified in this Section. In the event the Design‐Builder requests changes to the permits obtained by the Department, the Design‐ Builder shall be responsible for the preparation of all information including materials, investigations, testing and documentation, as necessary to support said permit modification request. Based on the Design‐Builder’s provision of said information, the Department will undertake the requested permit modification with the respective permitting agencies on the Design‐Builder’s behalf. The Department will not be responsible for any delay or additional cost associated with the Design‐Builder’s requested permit modification;

B) The Design‐Builder shall procure all Environmental Approvals as needed for all Design‐ Builder located areas, including staging, borrow and disposal sites, and any other areas used by the Design‐Builder, for its convenience, in the construction of the Project;



C) The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for obtaining all new Environmental Approvals. For any such approvals required to be obtained by the Design‐Builder that must formally be issued in the Department's name, the Department will cooperate with the Design‐Builder as reasonably requested by the Design‐Builder, including execution and delivery of appropriate applications and other documentation prepared by Design‐Builder in a format approved by the Department;

D) The Design‐Builder shall be solely responsible for violations of any Environmental Requirements;

E) The Design‐Builder shall indemnify the Department and the State of New York for any fines, violations or damages incurred by reason of failure of the Design‐Builder to comply with Environmental Approvals.

2.3.2 Environmental Plans

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for preparing the following documents in conformity with all Environmental applicable standards, regulations, permits and requirements. For each documents listed, the Design‐Builder shall identify the frequency of submission of compliance reports to the Department.

A) Health and safety plan (HASP);

B)A) Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan complying with the New York State SPDES General Permit for Stormwater Discharges from Construction Activities (GP‐0‐10‐001) This plan is to include but is not limited construction entrance(s), construction phasing, drawings showing size and location of permanent (seeding, pavement) and temporary (silt fence, temporary seed) erosion controls, and details.

C)B) Stormwater pollution prevention plan (SWPPP)

D)C) Contaminated Soil Sampling and Analysis Plan (for areas of excavation in the railroad bed)

E)D) Based on the results of the Contaminated Soil Sampling and Analysis Plan the following plans may be required (see NYSDOT Standard Specification Section 205):

• Contaminated Material Handling Plan (CMHP)

• Field Organic Vapor Monitoring Plan (FOVMP)

• Disposal Plan

2.3.3 Environmental Plan Deliverables

At a minimum, the deliverables shall include the items listed in Table 2‐1 – Environmental Compliance Deliverables, for the Department’s review. Each of the deliverables listed in Table 2‐1 ‐ Environmental Compliance Deliverables, shall be provided to the Department by the earlier of: (i) 30 days after NTP; and (ii) 30 days prior to the relevant on site activity, including start of construction.



Table 2‐1 – Environmental Compliance Deliverables

Deliverable Number of Copies

Hardcopy Electronic

Health and safety plan 1 1

Stormwater pollution prevention plan & NOI 1 1

Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan 1 1

Contaminated Soil Sampling and Analysis Plan 1 1

2.3.4 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control

The Design‐Builder shall provide the department with a SWPPP and Notice of Intent complying with the New York State SPDES General Permit for Stormwater Discharges from Construction Activities (GP‐0‐10‐001) 60 days prior to any ground disturbance for the Department’s signature. The Department will apply for coverage under the SPDES General Permit for Stormwater Discharges from Construction Activities. The Design‐Builder shall review final SWPPP and sign/complete Contractor/Subcontractor SPDES Permit Certification form (CONR 5). Discharges covered under the SPDES general permit shall not commence until the date authorized on the SPDES Acknowledgement Letter.

2.3.5 Performance

The Design‐Builder shall perform of all activities required under each of the foregoing plans until final acceptance of the Project, except to the extent that the plans provide for activities to be undertaken by the Department or third parties. Provisions in said plans for activities to be undertaken by the Department or third parties are subject to prior written approval by the Department.

2.3.6 Environmental Approvals and Identified Permits

All environmental design approvals for this project shall be acquired prior to construction. The following is an initial list of permits that have been identified as necessary for this project:

A) SPDES General Permit for Stormwater Discharges from Construction Activities

B) NYSDEC Waste transporter permit.

The Design Builder is responsible for identifying and acquiring all necessary permits required to complete the proposed Work including permits not identified in this list.



2.3.7 Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs)

Based on laboratory analyses of bulk samples collected, ACMs are present in the existing Station.

2.3.8 Inaccessible/Assumed ACMs

Inaccessible/Assumed ACMs were found within the former passenger tunnel as ceiling plaster, 9” x 9” floor tile and mastic and thermal pipe insulation. Refer to ”Hazardous Materials Investigations” found on the project website: https://www.dot.ny.gov/main/business‐center/designbuildproject for a list of inspections and samplings performed to determine the presence of asbestos‐containing materials (ACM). The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for the identification, removal and disposal of all asbestos containing materials (ACMs) encountered in the inaccessible areas if such areas will be disturbed during the performance of the Work. The removal and disposal of ACMs shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the applicable safety and health codes.

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for providing any necessary asbestos inspection, project design and abatement project/air monitoring services as part of this contract in accordance with 12 NYCRR 56. NYSDOL asbestos licensure and applicable staff certification(s) are required for structure rehabilitation work where confirmed or presumed asbestos‐containing materials are impacted. All necessary asbestos inspection, project design and project/air monitoring work shall be conducted in conformance with policy and guidance provided in NYSDOT TEM Section 4.4.19 ‐ Asbestos Management.

2.3.9 Hazardous Waste/Contaminated Soils

A Contaminated Soil Sampling and Analysis plan shall be completed for all proposed excavation areas within the railroad bed. The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for the identification, removal and disposal of all hazardous waste or contaminated soil encountered. The removal and disposal of Hazardous Waste or Contaminated soils shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the applicable regulations.

A Contaminated Soil Sampling and Analysis plan for the station area has been completed. Refer to ”Hazardous Materials Investigations” found on the project website:

https://www.dot.ny.gov/main/business‐center/DesignBuildProject

SECTION 3. COMMUNITY OUTREACH REQUIREMENTS

Outreach has been and will be critical to obtain the full support of all project stakeholders and the community. The Design‐Builder shall provide support to the Department inclusive of, but not limited to, the following groups.

A. Rochester Station Executive Steering Committee NYSDOT has formed an Executive Steering Committee to guide the design of Rochester Station as it progresses. Mayor Tom Richards of the City of Rochester, United States



Congresswoman Louise Slaughter, and Commissioner Joan McDonald of the New York State Department of Transportation comprise the Committee, along with technical advisory from representatives of Amtrak, Trailways of New York, and Parsons Brinckerhoff. The Design‐Builder shall aide NYSDOT to keep the Committee up to date on the development of the design and construction by making presentations to the Committee. The Design‐Builder shall respond to comments and incorporate input and guidance from Committee members.

B. Council for Persons with Disabilities The Council for Persons with Disabilities is an advisory council to the County Executive of Monroe County and to the Mayor of the City of Rochester. The Council has provided input and guidance developing a preliminary design that fulfills the needs of persons with disabilities in Rochester and Monroe County as they utilize Rochester Station. The Design‐Builder shall be required to meet with and present to the Council as the design and construction progresses.

C. Rochester Cycling Alliance The Rochester Cycling Alliance is a cycling advocacy group focused on promoting cycling in Rochester, development of cycling roads and trails, and distributing information about safety and cycling in general. The Design‐Builder shall assist the Department as needed in presenting the final design to the Rochester Cycling Alliance for their input.

D. Reconnect Rochester Reconnect Rochester is a transit advocacy group focused on promoting mobility and physical connections between downtown Rochester and the surrounding neighborhoods. The Design‐Builder shall assist the Department as needed in presenting the final design to Reconnect Rochester for their input.

E. Other Groups The Design‐Builder shall provide support to the Department and the Executive Steering Committee to meet with community groups such as:

a. The City of Rochester a.b. Area universities, b.c. RGRTA, c.d. High Falls Business Improvement District, d.e. Rochester Downtown Development Corporation e.f. Monroe County Department of Transportation g. Empire State Passenger Association f.h. The City of Rochester’s Public Art Committee and the Rochester Arts and Cultural

Commission to assist NYSDOT in defining, judging, soliciting Artists, and commissioning of Public Art pieces to be installed on the project site.



SECTION 4 BASIS OF PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS

The scheduling of submittals, procurement and construction is the responsibility of the Design Builder. Progress payments shall be subject to the requirements of DB §109‐2. All Work, including Phase II, if included in the contract, shall be monitored by a detailed Critical Path Method Schedule "CPM Schedule". The Design Builder shall submit the CPM Schedule to NYSDOT’s Project Manager for approval. The CPM Schedule shall meet the requirements of DB §108 and Part 2‐ Appendix 1. The approved CPM Schedule is used to assist NYSDOT in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule, as well as, its compliance with Contract requirements. This approved CPM Schedule shall be the basis for the evaluation of Design Builder performance and approval of Progress Payments for Item 800.0600012 Design Build Construction Work. Progress Payments will be made according to the approved CPM schedule as each Milestone is completed to the satisfaction of NYSDOT’s Project Manager.

The CPM Schedule is the Design Builder's committed plan to complete all Work (including punch list items) within the allotted time. The CPM Schedule shall be based on and derived from detailed schedules used to monitor all Contract activities.

4.1 CPM Schedule Submittals

A. Preliminary Schedule: No later than 14 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, the Design Builder shall submit the Preliminary Schedule for NYSDOT review and approval of the Design Builder's planned activities during the first 90 calendar days. The Preliminary Schedule shall indicate the cost of activities and milestones expected to be completed or partially completed before submission and approval of the complete CPM Schedule.

B. CPM Baseline Schedule: No later than 30 calendar days after Award of Contract, the Design Builder shall submit CPM Schedule depicting the Design Builder's Work plan for the entire Contract. The Design Builder shall submit to the NYSDOT’s Project Manager for review and approval the following:

1. Logic Diagram: A detailed CPM Time‐Scaled Network Logic Diagram.

2. Cost Loaded CPM for Item 800.0600012 Design Build Construction Work. The Design Builder will create a proposed list of Milestones including Manadatory Milestones and the percentage of the total price bid for Item 800.0600012 Design Build Construction Work associated with each Milestone. The Design Builder may propose to include Milestones in addition to the mandatory Milestones. The Department will review the Design Builder’s proposed Milestones and Associated Progress Payments for reasonableness prior to approval. These approved Milestones and Associated Progress Payments for Item 800.0600012 Design Build Construction Work are the basis for the Design Builder’s Cost Loaded CPM Schedule. Any revisions and modifications to the approved CPM Schedule must be approved by NYSDOT’s Project Manager in writing.

3. Cost Report: A Cost Report generated from the cost loaded CPM Schedule is to be submitted 14 calendar days after approval of the Line Item Breakdown, in accordance with Paragraph F.(3).



4. Narrative: A written narrative explaining the schedule and the Design Builder's general approach for meeting interim and completion milestone dates.

4.2 Milestones for Item 800.0600012 Design Build Construction Work

A. The Design Builder shall include the following mandatory Milestone and required Completions in the CPM Schedule:

Activity ID

Activity Description Follows Logic

Tie Duration Responsible Party

Progress Payment Structure

P0010 Submission of Health and Safety Plan

FS 2 months from the Notice To

Proceed

Design Builder

Proposed by Design

Builder/Approved by NYSDOT

P0020

Temporary Facility, Site

Work, Demolition of the existing Building and

appurtenances.

P0001P0010 FS

Proposed by Design

Builder/Approved by NYSDOT

P0030 Station Building P0002P0020 FS

P0040 Tunnel P0003P0030 FS

P0050 Station Platform P0004P0040 FS

P0060 Platform Tracks P0005P0050 FS

P0070 Substantial Completion P0006P0060 FS

32 months from Notice To Proceed

P0080

Project Completion, in accordance with DB 109‐

11.3

P0007P0070 FS

36 months from the Notice To

Proceed

B. The Design Builder’s Preliminary, Baseline, and Monthly Update schedules shall incorporate the mandatory Milestone Completion Dates. The Department’s approval of the Design Builder’s schedule(s), in part, will be subject to the Design Builder’s compliance with the Milestone Schedule.

C. Failure of the Design Builder to submit the CPM Preliminary, Baseline, Update Schedules and any required revisions thereto within the time limits stated, shall be sufficient cause to withhold approval of the Design Builder's invoices for progress payment(s) until such delinquent submittal is made and accepted by NYSDOT’s Project Manager.



4.3 Milestone Progress Payments

The Design Builder shall furnish a breakdown of the total price bid for Item 800.0600012 Design Build Construction Work by assigning dollar values to each milestone, which cumulatively equals the total amount. Upon approval by the NYSDOT’s Project Manager, the percentages associated with each milestone shall be used in the Cost Report as a basis for determining progress payments. The Design Builder's overhead and profit shall be prorated through all activities.

4.4 CPM Schedule Requirements

A. The CPM Schedule shall include all of the Design Builder's submittals, procurement and construction work activities with sufficient detail such that all interfaces with all direct and related parties to the Work are shown.

1. The Work of the Design Builder, Subcontractors, Suppliers, CSX, Amtrak and all others that affect progress shall be shown and identified on the schedule by using Activity Codes.

2. Procurement activities shall be shown, including submittal and approval of shop drawings, fabrication and delivery of the material.

3. Interruption of service, delivery of NYSDOT/Amtrak/CSX‐furnished equipment, project phasing and any other Technical Provision requirements shall be shown.

B. The CPM Schedule shall contain sufficient construction activities to represent the Work, subject to the approval of the NYSDOT’s Project Manager.

C. The CPM Schedule shall be of the precedence type. Activity precedence relationships consistent with proper logic shall be shown with lag codes.

D. Logic and activity time durations shall be established by the Design Builder consistent with Contract requirements and reflective of proper coordination between trades. Logic shall show how the start of a given activity is dependent on the completion of preceding activities and its completion restricts the start of following activities. No activity shall have a duration greater than 30 calendar days.

E. The start date of the CPM Schedule shall be the Notice to Proceed. The completion date of the CPM Schedule shall be the Contract completion date as specified in Part 1 Design Build Agreement, which shall be input as the "Project Must Finish No Later Than" date. All intermediate milestones required in the Contract shall be shown in proper logical sequence and input as "Start‐No‐ Earlier‐Than" or "Finish‐No‐Later‐Than" dates. The Design Builder may add milestones with the approval of NYSDOT’s Project Manager.

F. Activities shall be described such that the Work is readily identifiable for assessment of start and completion, as well as intermediate status. Descriptions shall utilize Activity Codes for physical locations such as column lines, stations and elevations where possible to define the Work. Activity description of "start", "continue", "completion", "X%", "Y%", "Z%" or similar non‐specific descriptions will not be allowed.



G. The CPM Schedule shall be calculated in working days. The working day to calendar date correlation shall be based upon the Design Builder's proposed work week with adequate allowance for weekends, legal holidays and any special requirements of the Contract. Durations for activities shall not be less than one work day. Multiple shifts per day should be shown using multiple resources.

H. Seasonal weather conditions shall be considered in the planning and scheduling of all Work influenced by high or low ambient temperatures for the completion of all Work within the allotted Contract time. Appropriate allowances shall be made for anticipated time losses, due to normal rain and snow conditions by statistically expanding the estimated time durations for weather sensitive activities. Additionally, allowance for lower productivity during bad weather periods shall be made by increasing activity durations by an appropriate amount. All allowances for anticipated time losses shall be stated in the baseline narrative.

I. The review period shown in the Schedule for submittals shall conform with review periods stated in the Approved Project Quality Control Plan.

J. Constraint dates are permitted only on Milestone activities, unless otherwise approved by NYSDOT’s Project Manager.

K. All activities with the exception of Work start and end nodes shall have predecessors and successors. The start of an activity shall have a start‐to‐ start or finish‐to‐start relationship with preceding activities. The completion of an activity shall have a finish‐to‐start or finish‐to‐finish relationship with a succeeding activity. Start‐to‐finish relationships are not acceptable.

L. CPM Schedules which have been resource leveled are permissible provided the effects of leveling are incorporated in the schedule using "Start‐no‐Earlier Than" date constraint.

4.5 CPM Schedule Updates and Revisions

A. The Design Builder shall update the CPM Schedule monthly, whether or not the NYSDOT’s Project Manager has accepted the schedule, to reflect actual construction progress. The update shall include the historical record of actual start and finish dates for activities in progress, or completed, percent complete based on a unit of measure and remaining duration based on the amount of work days required to complete the activity.

B. A monthly progress meeting shall be held. At this meeting, attended by the NYSDOT’s Project Manager, all progress during the calendar month shall be addressed and reviewed for incorporation into the schedule by the Design Builder. Within a period of 10 calendar days from the date of this progress meeting, the Design Builder shall submit the schedule update to the NYSDOT’s Project Manager with the agreed upon changes for approval. The approved updated CPM schedule shall be the basis for the progress payment.

C. A CPM Progress Narrative Report shall be submitted as part of the update analysis shall include, but not be limited to:



1. Description of cost and schedule status.

2. Discussion of current and anticipated delaying problem areas and their estimated impact.

3. Schedule slippage and/or progress along the critical path in terms of days ahead or behind the allowable dates, and if the Work is behind schedule, progress along other paths with negative float.

4. Logic changes and an explanation of the revisionsthe revisions. Revisions to activities not worked on during the period, including changes in duration, or revisions to activity relationships are to be considered logic revisions. Out‐of‐sequence activities are not acceptable and shall be corrected in logic revisions prior to submission to NYSDOT.

D. When, in the NYSDOT’s Project Manager's opinion, the CPM Schedule fails to reflect the Design Builder's actual plan and method of operation, or the Design Builder's completion date as indicated by the CPM is more than 1 month behind the Contract completion date, NYSDOT’s Project Manager may require the Design Builder to submit for review within 2 weeks, a revised CPM Schedule for completion of the remaining Work within the Contract completion date.

E. Bar Chart: The length of the bar shall equal the Baseline Schedule. Status shown should be based on the Update Schedules.

F. When it becomes apparent activities must be added to the CPM Schedule, they must be added in a method that completion dates of any succeeding baseline activities are not affected. All revisions must be submitted to NYSDOT’s Project Manager for approval before incorporation into the CPM Schedule.

4.6 Extra Work

To insure that the CPM Schedule shall continue to accurately reflect the Design Builder's plan for the Work and that it incorporates the impact of all Extra Work as soon as the Work scope can be defined, the following procedure shall be followed to incorporate Extra Work (including deletions of Work) in the Schedule.

When an Extra Work proposal is submitted by the Design Builder, the Design Builder must identify in a CPM‐type sketch, additional work required as a result of the proposal and its interrelationship to the CPM Schedule. This sketch shall show all activities, logic revisions, duration changes, and associated cost changes for performing the Work in question. Upon NYSDOT’s Project Manager's approval of the sketch, the Design Builder shall incorporate the revisions into the Baseline Schedule and the Monthly Cost Report at the next Schedule update. No additional compensation will be paid the Design Builder for preparing these revisions. Any request for Extension of Time must be verified by CPM Analysis and be in accordance with DB 108‐6 “EXTENSIONS OF CONTRACT TIME”.



4.7 Four Week Look Ahead Schedule

The Design Builder shall provide with the monthly schedule update, or more frequently if required by NYSDOT, a Four Week Look Ahead Schedule to be used for coordination of the Design Builder’s work with Railroad operation, other work groups and at regular Progress Review Meetings.

This Four Week Look Ahead Schedule shall contain early start and early finish dates for all activities scheduled or planned for start and/or completion in the upcoming 4 week period. It shall include design, submittal, procurement and construction activities, as applicable.

SECTON 5. SITE REQUIREMENTS

5.1 General Site Requirements

A. Prior to construction activities, the Design Builder and Department representative shall identify existing site features to remain such as trees, landscape, walks, etc; and establish protection measures to for duration of project.

B. Develop phased erosion and sediment control plan meeting the guidelines of the New York Standards and Specifications for Erosion and Sediment Controls; maintain erosion and sediment controls through duration of construction. Provide stabilized entrances to prevent mud and sediment from leaving the site, regularly sweep and sprinkle water to avoid mud and dust concerns on local streets and neighboring properties.

C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) in accordance with NYSDEC Standards and Design Guidelines. Site discharges to a combined sewer operated by Monroe County Pure Waters. SWPPP shall include temporary and permanent measures and will require review and approval by local MS4 officerMonroe County Pure Waters and NYSDEC Department MS4 officer prior to construction. Install stormwater measures in accordance with approved SWPPP and Notice of Intent and Notice of Termination.

D. Existing features in the work area; including buildings, walks, pavements, curbs, lighting and other site amenities should be demolished and disposed in accordance with City ordinances, obtain needed demolition permits. Coordinate utility disconnects with each utility provider. Clear site of trash, debris, vegetation, trees (other than those which can remain), and any materials not incorporated in the project design; dispose of in accordance with City ordinances.

E. Provide site security with a fence and lockable gates for all phases of construction. F. Provide safe, reliable ingress/egress, traffic circulation and pedestrian circulation for all

public use areas including temporary and permanent station and amenities through all phases of construction.

G. Provide parking lots and site roadways in accordance with Amtrak Standard Program and Planning Standards and Guidelines.



G.H. Based on geotechnical report, provide a pavement design for parking areas in accordance with NYSDOT pavement design guidelines. For all pavements that will accommodate bus traffic upon completion of any phase, provide a heavy duty pavement design to accommodate the largest vehicles anticipated for use by the local and regional transportation providers.

H.I. Provide shelters and amenities to accommodate taxi, shuttle bus, local bus and regional transportation service in accordance with Amtrak Standard Program and Planning Standards and Guidelines.

I.J. Provide concrete walks and curbing in accordance with ADA Standards for Accessible design and Amtrak Standard Program and Planning Standards and Guidelines.

J.K. Provide bicycle parking in accordance with Amtrak Standard Program and Planning Standards and Guidelines and City of Rochester Bicycle Master Plan.

K.L. Provide a detailed Landscaping Plan prepared by a professional landscape designer architect in accordance with Amtrak Standard Program and Planning Standards and Guidelines; install landscaping components in accordance with approved plan.

5.2 Codes and Standards

A. New York State Building Code 2010 B. ACI 318‐08 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary” C. ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Buildings D. AISC Manual of Steel Construction E. ASCE 7‐10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

5.3 Foundation

A. Geotechnical report and available soil data will be given in an addendum as it becomes available.

B. Building foundation recommendation will be provided in the Geotechnical Report. The Design‐Builder may design the foundations using the existing building’s caissons. Information about the caissons will be available in the Geotechnical Report.

C. Tunnel and platform foundation and fill recommendations will be available in the Geotechnical Report.

5.4 Structures

A. Building structure shall be determined and designed by a NYS licensed Professional Engineer. Building structural system shall comply with all applicable codes and regulations even if not explicitly listed in this document.



B. Building structural system shall be designed to accommodate the architectural aesthetic as presented in these documents and optimize the space as described in the Amtrak Station Program and Planning – Standards and Guidelines.

5.5 Utilities

A. Provide utility service for temporary station. Facility to utilize electric heat. Temporary station to utilize overhead wiring, electric and communication service to permanent station to be underground.

B. Design Builder to provide the services of an underground utility locating service to find and map potential obstructions over entire site prior to construction.

C. Water service – Provide new water mains appropriately sized for:

a. projected domestic use,

b. Sprinklers in accordance with mechanical section,

c. Site hydrants, if required, to provide protection in accordance with NYS Building Code.

D. Existing 1 ½” water service, located on Joseph Avenue should be abandoned in accordance with Bureau of Water standards. Existing service may be used for service to the temporary facility.

D.

E. Fire protection main, domestic service main, backflow prevention and related facilities shall meet Ten States Standards, City Bureau of Water Department regulations and Monroe County/NYS Health Department regulations. It is anticipated water service for the completed station will utilize existing 12” cement lined cast iron water main on North Clinton Avenue. Include application/approval and fees for Site Plan Review, Backflow Preventer related activities.

Maintain and protect existing water facilities on Central Avenue throughout all phases of the project.

E.F. Provide and install new sanitary collection piping sized to accommodate all proposed facilities. Sanitary facilities shall meet Ten States Standards, City Sanitary Department regulations and Monroe County Pure Waters and /NYS Health Department regulations. SiteFacility discharges to combined sewer, new sanitary service should be approved by Monroe County Pure Waters, Development Review Office. All permit fees shall be included. Maintain and protect existing sewer facilities on Central Avenue throughout all phases of the project.



G. Stormwater collection shall meet the SWPPP requirements identified in Site Design section. The existing drainage patterns convey the site drainage to the exterior of the site through sheet draining and closed drainage systems. In the Phase I portion of the development, the majority of the runoff is collected in closed drainage and conveyed east to Joseph Avenue, with the west portion of the site sheet draining to North Clinton Avenue. Preliminary estimates of peak runoff rates were calculated using minimal time of concentrations. Though this project may not require coverage under the NYSDEC SPDES program General Permit, the project shall be advanced with storm water quantity controls in accordance with the New York State Storm Water Management Design Manual.

Based on preliminary calculations and HydroCAD modeling, it is estimated that Phase I will require approximately 0.15‐2.0 ac‐ft of storage to reduce developed peak discharge rates in a manner which they will not exceed existing peak discharge rates. This storage could be accommodated in surface ponds, if space and grades permit in the final site layout. Alternatively, the model suggests the use of 500‐700 linear feet of 48” diameter pipe at a slope of 0.10% to obtain the required storage.

Phase II of the project requires a comparable amount of stormwater storage capacity in the Phase I development area as the Phase I construction. Changes to the drainage patterns are minimal and yield nearly the same peak discharge rates and required storage amount. In the remaining area of the Phase II development, stormwater in the existing and proposed condition is sheet drained or conveyed through closed drainage to the west towards North Clinton Avenue.

Based on preliminary calculations and HydroCAD modeling, Phase II shall require approximately 0.15‐2.0 ac‐ft (as noted in the Phase 1) of storage to reduce developed peak discharge rates to Joseph Avenue in a manner which they will not exceed existing peak discharge rates. Additionally, Phase II shall require approximately 0.01‐0.02 ac‐ft to reduce developed peak discharge rates to North Clinton Avenue; this could be accommodated through surface level ponds or the use of 40‐80 linear feet of 48” diameter pipe at a slope of 0.10%.

F. Detention systems in Phase I and/or Phase II could utilize design ponds if space permits or buried pipes with varying diameter outlet pipes to obtain the desired peak discharge rate for each storm event.

Electric and gas service shall be coordinated and installed in accordance with the standards and guidelines Rochester Gas and Electric and the City. Include all applications, approvals and fees in accordance with RGE Services Installation Group.



H. Coordinate and install private utilities (including but not limited to electric, gas, communications) in accordance with the standards and guidelines of the utility provider and the City.

G.I. Coordinate demolition plan with each utility to review existing active infrastructure, existing abandoned infrastructure and/or the potential for hazardous materials associated with any existing infrastructure. Develop utility demolition plan for all utilities in accordance with findings.

H.J. Coordinate with Amtrak IT for power and conduit sizing/location for the temporary station and new station.

K. Coordinate with Trailway’s IT for power and conduit sizing/location for the new station.

L. Coordinate communications with Frontier Communications 1‐877‐433‐3806. Minimum notification is 5‐7 business days to come out and set up the temporary connection.

5.6 Design Loading and Loading Combinations

A. All loads and load combinations shall be compliant and adhere to the New York State Building Code 2010 and ASCE 7‐10.

5.7 Materials

Refer to Part 8 – Project Specifications.

5.8 Site Layout and Circulation

The Rochester Station Project shall promote ease of transfer between transportation modes and circulation throughout its exterior site, but must also segregate different uses for safety reasons. Intercity and potential future city bus operations cannot share access or space with cars and shuttles. Drop off/pickup for passengers must be separated from general parking and shall share access with both short term parking and taxi/shuttle bus movements. The Design‐Builder shall ensure pedestrians are protected and separated from vehicular movements wherever possible.

It is desirable to promote a visual presence of the new station along the North Clinton frontage in order to create a visual connection with downtown Rochester along that street to the south. To ensure the shortest possible passenger travel distance, the station building should be sited as close as possible to the center line of tracks, while adhering to the twenty‐five foot minimum clearance from the centerline of the nearest track bed. The goal of a ‘seamless journey’ through the station building to the boarding area shall be achieved with this configuration. There are other mandates that shall impact the location of the station building and other site features including, but not limited to:



A. Replacement of the existing low‐level platform with an ADA compliant high level center island platform for passenger access to Amtrak service to Empire, Maple Leaf, and Lake Shore Corridors.

B. Minimize customer travel distance between station functions and the platform. C. Consolidation of traffic movements’ onto the Central Avenue frontage in Phase One to

eliminate sight distance conflicts at Joseph Avenue and North Clinton Avenue. D. Segregation of baggage and passenger traffic. E. Provision of ramps to accommodate baggage movements in lieu of elevators. F. The new station building must maintain a minimum of twenty‐five feet clear envelope

from the centerline of the southernmost track with additional 10’ setback recommended wherever possible to minimize flagging and lower construction costs for the building.

G. Provide ADA accessible path connecting all site and program elements. H. Provide a covered path to transport baggage from the Baggage Work Area to the exterior

baggage ramp and into the Concourse without exposing baggage to weather. I. Provide a covered path to transport baggage from the Concourse to the Platform without

exposing baggage to weather. J. Provide a covered area for passengers to board Trailways buses. Since wheelchair

boarding is at the very rear of the bus, the bus canopy extends to cover the entire length of the buses.

K. Install large skylight units in both the baggage and bus boarding canopies to allow natural light into these large shaded areas.

L. Allow for the installation of bicycle share facilities. M. Widen North Clinton and Joseph Avenues to provide street side bus stops for RGRTA bus

routes. Provide bus shelters at these layovers for waiting passengers, including a minimum of 10 bicycle rack spaces per bus shelter.

M.N. Allow sufficient additional space beneath the bus shelters that shall be provided for RGRTA bus stops for the future installation of bicycle share facilities by the City of Rochester.

N.O. Provide queue space for a minimum of four (4) taxis, two (2) university shuttle vans, and other paratransit services

P. Allow for space for a minimum of five (5) passenger drop off and pick up spaces at the Station entry, and provide a minimum of thirteen (13) short‐term parking spaces near the Station entry.

O.Q. Allow for a minimum of ten (10) bicycle lockers at the Station building, beneath the Phase II canopy, along with space for a minimum of (20) bicycles at U‐shaped racks and tamper‐resistant public bicycle work stand and separate public bicycle pump.

The site layout shall incorporate softscape wherever possible, eliminating any unnecessary paving in accordance with the City of Rochester’s Project Green policy, especially at the North Clinton Avenue frontage. North Clinton has been identified by the City as one of the proposed “Green Corridors” that shall feature integrated bicycle and pedestrian circulation. The landscape shall include trees along the street line and along pedestrian paths to create an urban environment that is pleasant and friendly for bicyclists and pedestrians. The Design‐Builder shall balance the requirements of both the City of Rochester and Amtrak security



concerns, including small trees compatible with an urban setting that do not allow for hiding places. Landscaped islands shall be incorporated in the parking areas to soften the hardscape. LED site lighting shall be supplemented with additional pedestrian level lighting along major circulation routes. The Design‐Builder shall provide life‐cycle cost analysis for LED site lighting or other proposed substitute. Loading dock and trash and recycling storage shall be screened from public view.

Exterior to the station building, a Kiss and Ride Drop‐Off location, taxi stand, and short‐term parking are sited along the Central Avenue frontage. For ease of arrival and departure, the pick‐up and drop‐off lanes are designed at a minimum of twelve feet wide. Similarly, the taxi berths are minimally twenty feet in length with an additional five feet for maneuvering. Sidewalks throughout the site shall be a minimum of 8 feet wide, and crosswalks shall receive a thermoplastic stamped asphalt decorative treatment. The Design‐Builder shall provide speed tables at major pedestrian crossings for both traffic calming and for ease of accessible travel with bollards for pedestrian safety.

5.9 Other Site Components

A place for both garbage and recycling storage and retrieval via a loading dock shall be provided onsite concealed and screened from public view. It shall be the Design‐Builder’s responsibility to ensure the loading dock and access to the garbage and recycling storage complies with required truck access dimensions. Additional station maintenance items, such as snow plow, ice melt, and additional baggage floats and carts shall be accommodated with a minimum of three hundred square feet of covered exterior Amtrak storage space per Amtrak Functional Space Requirements, issued on 12/30/2012.

In order to further sustainable initiatives, a Construction and Building Site Waste Management Plan shall be in place to ensure 50% recycling and/or salvaging of existing material. Throughout the site, low maintenance landscaping shall be integrated to minimize impervious surfaces. The Design‐Builder shall grade areas away from structures to prevent ponding, while mitigating the flow of runoff over impervious surfaces.

SECTION 6. GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for geotechnical design and construction of all permanent and temporary structures, including assessing available information, geotechnical analysis and reporting, geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring, and protection of existing infrastructure, structures and utilities in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

These requirements are considered as a minimum and do not include all possible conditions that may be encountered in the Design‐Builder’s final design.

The NYSDOT has performed subsurface investigations in the vicinity of the proposed station building. Boring logs and laboratory test data from these previous subsurface investigations are provided in Part 7 – Project Data. The soil and rock samples obtained during these previous subsurface investigations are available for inspection by the Design‐Builder at request. The



Design‐Builder shall be responsible for making any arrangements to view the samples from the previous subsurface investigations, by first seeking the prior consent of the NYSDOT’s Project Manager. Information from these previous subsurface investigations shall be considered part of the Contract Documents only to the extent that they are used to represent soil conditions at the depths indicated within the respective borings drilled at the approximate locations shown. Presentation of this information in no way implies that subsurface conditions are the same at other locations and different times. The Design‐Builder shall form its own interpretation of the existing geotechnical data and satisfy itself as to the nature and behavior of the ground and sub‐soil, the form and nature of the Site, and nature of the Work that may affect its detailed design, construction method, and tools.

6.1 Standards and References

The Design‐Builder shall perform geotechnical activities in accordance with the Contract Requirements, the applicable Standards, Codes and Manuals listed below.

ACI ‐ American Concrete Institute

ACI 318 – Building Code for Reinforced Concrete

AISC ‐ American Institute of Steel Construction

Specification for Structural Steel Building, Load and Resistance Factor Design

AMTRAK

AMTRAK Station Program and Planning, Standards and Guidelines, Station Manual 2.2

AREMA – American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association

AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering



ASTM – American Society of Testing Materials

ASTM D1143 – Standard Method of Testing Piles under Axial Compressive Load

ASTM D3689 – Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundation Under Static Axial Tensile Load

ASTM D3966 – Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundation Under Lateral Load

ASTM D6760 – Standard Test Method for Integrity Testing of Concrete Deep Foundations by Ultrasonic Crosshole Testing

AWS – American Welding Society

AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel

AWS D1.3 – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

AWS D1.4 – Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel

Burlington Northern & Santa Fe Railway/Union Pacific Railroad

Guidelines for Temporary Shoring

FHWA

Static Pile Load Test Manual

Micro‐pile Design and Construction Guideline

New York State Building Code (2010)

SEI – Structural Engineering Institute

Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

6.2 Personnel Qualification Requirements

A. Foundation Lead Designer

The Design‐Builder shall provide a Foundations Lead Designer who shall be a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New York to lead the Project geotechnical team. The Foundations Lead Designer shall be in charge of all geotechnical Work, and shall perform or directly oversee all geotechnical Work, and shall sign or co‐sign and stamp all geotechnical related design, analysis, released for construction documents, As‐Built Plans and other related documents. The Foundations Lead Designer shall have a minimum of 15 years of recent experience that include the exploration, analysis, design, and construction of the following:

1. Current LRFD methodology and requirements; 2. Tunnel and Track structures and foundations of the magnitude and type that will be

used; 3. Planning and conducting subsurface exploration for rail stations;



4. Site characterization, including the development of design soil/rock profiles with relevant properties for the purpose of foundation type and size selection, analysis, design, and construction;

5. Analysis and design of structure foundations for static as well as dynamic (seismic) loading;

6. Planning and conducting load tests and integrity testing for deep foundations including micropiles and drilled shafts;

7. Soil‐foundation‐structure interaction analysis; and 8. Derivation of parameters for, and design and construction of, temporary and permanent

earth support structures. B. Seismic Specialist

The Design‐Builder shall provide a Seismic Specialist who shall be a qualified Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New York. The seismic specialist shall have a minimum of 15 years practicing earthquake engineering. The seismic specialist shall have a background in both structural and geotechnical disciplines. The prior project experience of the Seismic Specialist shall include at a minimum: ground motion evaluation, spatial variability, and soil structure interaction effects, liquefaction analyses, finite element modeling of complete soil‐pile‐structure interaction including pile‐to‐pile interaction and kinematic effects.

C. Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer

The Design‐Builder shall provide a Project Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer. The Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer shall be a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of New York and shall have at least 10 years of experience in instrumentation work similar to the scope of that in this Project. The Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer experience shall include:

1. Demonstrate competence in geotechnical engineering area of practice. Experience in installing and monitoring geotechnical and structural instruments for similar ground condition and type of structures in this project. Instrumentation type shall include: deep benchmark; deformation monitoring points; grid crack gauge; geophone; top of rail monitoring point; fiber optics, inclinometers, and data acquisition systems.

2. Experience in analyses, evaluation, and interpretation of geotechnical and structural instrumentation data.

3. Reference two projects of similar magnitude where the proposed Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer has preformed similar duties and responsibilities.

The Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer shall supervise instrument installations, instrumentation acceptance tests, data collection, data interpretations. The Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer shall be available for consultation for the duration of the Contract. The role of geotechnical instrumentation engineer includes, but is not limited to:

1. Prepare detailed step‐by‐step procedures and schedule with bar chart for the installation of all instruments specified.



2. Be on‐site, supervise, and conduct the pre‐installation and post‐installation acceptance tests of each type of instrument.

3. Review instrumentation data daily

4. Be on‐site and supervise at least the first three installations of each type of instrument.

5. Supervise interpretations of geotechnical instrumentation data and prepare instrumentation Interpretation Reports.

6. Supervise instrumentation monitoring and management/dissemination of reduced data to others.

7. Supervise removal or abandonment of instrumentation.

6.3 Design Requirements

The Design‐Builder shall at a minimum provide the following:

A. Geotechnical work plan

B. Geotechnical investigation plan

C. Geotechnical data report

D. Subsurface investigation records

E. Seismic assessment report

F. Geotechnical instrumentation and construction monitoring plans

G. Foundation design reports

6.4 Geotechnical Work Plan

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a geotechnical work plan for the project. The plan shall identify the required geotechnical scope of work that the Design‐Builder plans to complete for the design and construction of the Project. The geotechnical work plan shall include the following:

A. Design‐Builder’s knowledge and understanding of the geotechnical, geologic, hydrogeology and seismic settings of the Project Site and how the nature and behavior of the soil, rock, groundwater and subsurface conditions will affect the investigation, design and methods of construction;

B. Anticipated methods of analysis and design for the foundation of the station building, high‐level platform and cut‐and‐cover tunnel and a discussion of the foundation optimization process and rationale for selection of the foundation types;

C. Identify key Project constraints and describe how the geotechnical activities will be designed and constructed to meet these constraints;

D. Identification of all principal geotechnical deliverables and activities;



E. A narrative describing the approach to quality control during design and construction of the geotechnical Works;

F. A risk register identifying all major design and construction risks of the geotechnical activities, and describe how these risks are managed and mitigated;

G. Resumes of the Foundations Lead Designer, Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer, and Seismic Specialist;

H. Minimum numbers, depths, types of subsurface investigations to be carried out for the station building, high‐level platform and the tunnel design, including a narrative of the in‐situ tests and laboratory tests to be carried out;

I. Minimum numbers, and types of axial load tests for each foundation type, size and subsurface condition;

J. Minimum numbers, and types of lateral load tests for each foundation type and subsurface condition;

K. Minimum percentage and/or numbers of piles as tested piles to be dynamically tested; L. Crosshole sonic logging shall be done on all drilled shafts.

6.5 Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation Plan

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a geotechnical investigation plan, including specifications for performing the Work. The geotechnical investigation plan shall include the criteria or rationale used in developing the plan, and shall identify the locations of all field investigation sites, and borings, together with their depths, sampling intervals, and a description of both the field and laboratory testing programs. The geotechnical investigation plan shall be prepared and signed and sealed by the Design‐Builder’s Foundation Lead Designer. The geotechnical investigation plan shall include details of borehole abandonment procedures and a list of all permits required to perform the geotechnical investigation.

The Design‐Builder shall plan and conduct subsurface investigations in accordance with the AREMA’s Standards for geotechnical subsurface investigation (Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 22), and as deemed necessary by the Design‐Builder’s Foundation Lead Designer to establish the geotechnical conditions and to perform all geotechnical and foundation design and analysis. Borings shall be uniformly distributed or located in accordance with the loading pattern imposed by the structure. The minimum number of borings is listed below.

Subject Area Minimum Number of Borings

Station Building 3, not overlapping the borings included in

GDR

High‐Level Platform Every 200 ft



Baggage Ramp (Adjacent to Station Building) 2

Pedestrian/Baggage Tunnel 2

The Design‐Builder is responsible to obtain all necessary permits from Amtrak and CSX and to conduct the field investigation without affecting railroad operation.

The Design‐Builder shall determine the coordinate location and ground surface elevation for each boring and field investigation position, and shall show the coordinates, station and offset, and elevation for each individual boring log or investigation record. Coordinates and station and offsets for the borings shall be referenced to Amtrak Mile Post 371.0 stationing. Elevations shall be referenced to the Project datum and horizontal control system. Boring horizontal coordinates shall be accurate to +/‐ 1.0 foot; vertical coordinates shall be accurate to +/‐ 0.5 foot.

6.6 Geotechnical Data Report

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a geotechnical data report, signed and sealed by the Foundations Lead Designer. The geotechnical data report shall serve as a factual depiction of the subsurface conditions and at a minimum it shall include:

a. Local geology and groundwater condition b. A detailed description of the investigation methods; c. Complete records (typed logs) with summary tables of investigation; d. Complete records with summary tables of laboratory test results; e. Exploratory hole location plan, showing locations of any existing (pre‐award)

exploratory holes for which data was used by the Design‐Builder plus locations of post‐award exploratory hole locations undertaken by the Design‐Builder; and Plots of laboratory test results versus elevations for separate areas and soil types.

6.7 Subsurface Investigation Records

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for keeping a continuous and accurate log of the materials encountered and a complete record of the operation of progressing the casing. Where driving is used, a record of the number of blows required to advance the sampling barrel, each 6 inches in the soil where each sample is taken, shall be kept. Detailed description of soil and rock samples shall be provided per requirements in AREMA Specification, Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 22. Records shall be kept per AREMA’s specification, Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 22.

The Design‐Builder shall use Bentley gINT® or similar commercial software to develop and maintain an electronic database of subsurface information including in‐situ test and laboratory test results, and to produce boring records.

6.8 Seismic Assessment Report



Prior to issue to the Amtrak, the Design‐Builder shall ensure that the seismic assessment report is peer‐reviewed by a suitably qualified specialist in this field, and the findings and conclusions of the peer review shall be included in an appendix to the Seismic Assessment Report. The seismic specialist who will perform the review of this report shall meet the minimum requirements specified in section 3.2.

A. Seismic Site Response Analyses ‐ Site‐specific seismic response analysis shall be performed to develop design free‐field response spectra in accordance with AREMA and Amtrak Guidelines. The Design‐Builder shall develop dynamic soil/rock properties for use in the seismic analysis based on PS‐Logging data as well as widely‐used empirical correlations. Spatial variation of ground motions shall be accounted for, as applicable.

B. Soil Structure Interaction ‐ Seismic soil structure interaction evaluation of deep foundations shall include determination of the maximum imposed curvatures and bending from earthquake ground motions and structure response, including free‐field soil strains modified for soil‐foundation‐structure interaction coupled with deep foundation deformations associated with earthquake loads imparted to the foundation by the structure (i.e. inertial response).

C. Liquefaction ‐ Evaluation of liquefaction potential shall be performed. Should this show that liquefaction is a potential hazard at the Site, the risk potential on the station building, high‐level platform and the tunnel shall be evaluated by the Design‐Builder, and any remediation solutions proposed by the Design‐Builder shall be demonstrated by analytical and field methods.

6.9 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Construction Monitoring Plan

A. Monitoring of Existing Structures and Utilities

The Design‐Builder shall develop, implement, and maintain a geotechnical instrumentation and construction monitoring plan to monitor vibrations, accelerations, vertical settlement, and lateral movement of temporary support structures and adjacent ground, and existing infrastructure during construction including the existing station building, tracks, utilities and other infrastructures within the zone of influence of construction.

Wherever vibration‐producing activities could affect a structure, building, or utility, the Design‐Builder shall prepare a Vibration Monitoring and Control Plan to address the potential impacts to nearby receptors due to construction or demolition activities associated with this Project. The term “receptor” includes buildings, structures, utilities, and sensitive operations/processes for which construction impacts or Work above recommended limits may be detrimental. The plan shall include ground vibration threshold limits.

The monitoring plan shall address how the Design‐Builder intends to complete vibration‐related activities and meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Develop a list of all anticipated vibration producing activities and where they are expected to occur;

2. Develop a list of all potentially impacted receptors from these activities;



3. Provide a vibration susceptibility analysis for each identified receptor, and establish a vibration control limit to preclude damage, including threshold damage, to each of the identified receptors.

4. Provide a plan for notifying the public of potential vibration impacts, responsible Project personnel, receptors requiring precondition surveys, and vibration monitoring activities;

5. Monitor construction related vibrations at the nearest and most critical receptor(s), and notify appropriate project personnel immediately if established vibration limits are exceeded;

6. Provide instrumentation locations, monitoring procedures, and a description of the monitoring devices and/or manufacturers’ brochures in the submitted plan;

7. Assess any sensitive community or business operations that may be affected by vibrations;

8. Provide recommendations for vibration‐limiting methods to meet the established maximum safe vibration levels.

9. List of receptors shall include, but not limited to: • Utilities

• Tracks

• Nearby bridges

• Buildings

• Newly constructed elements

• Existing structures within zone of influence of vibration producing activities

B. Construction Monitoring

The Design‐Builder’s construction monitoring plan shall include details of the proposed program of instrumentation and monitoring, monitoring frequency, assesses the impacts to existing structures and utilities, establishes threshold values of the monitored parameters, and describes the response plan that will be implemented when threshold parameters are exceeded. A system of construction monitoring shall be established to include the following:

1. Monitoring of settlement of the permanent structures and surrounding area both during and after construction. In all cases, monitoring shall be initiated well in advance of construction to establish baseline readings.

2. Measurement of lateral movement of permanent structures.

3. Measurement of vibration levels of the permanent structures and surrounding area both during and after construction. Ambient vibration monitoring shall be conducted well in advance of construction to establish baseline readings.

The extent of the monitoring program will depend on the size and type of the affected structures. A detailed monitoring program shall be prepared for each structure affected by the work, subject to review by Amtrak.



Where adjacent properties may be affected by the works, the monitoring program shall allow for readings on fixed points on the structures and buildings, to allow both total and differential settlements to be assessed and lateral movements to be determined. The monitoring program shall also allow for access to conduct vibration monitoring on adjacent properties.

C. Instrumentation

The instrumentation and monitoring program shall include appropriate types and quantities of monitoring instruments capable of measuring horizontal and vertical movements, tilt of adjacent structures, and vibrations, as applicable. Instrumentation to be used in the monitoring programs to control and assist design and construction shall include:

1. Inclinometers

2. Deep benchmark

3. Deformation monitoring points

4. Grid crack gauge

5. Geophone

6. Top of rail monitoring point

The types and numbers of instruments will depend on factors including the size, type and location of proposed work. The design and distribution of instrumentation shall demonstrate an understanding of the need, purpose and advantages of using each proposed type. Responsibilities for design, procurement, installation, recording, maintenance and protection, and monitoring plan, criteria and performance requirements shall be clearly stated in the specifications and Contract Documents. These shall also contain the procedures to be followed when readings during construction reach any specified threshold values, or when construction changes are deemed necessary. The detailed instrumentation plan and response plans shall be developed by the Design‐Build Contractor and submitted for review and approval by Amtrak.

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for ensuring that all instruments used for the Project are calibrated within the 12 months prior to its use on the Project and as required by the manufacturer, unless the Project Specification or other Contract requirements state that a more recent calibration is required.

D. Instrumentation Data Reporting

The Design‐Builder shall ensure that the instrumentation can be read remotely and that data shall be uploaded to a website provided by the Design‐Builder, and which shall be accessible remotely by both the Design‐Builder and Amtrak. Remote‐access functionality shall include the ability to extract data and to isolate an individual monitoring point or multiple points. The presentation system shall include the functionality to modify the extents and scale of data plotting such that arbitrary views are available.

The Design‐Builder shall provide weekly construction instrumentation monitoring reports to Amtrak. Monitoring reports shall be interpretive in nature, and shall enumerate any corrections applied to the data including, but not limited to any notification measures taken regarding data.



The weekly reports shall include clear and explicit statements of exceedances of any pre‐determined threshold values. The Design‐Builder shall maintain the instrumentation and monitor the measurements during and after construction up to Final Acceptance.

6.10 Foundation Design Report

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a foundation design report for all structures included in the Project. The foundation design report shall detail the analysis and design of each foundation element, including any foundation optimization process such as foundation element pile spacing, and shall detail the anticipated total and differential settlements over time. The foundation design report shall be signed and sealed by the Foundations Lead Designer.

The following information shall be included in the Foundation Design Report.

A. Subsurface Information

1. As drilled boring location plan and subsurface profiles within the footprint of the new station building and the high‐level platform and along new tunnel alignment, and cross‐sections, as appropriate

2. Description of geology and subsurface conditions within the Project site

3. Summary of lab and field test results

B. Recommended Geotechnical Design Parameters

1. Evaluation of the engineering properties of all soil and rock types, including the expected average and range of soil and rock strengths, index properties and deformation properties

C. Design Method and Foundation Recommendations

1. Design assumptions

2. Design methods

3. Software used

4. Design criteria

5. Selection of foundation systems

6. Summary of loads

7. Summary of resistance

8. Foundation recommendations, including type, size, depth, arrangement of foundation elements

D. Construction Considerations

1. Obstructions

2. Planned field testing programs, including pile and drilled shaft integrity and load testing

3. Slope stability, support of excavation and groundwater control considerations



4. Time‐related settlement and lateral deformation and determination of the resulting effects on adjacent structures

5. Protection of existing structures and utilities

6.5.1 Station Building and High‐Level Platform Foundation Design

The Design‐Builder shall design and construct permanent foundations based on the requirements of AREMA Railway Engineering Manual. In addition to the applicable subsections from AREMA cited below, it must be noted that the requirements per design building codes listed in Section 2 will also be considered, with the stricter requirements applying.

It is anticipated that shallow foundation may not be desirable for this project, subject to further evaluations. Deep foundation may prove to be more appropriate from technical, cost and constructability aspects. Shallow foundation is not permitted for the support of the Station building columns, high level platform, and baggage platform.

Deep foundations will include both drilled shafts and micropiles. Driven piles are not permitted due to the concerns of vibration induced during pile driving which may have detrimental impact to the railroad tracks.

When designing deep foundations to be installed in populated areas, consideration will be given to the impact of noise and vibration to the environment. Specific noise and vibration limits will be established to conform to local codes and project requirements. Ground consolidation, existing structure settlements, and disturbance to local residents due to the installation of deep foundations will be maintained within limits as specified herein.

Drilled shafts will be designed for static loading in accordance with the requirements of AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 4 and 24. Micropiles will be designed in accordance with the requirements of FHWA Micropile Design and Construction Guideline due to the absence of AREMA guidelines on micropile.

Seismic design of foundations shall be in accordance with Chapter 9 of AREMA Volume II, considering the effects of inertial loading from the superstructure and kinematic effects due to loading from the soil (soil‐structure interaction). When liquefaction of soils can occur, lateral resistance calculations will assume zero soil support or residual strength for liquefied soils from the design water level to the bottom of the zone of potential liquefaction. The lateral displacement (transverse and longitudinal) in either direction at the superstructure level will be limited to a value consistent with the design limits of the superstructure. The calculations for the horizontal movement of the foundations, substructure, superstructure and bearings will be based on elastic seismic loads (R =1). A detailed structural analysis shall be provided to include induced foundation lateral and axial loadings as well as vertical loading on batter piles, stability and pile bending stress determinations during the occurrence of liquefaction.

The differential settlement of the station building and the high‐level platform shall not exceed 1/4 inches and the angular distortion is less than 1/500.

A. Drilled Shaft



Drilled shafts shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of AREMA Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 24. Drilled shaft shall be analyzed for both vertical capacity and the lateral load capacity. For vertical capacity, axial compression and uplift resistance shall be designed using static analysis methods in accordance with AREMA. Deep foundation capacity and serviceability requirements under seismic loading will conform to the requirements specified in AREMA Volume II, Chapter 9.

Drilled shafts shall also be designed to adequately resist the lateral loads transferred to them from the structure without exceeding the allowable deformation of the structure or overstressing the foundation elements. The lateral load resistance of the individual and group of drilled shaft elements shall be analyzed. The analysis shall consider nonlinear soil pressure‐displacement relationships, soil/structure interaction, group action, groundwater, and cyclic and static and dynamic load conditions. The performance evaluation of drilled shaft shall include the determination of vertical and horizontal movements, rotation, axial load, shear, and bending moment for the foundation elements.

The lateral resistance of a single drilled shaft and a group of shafts shall be analyzed for all limit states. Group efficiency and lateral load reduction factors shall be considered based on the shaft spacing as specified in the AREMA Specifications.

The design of drilled shaft shall consider the limits on total and differential settlement caused by the structure loads. Settlement induced by the drill shaft group in the subsoil shall be evaluated. In addition, settlement of the individual drill shaft shall also be evaluated. The foundation shall be designed to keep the settlement within the allowable values as specified in AREMA.

The drilled shaft design shall consider the effect of negative skin friction from existing ongoing ground settlement, liquefaction, construction dewatering, or shaft installation. Downdrag loads shall be determined by considering the load transfer distribution along the drilled shaft as well as the group layout. The magnitude of the downdrag load shall be applied as additional dead load on the deep foundation.

An adequate amount of testing as specified in Section 4.7.2.1 will be required for drilled shaft to evaluate foundation capacity and integrity, to verify design assumptions, to determine foundation installation characteristics, to evaluate the foundation installation system performance, and to establish foundation depths. The testing and monitoring shall include all necessary test shafts, dynamic testing, static load testing, non‐destructive integrity testing and quality control testing. Testing and monitoring of drilled shaft shall be in accordance with the applicable ASTM and AREMA.

For drilled shaft foundations, include the following information in the Foundation Design Report:

1. Nominal Axial Compressive Resistance and resistance factors

2. Factored Axial Compressive Resistance

3. Nominal Uplift Resistance and resistance factors



4. Factored Uplift Resistance

5. Top of Drilled Shaft elevation

6. Top of Rock Socket Elevation

7. Tip of Drilled Shaft Elevation

8. Drilled Shaft Diameter

9. Rock Socket Diameter

10. Reinforcement Cage cross sections

11. Concrete and reinforcement steel properties

B. Micropiles

Micropiles are defined as small diameter drilled and grouted non‐displacement pile with a reinforcing casing and a center reinforcing bar. Permanent casings and load testing are required. Micropiles shall be analyzed for both vertical capacity and the lateral load capacity. For vertical capacity, axial compression and uplift resistance shall be designed using static analysis methods in accordance with FHWA micropile design and construction guidelines. Deep foundation capacity and serviceability requirements under seismic loading will conform to the requirements specified in AREMA Volume II, Chapter 9. A micropile specialty Subcontractor is required for design and construction of micropiles.

Micropiles shall also be designed to adequately resist the lateral loads transferred to them from the structure without exceeding the allowable deformation of the structure or overstressing the foundation elements. The lateral load resistance of the individual and group of micropile elements shall be analyzed. The analysis shall consider nonlinear soil pressure‐displacement relationships, soil/structure interaction, group action, groundwater, and cyclic and static and dynamic load conditions. The performance evaluation of micropile shall include the determination of vertical and horizontal movements, rotation, axial load, shear, and bending moment for the foundation elements.

The design of micropile shall consider the limits on total and differential settlement caused by the structure loads. Settlement induced by the micropile group in the subsoil shall be evaluated. In addition, settlement of the individual drill shaft shall also be evaluated. The foundation shall be designed to keep the settlement within the allowable values as specified in FHWA micropile design and construction guidelines.

The micropile design shall consider the effect of negative skin friction from existing ongoing ground settlement, liquefaction, construction dewatering, or micropile installation. Downdrag loads shall be determined by considering the load transfer distribution along the micropile as well as the group layout. The magnitude of the downdrag load shall be applied as additional dead load on the deep foundation.

Subcontractor shall submit documentation before the start of construction that he has successfully completed at least three micropile projects and at least installed 150 micropiles within the last three years with micropile diameters and lengths similar to those anticipated for



this project. Documentation shall include the general contractor and owner’s name and current contact information with descriptions of each project. A design geotechnical engineer is required to design micropiles. The design engineer shall be a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of New York and shall have at least 10 years of experience in designing micropiles and drilled foundations with capacities and in subsurface conditions similar to those of this project.

Double corrosion protection shall be provided to micropile central reinforcing steel bar in accordance with FHWA‐SA‐97‐070 recommendations. Maintain a minimum of 3 inches grout cover to the reinforcing bar along the entire length of the micropile. Galvanize exposed reinforcing and permanent casing that connect directly to caps in accordance with FHWA micropile design and construction guidelines.

For Micropile foundations, include the following information in the Foundation Design Report:

1. Micropile layout, diameter, inclination, minimum reinforcing casing and center rebar, and pile to cap connection

2. Micropile tip elevations, and bond lengths. The rock socket shall have a minimum bond length of ten feet in Class 1b rock. Neglect tip resistance in tension and compression



5. Nominal Uplift (tension) Resistance and resistance factors


7. Nominal Lateral Resistance and resistance factors

8. Factored Lateral Resistance

Do not install reinforcing casing or begin drilling within six times pile diameter, center to center or five feet, whichever is greater until grout in piles reaches initial set. Grout the micropiles the same day the bond length is drilled.

C. Existing Drilled Shaft

During the preliminary field investigation, two test pits were excavated along the west side of the existing station building to expose existing drilled shaft foundations. A total of two foundation cores were retrieved from the existing drilled shaft, one at each test pit. Laboratory testing was performed on the core samples including petrography and uniaxial compressive strength with static moduli. The laboratory testing results are included in the Geotechnical Data Report of the Request for Proposal package. The Design‐Builder shall assess the condition of the existing drilled shaft and evaluate the possibility of reusing the existing foundation to support the new building structure.

6.5.2 Foundation Load Testing

The Design‐Builder shall carry out sufficient axial load tests to verify the design nominal resistance for each production micropile/shaft type, diameter and subsurface condition type



(specifically, either founded within soil only, or founded within or upon rock). For each type and diameter of micropile/shaft per subsurface condition type, a minimum of 5% of the total number of micropiles/shafts but no less than one static load test shall be performed.

After completion of a micropile/shaft load test, the Design‐Builder shall be responsible for either fully removing the test pile from the ground or for cutting off the test pile at 2 feet below final grade.

A. Load Testing for Drilled Shaft

Install one load test drilled shaft prior to installation of production drilled shafts. Select test locations to represent different subsurface conditions and/or construction methods. Perform axial compression load test for each drilled shaft size based on site variability. If the Design‐Builder chooses to alter construction methods, an additional axial load test will be required on a test shaft constructed with the new method. Perform axial load tests using Osterberg Cell load equipment in accordance with ASTM D1143.

Perform integrity testing on all test shafts and production shafts. At a minimum, integrity testing requirements shall comprise Crosshole Sonic Log (CSL) testing on all drilled shafts.

B. Load Testing for Micropiles

Install load test micropile to demonstrate micropile subcontractor’s ability to successfully install micropiles. Select test locations to represent different subsurface conditions and/or construction methods. Perform axial compression load test for each micropile size based on site variability. If the Design‐Builder chooses to alter construction methods, an additional axial load test will be required on a test micropile constructed with the new method.

C. Load Testing Report

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a Micropile/Shaft Geotechnical Nominal Resistance Test Implementation Report containing test procedures, instrumentation plan including measurements along the micropiles/shafts, calibration procedures, test micropile/shaft locations, micropile/shaft sizes, and types being tested and equipment used. At a minimum, drilled shaft load test piles shall be instrumented along the length to establish load transfer (t‐z) curves for each soil layer and (q‐z) curve for the bearing layer(s). Include crosshole sonic logging results for drilled shafts.

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a Micropile/Shaft Geotechnical Nominal Resistance Test Results Report containing test results per micropile/shaft size and type tested; production micropile/shaft installation, and production piling acceptance criteria. The Design‐Builder shall interpret the load test results and use them in the Design of Foundation such that the axial deformations of the micropile/shaft do not exceed the structural limit.

6.5.3 Support of Excavation (Temporary Shoring for Cut‐and‐Cover Tunnel Construction)

The Design‐Builder shall design the temporary shoring system for the construction of the proposed cut‐and‐cover tunnel in accordance with the guidelines of AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 28 and the publication of Burlington Northern & Santa Fe Railway (BNSF) and Union Pacific Railroad (UPRR) on temporary shoring. Where conflicts exist, the most stringent



specification should be applied. These shoring systems will be designed to resist all anticipated dead and live, vertical and lateral loads. These loads will include those induce by soil, groundwater, live load, surcharge and construction equipment.

The temporary shoring system shall include anchored soldier beam with lagging wall. Open cut is not allowed. If anchored systems with tie‐backs are used, the relative locations between tie‐backs and existing/future utilities need to be evaluated to ensure no conflict. Ground anchors shall be cement‐grouted tiebacks designed, furnished, installed, tested and stressed in accordance with the AREMA requirements.

Temporary loadings need to be considered in design. Temporary loads include, but are not limited to construction surcharge, ground and groundwater pressure, and live load from railroad tracks.

Loads due to soils shall be derived using the maximum values of the saturated densities. Lateral earth pressures will be estimated on the basis of the anticipated movement of the structure. Active and passive earth pressure based on Coulomb earth pressure theory will be used. If there is no movement expected, at‐rest earth pressure will be used. The design of the retaining structures shall be based on the maximum lateral pressures that will develop behind the structures.

Hydrostatic pressure induced by the groundwater table shall be included in the lateral pressures.

Lateral pressure induced by surcharge loads applied at the ground surface behind the wall shall be included as appropriate. These surcharge loads will be evaluated on a site‐specific basis, and will include uniform surcharges, strip loads, line loads, point loads, area loads, train loads, and construction equipment loads.

Structures and structural members shall be designed to have design strengths at all sections at least equal to the required strengths calculated for the loads and forces in such combinations as stipulated in AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 2, which represents various combinations of loads and group loads that are applicable and the load combination that requires the maximum strength shall be used. Stability analyses shall be conducted in accordance with AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 28 for all temporary shoring structures.

For an anchored system with tiebacks, requirements on embedment depth, allowable stress and tiebacks need to be satisfied in accordance with the AREMA specification.

For braced excavation, it shall be designed using the apparent earth pressure diagram indicated in AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 28.5.5.

Calculated deflections of temporary shoring system and top of rail elevation shall not exceed the criteria outlined in Table 1 of Design Guideline for Temporary Shoring (BNSF and UPRR).

Horizontal distance from shoring to track C/L measured

Maximum horizontal movement of shoring system

Maximum acceptable horizontal or vertical



When evaluation indicates that the support of excavation system may be insufficient to protect structures adjacent to support of excavation, direct support of structures by underpinning shall be evaluated. Underpinning methods to be evaluated include:

1. Pit underpinning

2. Jacked pile underpinning

3. Micropile underpinning

For support of excavation, include the following information in the support of excavation design report:

1. Location of support o excavation system

2. Support of excavation type

3. Support of excavation shoring member size

4. Support of excavation embedment depth

5. Bending stiffness (EI) and axial stiffness (AE) of bracing elements

6. Lateral earth pressure distribution

7. Design calculation of tieback, including anchor number and location; load for each ground anchor; Inclination angle; type and size of ground anchor; minimum bonded length; and minimum stressing length

8. Design of grout mix including non‐shrink additives and compressive strength test results from a certified testing laboratory

6.5.4 Cut‐and‐Cover Tunnel

A pedestrian/luggage tunnel connecting the station building and the high‐level platform will be designed and constructed for the project. The approximate dimension inside the tunnel is 20 ft wide, 11 ft high with an invert at approximately 18 ft below grade. Although there may be different ways to construct the tunnel, only the cut‐and‐cover method is allowed and assumes that sufficient track outages will be staged to allow for construction. Sufficient track outage is defined as the two tracks between the station building and the high‐level platform removed from service for a time period of ________.

The construction sequence for the cut‐and‐cover tunnel is:

at a right angle from track movement of rail

12’ < S < 18’ 3/8” 1/4”

18’ < S < 24’ 1/2” 1/4”



1. Remove the two tracks between the station building and the high‐level platform from service

2. Install support of excavation along the perimeter of the cut‐and‐cover tunnel

3. Construct the cut‐and‐cover tunnel

4. Restore ground and track substructure and track and restore service to the two tracks

The Design‐Builder will design the cut‐and‐cover tunnel in accordance with the requirements of AREMA.

The required loading and forces for design shall follow the Structural Design Guidelines in Section 5 taking into account the effects of construction staging on existing and new construction. In addition to the loads and forces in Section 5, the following loads should be considered.

1. Computation of backfill pressures shall be as per AREMA, Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 5. Concentrated loads on below grade walls to include, but not limited to, railroad loading and foundations, shall be superimposed.

2. Loads due to soils will be derived using the maximum values of the saturated densities. The submerged densities will be used for soil unless the location is above the standing water table.

3. Horizontal ground pressure for tunnels in soil shall be determined from at‐rest earth pressure theory. Horizontal ground pressure for mixed‐face profiles in soil and rock are not expected.

4. The effects of hydrostatic pressure and buoyancy shall be considered whenever the presence of groundwater is indicated. During construction and backfill operations, the elevation of groundwater shall be observed and controlled so that the calculated total weight of structure and backfill shall always exceed the calculated uplift due to buoyancy by at least 10%. The design shall take into account the effect of hydrostatic pressure pertaining to possible construction sequences. The backfill shall be considered as the volume contained within vertical planes defined by the outside limits of the structure. No value shall be assigned to contact soil friction.

Construction joints shall be formed at such locations where they won’t reduce the effectiveness of the lining to resist pressure from surrounding earth or rock. Expansion joints are not required where construction joints are provided. Waterstops shall be provided as necessary.

The Design‐Builder shall over‐excavate a minimum of 5 ft below the design elevation of the bottom of the mud slab and backfill with structural fill which is compacted in lifts to the elevation of the mud slab bottom.

The differential settlement of the cut‐and‐cover tunnel shall not exceed 1/4 inches and the angular distortion is less than 1/500.

6.5.5 Track Foundation



The foundation below the ballast/sub‐ballast shall be designed per the requirements of AREMA, Volume I, Chapter 1, Part 1.

Site investigation shall be done in two phases, preliminary site investigation and detailed site investigation per AREMA requirements. Review of available subsurface information in the subject area shall be performed at the preliminary site investigation stage. A more detailed site investigation program shall be developed and executed to collect information on soil, rock, groundwater, subsurface drainage and topography. It shall also include investigation of the ballast roadbed interface, particularly “ballast pockets”, their density and drainage.

Where the subgrade material is considered unsuitable, the material shall be over‐excavated, replaced with structural backfill, and compacted in accordance with the requirements of the project specification on excavation and fill.

6.6 Construction Requirements

A. Deep Foundation Installation Records

As part of the As‐Built Plans, the Design‐Builder shall provide installation records for all foundations installed.

For drilled shafts, the installation records shall include drilling equipment used, temporary and permanent casing, materials encountered, bottom cleaning, SID results, top and bottom elevations, shaft and socket dimensions, and concrete placement time. For all drilled shafts with rock sockets or bearing on rock, the rock socket and the base of the drilled shaft shall be inspected utilizing an underwater video recorder or other means f of inspection which will provide equal or better inspection results. The video recorder shall be capable of capturing the depth of the recording. A digital copy of the video recording shall be submitted to the client as part of the drilled shaft installation record.

B. Dewatering and Groundwater Control

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for developing a substantially dry and stable subgrade for the prosecution of subsequent operations by implementing dewatering and groundwater control measures as appropriate. The groundwater condition shall be maintained in a way causing no damage to adjacent facilities, railroad infrastructure and other work.

C. Condition Surveys (Pre‐ and Post‐ construction survey)

1. Pre‐Construction Condition Survey

The Design‐Builder shall conduct a pre‐construction inspection and survey of the existing condition of all structures and properties for the purposes of generating photographic and video documentation of existing damage, leaks and cracks. The pre‐construction condition survey shall form the basis against which all new cracks, existing progressive cracks, or damage will be measured. The spatial extent of the pre‐construction survey shall encompass the Project Limits plus certain areas beyond the Project Limits, as detailed herein.

The full spatial extent of the Design‐Builder’s pre‐construction condition survey necessarily depends upon the Design‐Builder’s design and proposed means and methods of construction.



In its preparation for the pre‐construction survey, the Design‐Builder shall be responsible for predicting anticipated vibration and settlement effects at various offset distances from the Project Limits, and for ensuring that the pre‐construction condition survey encompasses at a minimum all properties within areas that are identified by the Design‐Builder to be potentially prone to: (i) ground vibration levels, expressed as resultant peak particle velocity, in excess of 0.50 inches per second; and (ii) predicted ground settlements of greater than ¼ inch. .

The Design‐Builder shall submit to the client the records and photographic and video documentation of the pre‐construction condition survey, which shall be signed and stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York.

2. Post‐Construction Condition Survey

The Design‐Builder shall conduct a post‐construction condition survey of the zone and properties covered by the pre‐construction conditions survey (see Section 5.5.1 herein). The post‐construction condition survey shall be performed by the Design‐Builder at Physical Completion, and it shall compare the post‐construction conditions with the conditions recorded in the pre‐construction condition survey. The location and scope of the post‐construction condition survey shall match those of the pre‐construction condition survey. The complete documentation of the post‐construction survey, describing the comparison with the preconstruction conditions and signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York, shall be submitted to the client.

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for geotechnical design and construction of all permanent and temporary structures, including assessing available information, geotechnical analysis and reporting, geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring, and protection of existing infrastructure, structures and utilities in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. These requirements are considered as a minimum and do not include all possible conditions that may be encountered in the Design‐Builder’s final design.

NYSDOT has performed subsurface investigations in the vicinity of the proposed station building. Boring logs and laboratory test data from these previous subsurface investigations are provided in Part 7 – Project Data. The soil and rock samples obtained during these previous subsurface investigations are available for inspection by the Design‐Builder at request. The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for making any arrangements to view the samples from the previous subsurface investigations, by first seeking the prior consent of the NYSDOT’s Project Manager. Information from these previous subsurface investigations shall be considered part of the Contract Documents only to the extent that they are used to represent soil conditions at the depths indicated within the respective borings drilled at the approximate locations shown. Presentation of this information in no way implies that subsurface conditions are the same at other locations and different times. The Design‐Builder shall form its own interpretation of the existing geotechnical data and satisfy itself as to the nature and behavior of the ground and sub‐soil, the form and nature of the Site, and nature of the Work that may affect its detailed design, construction method, and tools.



6.1 Standards and References

The Design‐Builder shall perform geotechnical activities in accordance with the Contract Requirements, the applicable Standards, Codes and Manuals.

ACI ‐ American Concrete Institute

ACI 318 – Building Code for Reinforced Concrete

AISC ‐ American Institute of Steel Construction

Specification for Structural Steel Building, Load and Resistance Factor Design

AMTRAK

AMTRAK Station Program and Planning, Standards and Guidelines, Station Manual 2.2

AREMA – American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association

AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering

ASTM – American Society of Testing Materials

ASTM D1143 – Standard Method of Testing Piles under Axial Compressive Load

ASTM D3689 – Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundation Under Static Axial Tensile Load

ASTM D3966 – Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundation Under Lateral Load

ASTM D6760 – Standard Test Method for Integrity Testing of Concrete Deep Foundations by Ultrasonic Crosshole Testing

AWS – American Welding Society

AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel

AWS D1.3 – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

AWS D1.4 – Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel

Burlington Northern & Santa Fe Railway/Union Pacific Railroad

Guidelines for Temporary Shoring

FHWA:

Static Pile Load Test Manual

Micro‐pile Design and Construction Guideline

New York State Building Code (2010)

SEI – Structural Engineering Institute

Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

NYSDOT

A. Access Management Requirements



B. Annual Report titled "Axle Factor Update" C. Approved Materials List D. Highway Design Manual – Chapters 20 and 21 (CADD Standards and Procedures) E. Comprehensive Pavement Design Manual F. Consultant Instructions G. Design Consultant Manual H. Engineering Bulletins I. Engineering Instructions and Directives J. Environmental Procedures Manual (EPM) / The Environmental Manual (TEM) K. General Design and Construction Requirements for Occupancies L. Geotechnical Engineering Bureau Manuals and Publications M. GCP‐17, Procedure for the Control of Granular Materials N. Land Surveying Standards and Procedures Manual O. Manual for Uniform Record Keeping P. Materials Bureau ‐ Applicable Sampling and Testing Manuals, Inspection Manuals, and

Materials Methods. Q. New York State Supplement to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices R. Prestressed Concrete Construction Manual S. Project Development Manual T. Reference Marker Manual U. Rules and Regulations Governing the Accommodation of Utilities within the State

Highway Right of Way V. Special Specifications W. Standard Sheets X. Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials Y. Steel Construction Manual (SCM) Z. U.S. Customary Standard Sheets AA. Work Zone Traffic Control Manual

The above is a partial listing of applicable NYSDOT Engineering Manuals and Guidelines. The Design Builder shall perform the Work in conformance with all current NYSDOT Engineering Manuals and Guidelines.

6.2 Design Requirements

The Design‐Builder shall at a minimum provide the following:

A. Geotechnical Work Plan

B. Geotechnical investigation plan

C. Geotechnical data report

D. Subsurface investigation records

E. Seismic assessment report

F. Geotechnical instrumentation and construction monitoring plans

G. Foundation design reports



6.3 Geotechnical Work Plan

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a geotechnical work plan for the project. The plan shall identify the required geotechnical scope of work that the Design‐Builder plans to complete for the design and construction of the Project. The geotechnical work plan shall include the following:

A. Design‐Builder’s knowledge and understanding of the geotechnical, geologic, hydrogeology and seismic settings of the Project Site and how the nature and behavior of the soil, rock, groundwater and subsurface conditions will affect the investigation, design and methods of construction;

B. Anticipated methods of analysis and design for the foundation of the station building, high‐level platform and cut‐and‐cover tunnel and a discussion of the foundation optimization process and rationale for selection of the foundation types;

C. Identify key Project constraints and describe how the geotechnical activities will be designed and constructed to meet these constraints;

D. Identification of all principal geotechnical deliverables and activities;

E. A narrative describing the approach to quality control during design and construction of the geotechnical Works;

F. A risk register identifying all major design and construction risks of the geotechnical activities, and describe how these risks are managed and mitigated;

G. Resumes of the Foundations Lead Designer, Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer, and Seismic Specialist;

H. Minimum numbers, depths, types of subsurface investigations to be carried out for the station building, high‐level platform and the tunnel design, including a narrative of the in‐situ tests and laboratory tests to be carried out;

I. Minimum numbers, and types of axial load tests for each foundation type, size and subsurface condition;

J. Minimum numbers, and types of lateral load tests for each foundation type and subsurface condition;

K. Minimum percentage and/or numbers of driven piles as tested piles to be dynamically tested;

L. Crosshole sonic logging shall be done on all drilled shafts according to NYSDOT specifications. Thermal integrity profiling shall be done on all demonstration shafts, in addition to the first three production shaft of each diameter size. Thermal integrity data shall be collected continuously and remotely through embedded sensors. Location of embedded sensors arrays shall be assumed similar to Crosshole sonic locations.



6.4 Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation Plan

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a geotechnical investigation plan, including specifications for performing the Work. The geotechnical investigation plan shall include the criteria or rationale used in developing the plan, and shall identify the locations of all field investigation sites, and borings, together with their depths, sampling intervals, and a description of both the field and laboratory testing programs utilized. The geotechnical investigation plan shall be prepared and signed and sealed by the Design‐Builder’s Lead Designer. The geotechnical investigation plan shall include details of borehole abandonment procedures and a list of all permits required to perform the geotechnical investigation.

The Design‐Builder shall plan and conduct subsurface investigations in accordance with the AREMA’s Standards for geotechnical subsurface investigation (Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 22), NYSDOT’s Standards for subsurface exploration programs, and as deemed necessary by the Design‐Builder’s Lead Designer to establish the geotechnical conditions and to perform all geotechnical and foundation design and analysis. Borings shall be uniformly distributed or located in accordance with the loading pattern imposed by the structure. The minimum number of borings is listed below.

Subject Area Minimum Number of Borings

Station Building 3, not overlapping the borings included in

GDR

High‐Level Platform Every 200 ft

Baggage Ramp (Adjacent to Station Building) 2

Pedestrian/Baggage Tunnel 2

The Design‐Builder is responsible to obtain all necessary permits from Amtrak and CSX and to conduct the field investigation without affecting railroad operation.

The Design‐Builder shall determine the coordinate location and ground surface elevation for each boring and field investigation position, and shall show the coordinates, station and offset, and elevation for each individual boring log or investigation record. Coordinates and station and offsets for the borings shall be referenced to Amtrak Mile Post 371.0 stationing. Elevations shall be referenced to the Project datum and horizontal control system. Boring horizontal coordinates shall be accurate to +/‐ 1.0 foot; vertical coordinates shall be accurate to +/‐ 0.5 foot.



6.5 Geotechnical Data Report

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a geotechnical data report, signed and sealed by the Foundations Lead Designer. The geotechnical data report shall serve as a factual depiction of the subsurface conditions and at a minimum it shall include:

Local geology and groundwater condition

a. A detailed description of the investigation methods;

b. Complete records (typed logs using NYSDOT log format) with summary tables of investigation;

c. Complete records with summary tables of laboratory test results;

d. Exploratory hole location plan, showing locations of any existing (pre‐award) exploratory holes for which data was used by the Design‐Builder plus locations of post‐award exploratory hole locations undertaken by the Design‐Builder; and Plots of laboratory test results versus elevations for separate areas and soil types.

6.6 Subsurface Investigation Records

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for keeping a continuous and accurate log of the materials encountered and a complete record of the operation of progressing the casing. Where driving is used, a record of the number of blows required to advance the sampling barrel, each 6 inches in the soil where each sample is taken, shall be kept. Records shall be kept using the NYSDOT Subsurface Exploration Log Form (US Units). Detailed description of soil and rock samples shall be provided per requirements in AREMA Specification, Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 22. Records shall be kept per AREMA’s specification, Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 22.

The Design‐Builder shall use Bentley gINT® or similar commercial software to develop and maintain an electronic database of subsurface information including in‐situ test and laboratory test results, and to produce boring records.

6.7 Seismic Assessment Report

Prior to issue to the NYSDOT, the Design‐Builder shall ensure that the seismic assessment report is peer‐reviewed by a suitably qualified specialist in this field, and the findings and conclusions of the peer review shall be included in an appendix to the Seismic Assessment Report. The seismic specialist who will perform the review of this report shall meet the minimum requirements specified in General Instructions to Proposers.

A. Seismic Site Response Analyses ‐ Site‐specific seismic response analysis shall be performed to develop design free‐field response spectra in accordance with AREMA and Amtrak Guidelines. The Design‐Builder shall develop dynamic soil/rock properties for use in the seismic analysis based on PS‐Logging data as well as widely‐used empirical correlations. Spatial variation of ground motions shall be accounted for, as applicable.

B. Soil Structure Interaction ‐ Seismic soil structure interaction evaluation of deep foundations shall include determination of the maximum imposed curvatures and bending from earthquake ground motions and structure response, including free‐field soil strains



modified for soil‐foundation‐structure interaction coupled with deep foundation deformations associated with earthquake loads imparted to the foundation by the structure (i.e. inertial response).

C. Liquefaction ‐ Evaluation of liquefaction potential shall be performed. Should this show that liquefaction is a potential hazard at the Site, the risk potential on the station building, high‐level platform and the tunnel shall be evaluated by the Design Builder, and any remediation solutions proposed by the Design‐Builder shall be demonstrated by analytical and field methods.

6.8 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Construction Monitoring Plan

A. Monitoring of Existing Structures and Utilities ‐ The Design‐Builder shall develop, implement, and maintain a geotechnical instrumentation and construction monitoring plan to monitor vibrations, accelerations, vertical settlement, and lateral movement of temporary support structures and adjacent ground, and existing infrastructure during construction including the existing station building, utilities and other infrastructures within the zone of influence of construction.

Wherever vibration‐producing activities could affect a structure, building, or utility, the Design‐Builder shall prepare a Vibration Monitoring and Control Plan to address the potential impacts to nearby receptors due to construction or demolition activities associated with this Project. The term “receptor” includes buildings, structures, utilities, and sensitive operations/processes for which construction impacts or Work above recommended limits may be detrimental. The plan shall include ground and air‐blast vibration threshold limits.

B. The monitoring plan shall address how the Design‐Builder intends to complete vibration‐related activities and meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Develop a list of all anticipated vibration producing activities and where they are expected to occur;

2. Develop a list of all potentially impacted receptors from these activities;

3. Provide a vibration susceptibility analysis for each identified receptor, and establish a vibration control limit to preclude damage, including threshold damage, to each of the identified receptors.

4. Provide a plan for notifying the public of potential vibration impacts, responsible Project personnel, receptors requiring precondition surveys, and vibration monitoring activities;

5. Monitor construction related vibrations at the nearest and most critical receptor(s), and notify appropriate project personnel immediately if established vibration limits are exceeded;

6. Provide instrumentation locations, monitoring procedures, and a description of the monitoring devices and/or manufacturers’ brochures in the submitted plan;



7. Assess any sensitive community or business operations that may be affected by vibrations;

8. Provide recommendations for vibration‐limiting methods to meet the established maximum safe vibration levels.

9. List of receptors shall include, but not limited to:

• Utilities

• Nearby bridges

• Buildings

• Newly constructed elements

• Existing structures within zone of influence of vibration producing activities

C. Construction Monitoring ‐ The Design‐Builder’s construction monitoring plan shall include details of the proposed program of instrumentation and monitoring, monitoring frequency, assesses the impacts to existing structures and utilities, establishes threshold values of the monitored parameters, and describes the response plan that will be implemented when threshold parameters are exceeded. A system of construction monitoring shall be established to include the following:

1. Measurement of ground water levels and ground water pressure.

2. Monitoring of settlement of the permanent structures and surrounding area both during and after construction. In all cases, monitoring shall be initiated well in advance of construction to establish baseline readings.

3. Measurement of lateral movement of permanent structures.

4. Measurement of vibration levels of the permanent structures and surrounding area both during and after construction. Ambient vibration monitoring shall be conducted well in advance of construction to establish baseline readings.

D. The extent of the monitoring program will depend on the size and type of the affected structures. A detailed monitoring program shall be prepared for each structure affected by the work, subject to review by NYSDOTAmtrak.

E. Where adjacent properties may be affected by the works, the monitoring program shall allow for readings on fixed points on the structures and buildings, to allow both total and differential settlements to be assessed and lateral movements to be determined. The monitoring program shall also allow for access to conduct vibration monitoring on adjacent properties.

F. Potential Instrumentation

The instrumentation and monitoring program shall include appropriate types and quantities of monitoring instruments capable of measuring horizontal and vertical movements, tilt of adjacent structures, soil pore pressures, vibrations, and noise, as applicable.



Instrumentation to be used in the monitoring programs to control and assist design and construction could include:

1. Piezometers and observation wells

Inclinometers

Deep benchmark

Deformation monitoring points

Grid crack gauge

Geophone

Top of rail monitoring point

2. Survey stations on structures and at ground level locations 3. Tiltmeters 4. Deep settlement points and extensometers 5. Strain and load‐measuring devices 6. Seismographs, geophones, and others.

The types and numbers of instruments will depend on factors including the size, type and location of proposed work. The design and distribution of instrumentation shall demonstrate an understanding of the need, purpose and advantages of using each proposed type. Responsibilities for design, procurement, installation, recording, maintenance and protection, and monitoring plan, criteria and performance requirements shall be clearly stated in the specifications and Contract Documents. These shall also contain the procedures to be followed when readings during construction reach any specified threshold values, or when construction changes are deemed necessary. The detailed instrumentation plan and response plans shall be developed by the Design‐Build Contractor and submitted for review and approved by NYSDOTAmtrak.

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for ensuring that all instruments used for the Project are calibrated within the 12 months prior to its use on the Project and as required by the manufacturer, unless the Project Specification or other Contract requirements state that a more recent calibration is required.

G. Instrumentation Data Reporting

The Design‐Builder shall ensure that the instrumentation can be read remotely and that data shall be uploaded to a website provided by the Design‐Builder, and which shall be accessible remotely by both the Design‐Builder and the NYSDOT. Remote‐access functionality shall include the ability to extract data and to isolate an individual monitoring point or multiple points. The presentation system shall include the functionality to modify the extents and scale of data plotting such that arbitrary views are available.

The Design‐Builder shall provide weekly construction instrumentation monitoring reports to the NYSDOT. Monitoring reports shall be interpretive in nature, and shall enumerate any corrections applied to the data including, but not limited to any notification measures taken



regarding data. The weekly reports shall include clear and explicit statements of exceedances of any pre‐determined threshold values. The Design‐Builder shall maintain the instrumentation and monitor the measurements during and after construction up to Final Acceptance.

6.9 Foundation Design Report

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a foundation design report for all structures included in the Project. The foundation design report shall detail the analysis and design of each foundation element, including any foundation optimization process such as foundation element pile spacing, and shall detail the anticipated total and differential settlements over time. The foundation design report shall be signed and sealed by the Foundations Lead Designer.

The following information shall be included in the Foundation Design Report.

A. Subsurface Information

1. As drilled boring location plan and subsurface profiles within the footprint of the new station building and the high‐level platform and along new tunnel alignment, and cross‐sections, as appropriate

2. Description of geology and subsurface conditions within the Project site

3. Summary of lab and field test results

B. Recommended Geotechnical Design Parameters

1. Evaluation of the engineering properties of all soil and rock types, including the expected average and range of soil and rock strengths, index properties and deformation properties

C. Design Method and Foundation Recommendations

1. Design assumptions

2. Design methods

3. Software used

4. Design criteria

5. Selection of foundation systems

6. Summary of loads

7. Summary of resistance

8. Foundation recommendations, including type, size, depth, arrangement of foundation elements

D. Construction Considerations

1. Obstructions

2. Planned field testing programs, including pile and drilled shaft integrity and load testing

3. Slope stability, support of excavation and groundwater control considerations



4. Time‐related settlement and lateral deformation and determination of the resulting effects on adjacent structures

5. Protection of existing structures and utilities

Deep Foundations‐ (Vertical Capacity, Group Spacing and Performance; Settlement; Downdrag; Lateral Load Capacity; Wave Equation Analysis; Deep Foundation Testing and Monitoring)

A. Drilled Shaft

• Driven Pile

B. Foundation Load Testing

• Load Testing for Drilled Shaft • Load Testing for Driven Pile • Load Testing Report

C. Support of Excavation

• Support of Excavation Systems • (Design Load ‐ Vertical Load and Lateral Pressure, Stability; Deflection; Groundwater Control) • Sheetpile • Soldier Pile with Lagging • Earth Slope • Rock Anchors • Construction Consideration

D. Cut‐and‐Cover Tunnel

• Functional Requirements • (Water Tightness; Corrosion Control; Fire Life Safety) • Design Loads • (Vertical Loads; Short‐Term Horizontal Loads; Long‐Term Horizontal Loads, Dynamic Earth

Pressures; Water Pressure; Loading on Underground Reinforced Concrete Box Structures) • Rock Classification • Ground Strength and Deformation Parameters • Temporary/Permanent Support Design • Settlement Evaluation and Damage Assessment • Protection Measures • Construction Consideration

E. Construction Requirements

F. Deep Foundation Installation Records

G. Support of Excavation Installation Records

H. Cut‐and‐Cover Structure Installation Records

I. Dewatering and Groundwater Control



Condition Surveys (Pre‐ and Post‐ construction survey)

Station Building and High‐Level Platform Foundation Design

The Design‐Builder shall design and construct permanent foundations based on the requirements of AREMA Railway Engineering Manual. In addition to the applicable subsections from AREMA cited below, it must be noted that the requirements per design building codes listed in Section 2 will also be considered, with the stricter requirements applying.

It is anticipated that shallow foundation may not be desirable for this project, subject to further evaluations. Deep foundation may prove to be more appropriate from technical, cost and constructability aspects. Shallow foundation is not permitted for the support of the Station building columns, high level platform, and baggage platform.

Deep foundations will include both drilled shafts and micropiles. Driven piles are not permitted due to the concerns of vibration induced during pile driving which may have detrimental impact to the railroad tracks.

When designing deep foundations to be installed in populated areas, consideration will be given to the impact of noise and vibration to the environment. Specific noise and vibration limits will be established to conform to local codes and project requirements. Ground consolidation, existing structure settlements, and disturbance to local residents due to the installation of deep foundations will be maintained within limits as specified herein.

Drilled shafts will be designed for static loading in accordance with the requirements of AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 4 and 24. Micropiles will be designed in accordance with the requirements of FHWA Micropile Design and Construction Guideline due to the absence of AREMA guidelines on micropile.

Seismic design of foundations shall be in accordance with Chapter 9 of AREMA Volume II, considering the effects of inertial loading from the superstructure and kinematic effects due to loading from the soil (soil‐structure interaction). When liquefaction of soils can occur, lateral resistance calculations will assume zero soil support or residual strength for liquefied soils from the design water level to the bottom of the zone of potential liquefaction. The lateral displacement (transverse and longitudinal) in either direction at the superstructure level will be limited to a value consistent with the design limits of the superstructure. The calculations for the horizontal movement of the foundations, substructure, superstructure and bearings will be based on elastic seismic loads (R =1). A detailed structural analysis shall be provided to include induced foundation lateral and axial loadings as well as vertical loading on batter piles, stability and pile bending stress determinations during the occurrence of liquefaction.

The differential settlement of the station building and the high‐level platform shall not exceed 1/4 inches and the angular distortion is less than 1/500.

Drilled Shaft



Drilled shafts shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of AREMA Volume 2, Chapter 8, Part 24. Drilled shaft shall be analyzed for both vertical capacity and the lateral load capacity. For vertical capacity, axial compression and uplift resistance shall be designed using static analysis methods in accordance with AREMA. Deep foundation capacity and serviceability requirements under seismic loading will conform to the requirements specified in AREMA Volume II, Chapter 9.

Drilled shafts shall also be designed to adequately resist the lateral loads transferred to them from the structure without exceeding the allowable deformation of the structure or overstressing the foundation elements. The lateral load resistance of the individual and group of drilled shaft elements shall be analyzed. The analysis shall consider nonlinear soil pressure‐displacement relationships, soil/structure interaction, group action, groundwater, and cyclic and static and dynamic load conditions. The performance evaluation of drilled shaft shall include the determination of vertical and horizontal movements, rotation, axial load, shear, and bending moment for the foundation elements.

The lateral resistance of a single drilled shaft and a group of shafts shall be analyzed for all limit states. Group efficiency and lateral load reduction factors shall be considered based on the shaft spacing as specified in the AREMA Specifications.

The design of drilled shaft shall consider the limits on total and differential settlement caused by the structure loads. Settlement induced by the drill shaft group in the subsoil shall be evaluated. In addition, settlement of the individual drill shaft shall also be evaluated. The foundation shall be designed to keep the settlement within the allowable values as specified in AREMA.

The drilled shaft design shall consider the effect of negative skin friction from existing ongoing ground settlement, liquefaction, construction dewatering, or shaft installation. Downdrag loads shall be determined by considering the load transfer distribution along the drilled shaft as well as the group layout. The magnitude of the downdrag load shall be applied as additional dead load on the deep foundation.

An adequate amount of testing as specified in Section 4.7.2.1 will be required for drilled shaft to evaluate foundation capacity and integrity, to verify design assumptions, to determine foundation installation characteristics, to evaluate the foundation installation system performance, and to establish foundation depths. The testing and monitoring shall include all necessary test shafts, dynamic testing, static load testing, non‐destructive integrity testing and quality control testing. Testing and monitoring of drilled shaft shall be in accordance with the applicable ASTM and AREMA.

For drilled shaft foundations, include the following information in the Foundation Design Report:



3. Nominal Uplift Resistance and resistance factors




5. Top of Drilled Shaft elevation

6. Top of Rock Socket Elevation

7. Tip of Drilled Shaft Elevation

8. Drilled Shaft Diameter

9. Rock Socket Diameter

10. Reinforcement Cage cross sections

11. Concrete and reinforcement steel properties

2. Micropiles

Micropiles are defined as small diameter drilled and grouted non‐displacement pile with a reinforcing casing and a center reinforcing bar. Permanent casings and load testing are required. Micropiles shall be analyzed for both vertical capacity and the lateral load capacity. For vertical capacity, axial compression and uplift resistance shall be designed using static analysis methods in accordance with FHWA micropile design and construction guidelines. Deep foundation capacity and serviceability requirements under seismic loading will conform to the requirements specified in AREMA Volume II, Chapter 9. A micropile specialty Subcontractor is required for design and construction of micropiles.

Micropiles shall also be designed to adequately resist the lateral loads transferred to them from the structure without exceeding the allowable deformation of the structure or overstressing the foundation elements. The lateral load resistance of the individual and group of micropile elements shall be analyzed. The analysis shall consider nonlinear soil pressure‐displacement relationships, soil/structure interaction, group action, groundwater, and cyclic and static and dynamic load conditions. The performance evaluation of micropile shall include the determination of vertical and horizontal movements, rotation, axial load, shear, and bending moment for the foundation elements.

The design of micropile shall consider the limits on total and differential settlement caused by the structure loads. Settlement induced by the micropile group in the subsoil shall be evaluated. In addition, settlement of the individual drill shaft shall also be evaluated. The foundation shall be designed to keep the settlement within the allowable values as specified in FHWA micropile design and construction guidelines.

The micropile design shall consider the effect of negative skin friction from existing ongoing ground settlement, liquefaction, construction dewatering, or micropile installation. Downdrag loads shall be determined by considering the load transfer distribution along the micropile as well as the group layout. The magnitude of the downdrag load shall be applied as additional dead load on the deep foundation.

Subcontractor shall submit documentation before the start of construction that he has successfully completed at least three micropile projects and at least installed 150 micropiles within the last three years with micropile diameters and lengths similar to those anticipated



for this project. Documentation shall include the general contractor and owner’s name and current contact information with descriptions of each project. A design geotechnical engineer is required to design micropiles. The design engineer shall be a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of New York and shall have at least 10 years of experience in designing micropiles and drilled foundations with capacities and in subsurface conditions similar to those of this project.

Double corrosion protection shall be provided to micropile central reinforcing steel bar in accordance with FHWA‐SA‐97‐070 recommendations. Maintain a minimum of 3 inches grout cover to the reinforcing bar along the entire length of the micropile. Galvanize exposed reinforcing and permanent casing that connect directly to caps in accordance with FHWA micropile design and construction guidelines.

For Micropile foundations, include the following information in the Foundation Design Report:

1. Micropile layout, diameter, inclination, minimum reinforcing casing and center rebar, and pile to cap connection

2. Micropile tip elevations, and bond lengths. The rock socket shall have a minimum bond length of ten feet in Class 1b rock. Neglect tip resistance in tension and compression



5. Nominal Uplift (tension) Resistance and resistance factors


7. Nominal Lateral Resistance and resistance factors

8. Factored Lateral Resistance

Do not install reinforcing casing or begin drilling within six times pile diameter, center to center or five feet, whichever is greater until grout in piles reaches initial set. Grout the micropiles the same day the bond length is drilled.

3. Existing Drilled Shaft

During the preliminary field investigation, two test pits were excavated along the west side of the existing station building to expose existing drilled shaft foundations. A total of two foundation cores were retrieved from the existing drilled shaft, one at each test pit. Laboratory testing was performed on the core samples including petrography and uniaxial compressive strength with static moduli. The laboratory testing results are included in the Geotechnical Data Report of the Request for Proposal package. The Design‐Builder shall assess the condition of the existing drilled shaft and evaluate the possibility of reusing the existing foundation to support the new building structure.

Foundation Load Testing



The Design‐Builder shall carry out sufficient axial load tests to verify the design nominal resistance for each production micropile/shaft type, diameter and subsurface condition type (specifically, either founded within soil only, or founded within or upon rock). For each type and diameter of micropile/shaft per subsurface condition type, a minimum of 5% of the total number of micropiles/shafts but no less than one static load test shall be performed.

After completion of a micropile/shaft load test, the Design‐Builder shall be responsible for either fully removing the test pile from the ground or for cutting off the test pile at 2 feet below final grade.

Load Testing for Drilled Shaft

Install one load test drilled shaft prior to installation of production drilled shafts. Select test locations to represent different subsurface conditions and/or construction methods. Perform axial compression load test for each drilled shaft size based on site variability. If the Design‐Builder chooses to alter construction methods, an additional axial load test will be required on a test shaft constructed with the new method. Perform axial load tests using Osterberg Cell load equipment in accordance with ASTM D1143.

Perform integrity testing on all test shafts and production shafts. At a minimum, integrity testing requirements shall comprise Crosshole Sonic Log (CSL) testing on all drilled shafts.

Load Testing for Micropiles

Install load test micropile to demonstrate micropile subcontractor’s ability to successfully install micropiles. Select test locations to represent different subsurface conditions and/or construction methods. Perform axial compression load test for each micropile size based on site variability. If the Design‐Builder chooses to alter construction methods, an additional axial load test will be required on a test micropile constructed with the new method.

Load Testing Report

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a Micropile/Shaft Geotechnical Nominal Resistance Test Implementation Report containing test procedures, instrumentation plan including measurements along the micropiles/shafts, calibration procedures, test micropile/shaft locations, micropile/shaft sizes, and types being tested and equipment used. At a minimum, drilled shaft load test piles shall be instrumented along the length to establish load transfer (t‐z) curves for each soil layer and (q‐z) curve for the bearing layer(s). Include crosshole sonic logging results for drilled shafts.

The Design‐Builder shall prepare a Micropile/Shaft Geotechnical Nominal Resistance Test Results Report containing test results per micropile/shaft size and type tested; production micropile/shaft installation, and production piling acceptance criteria. The Design‐Builder shall interpret the load test results and use them in the Design of Foundation such that the axial deformations of the micropile/shaft do not exceed the structural limit.

C. Support of Excavation (Temporary Shoring for Cut‐and‐Cover Tunnel Construction)

The Design‐Builder shall design the temporary shoring system for the construction of the proposed cut‐and‐cover tunnel in accordance with the guidelines of AREMA Volume II, Chapter



8, Part 28 and the publication of Burlington Northern & Santa Fe Railway (BNSF) and Union Pacific Railroad (UPRR) on temporary shoring. Where conflicts exist, the most stringent specification should be applied. These shoring systems will be designed to resist all anticipated dead and live, vertical and lateral loads. These loads will include those induce by soil, groundwater, live load, surcharge and construction equipment.

The temporary shoring system shall include anchored soldier beam with lagging wall. Open cut is not allowed. If anchored systems with tie‐backs are used, the relative locations between tie‐backs and existing/future utilities need to be evaluated to ensure no conflict. Ground anchors shall be cement‐grouted tiebacks designed, furnished, installed, tested and stressed in accordance with the AREMA requirements.

Temporary loadings need to be considered in design. Temporary loads include, but are not limited to construction surcharge, ground and groundwater pressure, and live load from railroad tracks.

Loads due to soils shall be derived using the maximum values of the saturated densities. Lateral earth pressures will be estimated on the basis of the anticipated movement of the structure. Active and passive earth pressure based on Coulomb earth pressure theory will be used. If there is no movement expected, at‐rest earth pressure will be used. The design of the retaining structures shall be based on the maximum lateral pressures that will develop behind the structures.

Hydrostatic pressure induced by the groundwater table shall be included in the lateral pressures.

Lateral pressure induced by surcharge loads applied at the ground surface behind the wall shall be included as appropriate. These surcharge loads will be evaluated on a site‐specific basis, and will include uniform surcharges, strip loads, line loads, point loads, area loads, train loads, and construction equipment loads.

Structures and structural members shall be designed to have design strengths at all sections at least equal to the required strengths calculated for the loads and forces in such combinations as stipulated in AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 2, which represents various combinations of loads and group loads that are applicable and the load combination that requires the maximum strength shall be used. Stability analyses shall be conducted in accordance with AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 28 for all temporary shoring structures.

For an anchored system with tiebacks, requirements on embedment depth, allowable stress and tiebacks need to be satisfied in accordance with the AREMA specification.

For braced excavation, it shall be designed using the apparent earth pressure diagram indicated in AREMA Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 28.5.5.

Calculated deflections of temporary shoring system and top of rail elevation shall not exceed the criteria outlined in Table 1 of Design Guideline for Temporary Shoring (BNSF and UPRR).

Horizontal distance from Maximum horizontal Maximum acceptable



When evaluation indicates that the support of excavation system may be insufficient to protect structures adjacent to support of excavation, direct support of structures by underpinning shall be evaluated. Underpinning methods to be evaluated include:

1. Pit underpinning

2. Jacked pile underpinning

3. Micropile underpinning

For support of excavation, include the following information in the support of excavation design report:

1. Location of support o excavation system

2. Support of excavation type

3. Support of excavation shoring member size

4. Support of excavation embedment depth

5. Bending stiffness (EI) and axial stiffness (AE) of bracing elements

6. Lateral earth pressure distribution

7. Design calculation of tieback, including anchor number and location; load for each ground anchor; Inclination angle; type and size of ground anchor; minimum bonded length; and minimum stressing length

8. Design of grout mix including non‐shrink additives and compressive strength test results from a certified testing laboratory

D. Cut‐and‐Cover Tunnel

A pedestrian/luggage tunnel connecting the station building and the high‐level platform will be designed and constructed for the project. The approximate dimension inside the tunnel is 20 ft wide, 11 ft high with an invert at approximately 18 ft below grade. Although there may be different ways to construct the tunnel, only the cut‐and‐cover method is allowed and assumes that sufficient track outages will be staged to allow for construction. Sufficient track outage is defined as the two tracks between the station building and the high‐level platform removed from service for a time period of ________.

The construction sequence for the cut‐and‐cover tunnel is:

shoring to track C/L measured at a right angle from track

movement of shoring system horizontal or vertical movement of rail

12’ < S < 18’ 3/8” 1/4”

18’ < S < 24’ 1/2” 1/4”



1. Remove the two tracks between the station building and the high‐level platform from service

2. Install support of excavation along the perimeter of the cut‐and‐cover tunnel

3. Construct the cut‐and‐cover tunnel

4. Restore ground and track substructure and track and restore service to the two tracks

The Design‐Builder will design the cut‐and‐cover tunnel in accordance with the requirements of AREMA.

The required loading and forces for design shall follow the Structural Design Guidelines in Chapter ___ taking into account the effects of construction staging on existing and new construction. In addition to the loads and forces in Chapter ___, the following loads should be considered.

1. Computation of backfill pressures shall be as per AREMA, Volume II, Chapter 8, Part 5. Concentrated loads on below grade walls to include, but not limited to, railroad loading and foundations, shall be superimposed.

2. Loads due to soils will be derived using the maximum values of the saturated densities. The submerged densities will be used for soil unless the location is above the standing water table.

3. Horizontal ground pressure for tunnels in soil shall be determined from at‐rest earth pressure theory. Horizontal ground pressure for mixed‐face profiles in soil and rock are not expected.

4. The effects of hydrostatic pressure and buoyancy shall be considered whenever the presence of groundwater is indicated. During construction and backfill operations, the elevation of groundwater shall be observed and controlled so that the calculated total weight of structure and backfill shall always exceed the calculated uplift due to buoyancy by at least 10%. The design shall take into account the effect of hydrostatic pressure pertaining to possible construction sequences. The backfill shall be considered as the volume contained within vertical planes defined by the outside limits of the structure. No value shall be assigned to contact soil friction.

Construction joints shall be formed at such locations where they won’t reduce the effectiveness of the lining to resist pressure from surrounding earth or rock. Expansion joints are not required where construction joints are provided. Waterstops shall be provided as necessary.

The Design‐Builder shall over‐excavate a minimum of 5 ft below the design elevation of the bottom of the mud slab and backfill with structural fill which is compacted in lifts to the elevation of the mud slab bottom.

The differential settlement of the cut‐and‐cover tunnel shall not exceed 1/4 inches and the angular distortion is less than 1/500.



6.10 Construction Requirements

Deep Foundation Installation Records

As part of the As‐Built Plans, the Design‐Builder shall provide installation records for all foundations installed.

For drilled shafts, the installation records shall include drilling equipment used, temporary and permanent casing, materials encountered, bottom cleaning, SID results, top and bottom elevations, shaft and socket dimensions, and concrete placement time. For all drilled shafts with rock sockets or bearing on rock, the rock socket and the base of the drilled shaft shall be inspected utilizing an underwater video recorder or other means f of inspection which will provide equal or better inspection results. The video recorder shall be capable of capturing the depth of the recording. A digital copy of the video recording shall be submitted to the client as part of the drilled shaft installation record.

Dewatering and Groundwater Control

The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for developing a substantially dry and stable subgrade for the prosecution of subsequent operations by implementing dewatering and groundwater control measures as appropriate. The groundwater condition shall be maintained in a way causing no damage to adjacent facilities, railroad infrastructure and other work.

Condition Surveys (Pre‐ and Post‐ construction survey)

Pre‐Construction Condition Survey

The Design‐Builder shall conduct a pre‐construction inspection and survey of the existing condition of all structures and properties for the purposes of generating photographic and video documentation of existing damage, leaks and cracks. The pre‐construction condition survey shall form the basis against which all new cracks, existing progressive cracks, or damage will be measured. The spatial extent of the pre‐construction survey shall encompass the Project Limits plus certain areas beyond the Project Limits, as detailed herein.

The full spatial extent of the Design‐Builder’s pre‐construction condition survey necessarily depends upon the Design‐Builder’s design and proposed means and methods of construction. In its preparation for the pre‐construction survey, the Design‐Builder shall be responsible for predicting anticipated vibration and settlement effects at various offset distances from the Project Limits, and for ensuring that the pre‐construction condition survey encompasses at a minimum all properties within areas that are identified by the Design‐Builder to be potentially prone to: (i) ground vibration levels, expressed as resultant peak particle velocity, in excess of 0.50 inches per second; and (ii) predicted ground settlements of greater than ¼ inch. .

The Design‐Builder shall submit to the client the records and photographic and video documentation of the pre‐construction condition survey, which shall be signed and stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York.

Post‐Construction Condition Survey



The Design‐Builder shall conduct a post‐construction condition survey of the zone and properties covered by the pre‐construction conditions survey (see Section 5.5.1 herein). The post‐construction condition survey shall be performed by the Design‐Builder at Physical Completion, and it shall compare the post‐construction conditions with the conditions recorded in the pre‐construction condition survey. The location and scope of the post‐construction condition survey shall match those of the pre‐construction condition survey. The complete documentation of the post‐construction survey, describing the comparison with the preconstruction conditions and signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York, shall be submitted to the client.

SECTION 7. TEMPORARY FACILITY REQUIREMENTS

The Design Builder shall enable Amtrak to provide uninterrupted service to Rochester passengers. The Design‐Builder shall establish an operational and fully ADA compliant temporary station facility prior to the demolition of the existing Rochester Station. This station shall include:

A. A triple‐wide trailer containing essential station operation functions: 1. Accessible entries on the parking lot and track sides of the station, including stairs,

ramps, platforms with guardrails and handrails.

2. A Waiting Area of 950 sf, containing between 38 and 44 fixed seats.

3. Men’s and Women’s single‐occupancy ADA accessible public restrooms.

4. Dual height drinking fountain

5. Provisions for a minimum of 3 vending machines and 1 Quik‐Trak self‐service ticketing machine

6. Amtrak standard wall‐mounted PIDS display

7. A minimum ceiling height of 9 feet throughout

8. A ticketing office with a single workstation and pass‐through stainless steel baggage counter with built‐in scale relocated from the existing station. Ticketing shall be secured from Waiting with glass panels while open and a roll‐down grille when closed.

9. Ticketing shall be secured from the Baggage area with a door.

10. Baggage area shall be directly accessible from the exterior with a roll‐up door. A separate ramp shall be provided for use for baggage only.

11. Passenger and baggage paths to the boarding platform shall be segregated.

12. Back‐of‐house spaces to include an office with closets and utility connections, employee break area with kitchenette and a minimum of 8 lockers, and unisex employee restroom.

13. Include interior and exterior windows in all locations depicted on the preliminary plans.

14. Temporary station facility must have a security system compatible with Amtrak SDP.



15. Provide an exterior storage shed for equipment, minimum 10 feet x 20 feet

16. Include screened dumpster enclosure for both garbage and recycling.

17. Provide bollards at the station entry to protect passengers from vehicular traffic.

B. Provide a separate trailer for IT requirements

C. Design‐Builder shall provide adequate accessible parking spaces during construction in the parking location closest to the station entry. The Design‐Builder shall allow for potential relocation and restriping of accessible parking throughout construction, as the location closest to station entry may change.

D. The existing low level platform will be extended and utilized for the duration of construction. Design‐Builder shall provide a continuously safe and accessible path to the boarding platform for the duration of construction.

E. Provide barriers at trailer hitches to protect passengers from injury and equipment from vandalism.

F. All trailers shall be weather tight and protected from extreme cold and drifting snow.

G. All trailers shall have provisions to prevent water and sewer lines from freezing in extreme temperatures.

H. The Design‐Builder shall provide code compliant exterior lighting surrounding the station, parking areas, pedestrian paths, and platform throughout all phases of construction.

SECTION 8. TRACK AND PLATFORM REQUIREMENTS

8.1 Track Requirements

A. The Design Builder shall contact CSXT and arrange Roadway Worker Protection Training for all employees that will work within 15 feet of live tracks at any time. The Contractor shall establish requirements with the CSXT Resident Engineer in charge and follow all safety requirements of CSXT in terms of flagging, fouling, rigging and trackway access restrictions. Contractor shall prepare site‐specific work plans for review and approval by CSXT before commencing work when the work or any part of the equipment used in conducting the work is within 15 feet of live tracks.

B. The Design Builder shall survey the proposed locations of the new main and siding tracks. The Design Builder shall dig a minimum of two test pits along the alignment of each of the new tracks, a minimum of 6 feet deep, and have the soil conditions evaluated on‐site by a licensed geotechnical engineer for suitability for supporting heavy haul railroad roadbeds. Issue findings, including data, and recommendations in a letter report to NYSDOT.

C. The Design Builder shall advance order adequate materials to construct the new main and siding tracks to the limits indicated in the Contract Drawings. These materials shall include, but not be limited to, new 136RE welded rail, timber ties, Pandrol plates with clips and screw spikes, insulated joints, field weld kits, ballast, subballast and other track materials.



D. The Design Builder shall prepare the roadbed by consolidation to project specifications, followed by installation of subballast and bottom ballast layers for all tracks, including those to be built later by CSXT, within the limits shown.

E. The Design Builder shall construct tracks S1, S2 and M1 to the limits shown on the Contract Drawings, in full compliance with CSXT flagging and contractor safety requirements. All tracks shall be fully welded, with no joints except insulated joints remaining when turned over. All tracks shall be surfaced and aligned to final profile and alignment and in compliance with Amtrak MW1000 requirements for new construction. For 200 feet at each end of each track at project work limits, the track shall have ballast in place to the bottom of tie below final elevation so that CSXT forces may complete the final lift after they have installed the connecting tracks.

F. The Design Builder shall install grade crossings at the locations indicated for the purpose of construction access and permanent emergency personnel and emergency vehicular access. Permanent Emergency Crossings shall be full depth extruded rubber rail seal mounted on both sides of each running rail and must be new at the conclusion of the contract. Temporary crossings shall be made of timber and asphalt, with safety and maintenance being the responsibility of the Design‐builder for the duration of the contract.

8.2 High Level Platform Requirements

A. Platforms shall be designed and installed to an elevation 48 inches above the final top‐of‐rail plane, at a setback from track centerline that considers track curvature, superelevation, and railcar dynamic loading. Given that track will be on superelevated curves and spirals, the Design Builder shall analyze the track alignment and calculate horizontal and vertical platform edge elevations at 10‐foot intervals along both platforms. The final edge distance to center of track must be submitted to and approved by NYSDOT.

B. Platforms shall be installed in compliance with Amtrak and ADA standards.

8.3 Bridge Modification Requirements

A. The Design Builder shall be responsible for all Work necessary for the design and construction of all permanent and temporary structures, including the widened bridge at Clinton Avenue and the structural retrofitting of the floor system at St. Paul Street. The design and construction of all structural systems and components shall provide functionality, durability, safety, and aesthetics to match existing facilities.

B. The scope of work for bridge modification includes the following items:

• Widening of internal portions of the existing Clinton Avenue Bridge to the limits shown on the Indicative Plans to accommodate the proposed locations of the new main and



siding tracks. The components of the bridge widening shall be designed, at a minimum, Cooper E60 at the location of the widening.

• Retrofit of existing structural floor system at St. Paul Street Bridge to the limits shown on the Indicative Plans to strengthen the bridge. The bridge modifications shall be designed to increase the strength of the bridge to a minimum rating of Cooper E60.

C. The Indicative Bridge Plans, provided to the Design Builder, convey a conceptual solution to the Project’s needs that the Design Builder may choose to consider in developing a design. The Design Builder’s adaptation of the design concepts shown in the Indicative Plans are not mandatory, but are representative of the general project configuration. The Design Builder shall develop design solutions that achieve the Project Requirements.

D. Prior to design and construction activities, the Design Builder shall familiarize themselves with the condition of all bridges within the project area and shall perform all survey and field measurements necessary to support the design of bridge modifications and support of the high level platform across the bridges. The design for the modification to bridges at Clinton Avenue and St. Paul shall be similar to and compatible with design to the existing structures. The design of the high level platform identified in Section 8.2 above and the bridge widening at Clinton Avenue shall be designed and constructed to be compatible. The design of the widened section of the Clinton Avenue bridge and the loading of the high level platform shall be determined and used together to provide an appropriate design of the proposed high level platform across the bridge and bridge widening.

E. Bridge structure modifications shall be determined and designed by a NYS licensed Professional Engineer. Bridge structural systems shall comply with all applicable codes and regulations even if not explicitly listed in this document.

F. All loads and load combinations shall be compliant and adhere to Amtrak and CSXT

guidelines and the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association Manual for Railway Engineering (AREMA)

G. In addition to these requirements, the Design Builder must comply with all other applicable engineering codes and standards, including those of the various Federal, State, and local jurisdictions.



H. The Design builder must comply with all regulation and obtain all permits necessary from the City of Rochester to complete the required work including MPT and any work zone protection.

I. All work shall conform to current versions of the following documents. Where necessary

the State shall provide or make available to the Design Builder either the full document or guidance extracted from it. In the event of a conflict between the codes and reference documents listed below, the more stringent requirements, as determined by the Department, shall apply.

AASHTO:

• A Guide for Accommodating Utilities within Highway Right‐of‐Way

• A Policy on Design Standards ‐ Interstate System

• A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets

• Construction Handbook for Bridge Temporary Works

• Guide Design Specifications for Bridge Temporary Works

• Guide Specification for Bridge Railings (1989)

• Guide Specification for Fatigue Evaluation of Existing Steel Bridges

• Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design

• LFRD Bridge Construction Specifications

• LFRD Bridge Design Specifications

• Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH)

• Manual for Bridge Evaluation

• Manual for the Condition Evaluation of Bridges

• Manual on Subsurface Investigations

• Roadside Design Guide

• Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

• Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals

AEMA

• Recommended Performance Guidelines AMTRAK

• Engineering Practices 3014 Maintenance and Protection of Railroad Traffic During Contractor Operations

• Engineering Practices Section 01141A Safety and Protection of Railroad Traffic and Property



SECTION 9 ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS

The new Rochester Station shall be a multi‐phase intermodal facility constructed on the site of the existing Amtrak Rochester Station (ROC) temporary facility built in 1978. The overall design shall provide a landmark structure at the entry to downtown Rochester, reflective of the character of the former 1914 Claude Bragdon Union Station on this site.

The building and site design shall be fully accessible and shall present a unified setting, exhibiting cohesion between both Phases I and II of construction. The Design‐Builder shall ensure the final design reflects the existing and developing architectural standards and facility requirements of Amtrak and Trailways. The architectural design shall be efficient and avoid surplus and redundancy for a cost‐efficient end result, while also responding to input that has been received from the Rochester community.

9.1 Code Requirements and Design Standards

A code analysis report shall be prepared by the Design‐Builder indicating how each element of the project shall comply with all applicable codes and standards. This report shall be based on the most current edition of each code or standard in effect at the time of commencement of construction of the facility. Specific attention should be given to the requirement for compliance with all aspects of the IgCC. Where codes or standards may be considered to be in conflict, the more stringent requirement shall be applied.

A. Building Code of New York State, 2010 Edition

B. Electrical Code of New York State, 2010 Edition

C. Mechanical Code of New York State, 2010 Edition

D. Plumbing Code of New York State, 2010 Edition

E. Fire Code of New York State, 2010 Edition

F. Property Maintenance Code of New York State, 2010 Edition

G. Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State (ECCCNYS), 2010 Edition H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 130: Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit

and Passenger Rail Systems

I. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

J. American with Disabilities Act (ADA)

K. ADAAG 2006 Edition for Transportation Facilities

L. American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

M. Zoning Code of the City of Rochester N. City of Rochester’s Project Green plan O. State of New York Executive Order No. 4: Establishing a State Green Procurement and

Agency Sustainability Program

P. State of New York Executive Order No. 88: Directing State Agencies and Authorities to Improve the Energy Efficiency of State Buildings



Q. New York State Department of Transportation Leadership in Transportation and Environmental Sustainability “GreenLITES” Certification Program

R. Amtrak Station Program & Planning ‐ Standards and Guidelines: Station Manual, Version 2.2

S. Amtrak Engineering Stations – Standard Design Practices (SDP), issued June 14, 2012

T. Amtrak Medium Station Prototype drawings and documents

U. International Green Construction Code (IgCC), 2013 Edition (Note: IGCC requirements and their application are outlined within the Amtrak Engineering Stations – SDP.)

V. Amtrak Environmental Health and Safety Report, 2011

W. Amtrak Graphic Signage Standard Manual

X. Amtrak Police Department’s Corporate Security Design Recommendations

Y. Amtrak Premise Distribution Standards (ATT)

9.2 Description of Proposed Facility

The proposed Rochester Station concept recalls significant visual aspects of the former Union Station complex that previously occupied the site and was demolished in the mid‐1970s, with attention given to the scale and proportion of the current project program and budget relative to the scale and program of the former station. There is a strong community support for this design approach. Accordingly, the proposed design shall recreate the three major north and south facing arched windows that were a central part of Claude Bragdon’s design, inspired by the driving wheels of a locomotive.

The Design‐Builder shall allow for this endeavor to be constructed in two phases. Phase I shall address the new Amtrak station functions, generally including, but not limited to site improvements, parking, and access to a new high level center island platform. Phase II shall consist of station expansion to create the Trailways portion of the station, bus loop, and redevelopment of southern parcel of the site and additional parking where the existing Trailways facility is situated. Although construction of the Rochester Station shall consist of two distinct phases, it is imperative that the finished product be aesthetically unified and that the first phase stands on its own both functionally and aesthetically.

A preliminary design has been developed with attention to the goals of the community to foster livability, sustainability, and future development in the Station’s neighborhood. To provide a landmark structure at the end of Downtown Rochester, the station building shall be sited such that it sits within the “downtown sightline” corridor, providing unencumbered views of the station when traveling North Clinton Avenue and providing connectivity to the new RGRTA Mortimer Street Transit Center and other downtown landmarks. Additionally, to provide the shortest practical passenger and baggage travel distance possible, the station shall be sited both parallel and as close as possible to the existing tracks.

The Rochester Station building shall consist of a ground level and concourse level within an approximate 12,000 square foot building footprint accommodating the program requirements of Amtrak and Trailways operations. Shared functions such as the waiting area and public



restrooms shall occupy prominent areas of the ground floor, facing the downtown Rochester corridor. Every effort shall be made to consolidate common spaces between the two to the degree functionally desirable by the separate mode operators to achieve a cost‐effective design that is functionally responsive to the program requirements. Further, the facility shall be fully ADA compliant and shall promote easy transfer between modes of transportation.

Utilities, storage, and, most critically, clear and visually unobstructed circulation between the station building and the platform shall be housed below grade at Concourse Level. The two levels shall be connected by vertical circulation elements: stairs, escalator, and elevator at both ends of the Concourse. These circulation elements shall be easily identified and shall be nearby upon entering the station.

Improvements shall also be made to the area immediately surrounding the station building to incorporate pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular circulation, as well as storage for buses and cars. The site design shall incorporate softscape to the greatest extent possible, eliminating any unnecessary paving and providing a friendly space for pedestrians, especially within the “downtown sightline” corridor.

9.3 Façade Elements

A central element to the glazed triple arch station façade is a clock suspended in front of the center arch. The Design‐Builder shall design to accommodate, and shall coordinate and install the historic clock from the former 1914 Bragdon station, if that clock becomes available.

If this historic clock does not become available, the Design‐Builder shall provide and install a clock as depicted on the Preliminary Design documents. The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for furnishing and installing a functioning clock of the scale indicated on the Preliminary Design documents and of a quality consistent with the historic clock. Design and fabrication drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Department.

9.4 Station Ground Level

The Preliminary Design documents include a functional station building layout. The main areas to be located on the first floor of the station shall include:

A. Waiting Area B. Customer Information Kiosk C. 2 Retail Spaces D. Vending Area and an on‐site ATM E. Public Toilet Facilities, including Family Restroom and drinking fountains F. Separate Ticketing for Amtrak and Trailways G. Separate Baggage Handling for Amtrak and Trailways H. Amtrak Baggage Claim with a concealed roll‐down security shutter (closed open type

with no view inside) I. Amtrak Offices and Break Room J. Separate Employee Restrooms for Amtrak and Trailways



K. Trailways Offices and Break Room

A generous waiting area is important to the station building layout. The remaining program elements are to be placed around it for ease of circulation. At completion of Phase II, waiting shall total approximately 2,750 SF with seating for approximately minimum of 151 shared Amtrak and Trailways patrons. Several convenience and comfort amenities shall be offered to patrons, including ATM, Quik‐Trak Self‐Ticking, Vending, and Wi‐Fi connectivity. It is critical that a closely coordinated arrangement of concourse access, ticketing, and waiting be achieved to create a feeling of connectivity between these elements.

Two tenant retail spaces shall be located directly off the waiting room, with storefronts facing the main entrance of the station building. The Design‐Builder shall provide “vanilla box” construction inside the space, finishing the perimeter walls with taped and, spackled, and painted gypsum board, a concealed roll‐down security shutter (closed open type with no view inside), lighting and emergency fixtures, electrical panel, and HVAC. Each tenant space shall have a separate rear entrance to allow for deliveries and trash removal out of public view. Tenancy leasing shall be coordinated by the Amtrak Real Estate division and based on the demographics and needs of ridership. The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for ensuring that each retail tenant space and the Trailways spaces are metered separately from Amtrak space. The Design‐Builder shall provide temporary and movable taped, spackled, and painted gypsum board partitions as shown on the Preliminary Design drawings. These partitions will allow the Department to utilize the retail spaces for display for promotional, marketing, or local artwork until such time as tenant agreements have been signed.

Ticketing for Amtrak must be immediately visible and easily identified upon entering the station building. With connectivity to the waiting area and the auxiliary comfort facilities, the ticketing area is the transition point between the public and private programs ‐ The ticketing area must service the public while supporting the back of house functions behind the scenes. The ticketing office shall provide:

A. ADA‐compliant ticketing area for two staff positions, with one baggage check‐in workstation. Stations shall be 6 linear feet long each.

B. Low counter for baggage transfer scale

C. Cash drawers in built‐in casework and desktops with operable glass cover for schedules

D. Baggage scale E. Rear countertop with cabinetry for storage of supplies

F. Provide and install clear and frosted glass transaction windows per Amtrak Standards

G. CCTV monitors shall be visible from all ticketing workstations

H. Telephone and data connections for computers, phones, printers

I. Power for CPU’s, ticketing terminals, and ticket printers

J. Direct access to the Baggage Work Room and Baggage Claim. Note: Baggage Claim must receive finished gypsum board ceiling (no suspended acoustic panel system) to ensure the security of items stored in this room.

K. Access to Waiting Room



Other Amtrak back‐of‐house spaces include:

A. Lead Clerk’s office, near Ticketing, with closet to house safe

B. Records Storage

C. Employee Break Room sized to fit 5 people at one time, including a kitchenette with full‐size refrigerator, (8) 18” D x 12” W full‐height lockers with ventilated doors. Room to include PA system interface.

Public restrooms shall be sized to exceed code requirements for minimum number of plumbing fixtures, accommodating the increase in demand when a train and/or bus arrive at the station. The Design‐Builder shall include at least 2 additional water closets and 1 additional lavatory for each sex beyond code minimum. Additionally, a family restroom shall be provided whether or not it is required by code. All restrooms (Men’s, Women’s, Family, and Employee) shall include:

A. Electric hand driers, B. Soap dispensers,

C. Toilet paper dispensers,

D. Waste receptacles,

E. Tilt mirrors,

F. Sanitary disposal,

G. Coat hooks. Public restrooms (Men’s, Women’s, and Family) shall also include:

A. Fold down changing tables, B. Stainless steel toilet and urinal partitions

C. Stainless steel toilet room accessories.

A dual level ADA compliant cooled drinking fountain shall be located outside the public restrooms, along with a TTY phone. All lavatories shall be ADA accessible.

Programmed baggage work and equipment areas shall be confined to the back‐of‐house, with public access to the baggage claim space off the waiting area via a concealed roll‐down security grille. The baggage work areas must be sized appropriately to accommodate floats, carts, and other equipment used to transport baggage from the station to the platform. A minimum turning radius of twelve feet for baggage floats shall be accommodated in this space.

A. Provide adjacency to Ticketing

B. Include baggage scale in Baggage Claim

C. Baggage Equipment and Work Area must have access to the exterior.

D. Accommodate the existing Rochester Station equipment:

1. Firearms Float: (1) 84” L x 44” W x 72” H

2. Standard Float: (1) 120” L [171” overall with tow bar down] x 44” W x 64 ½” H;

3. Standard Float: (1) 84” L [129” overall with tow bar down] x 44” W x 64 ½” H



4. Electric Truck: (1) CarryAll 6 at 132” L x 48” W x 70” H

E. Accommodate new Amtrak equipment:

1. Low‐Boy Float: (2) 97”L [123” overall with tow bar down] x 46” W x 50 ½” H

2. Electric Truck with wheel base and undercarriage clearance to clear the proposed ADA accessible ramp slope.

3. Design‐Builder shall investigate and document the existing Electric Truck on site. If existing Electric Truck does not have adequate clearance, the Design‐Builder shall provide (2) new Electric Trucks with wheel base and undercarriage clearance to clear the proposed ADA accessible ramp slope.

Phase II of the station building shall include Trailways operations. The layout of this space shall facilitate easy transfer between Trailways inter‐city buses and the Amtrak trains. The Design‐Builder shall ensure that the Phase II expansion reads as a continuation of Phase I station building rather than a later addition to the exterior, as well as providing continuity of finishes, furniture, color, texture, and equipment on the interior. The expansion shall be seamless. Trailways ticketing to include:

A. ADA‐compliant ticketing area with two staff positions with baggage express managed by one agent.

B. Provide storage for packages waiting to load onto buses in a secure space with access to both the exterior and the ticketing space.

C. Cash drawers in built‐in casework and desktops with operable glass cover for schedules D. Baggage scale E. Rear countertop with cabinetry for storage of supplies F. Provide and install acrylic transaction windows G. CCTV monitors shall be visible from all ticketing workstations H. Telephone and data connections for computers, phones, printers

I. Power for CPU’s, ticketing terminals, and ticket printers

J. Access to Waiting Room

Other Trailways back‐of‐house spaces include:

A. Dispatch office, near Ticketing and with views of the Waiting Area

B. Four private offices

C. Employee Break Room sized to fit 10 people at one time, including a kitchenette with full‐size refrigerator, (8) 18” D x 12” W full‐height lockers with ventilated doors. Room to include PA system interface.

9.5 Station Concourse Level

The infrastructure of the station building shall be furnished in Phase I. These spaces shall be designed and sized to meet the future needs of Phase II when construction is complete. The Concourse Level spaces shall be fully waterproofed. Spaces shall include:



A. Passenger Concourse to Platform B. Mechanical Room C. Electrical Room D. Secure Communications Room E. Secure Amtrak PIDS Server Room F. Secure Amtrak Revenue Server Room G. MRL Control Closet H. Water Service Space, if needed I. Fire Pump Space, if needed J. Separate Secure Storage for Amtrak and Trailways K. Fire Extinguishing provisions, per NFPA 10 L. Crawlspace area for systems runs to the Ground Level above

The concourse level utility spaces shall be completely secured from the public with locking access‐controlled doors and a small corridor. The Baggage Ramp shall be separated from the Concourse with double doors that shall open automatically for approaching baggage carts during the hours of normal station operation.

9.6 Space Allocation

Space allocation has been developed through direct observation of the existing facilities and discussions between NYSDOT, Amtrak, and Trailways. The spatial allocations have also being developed considering the projected ridership growth at the Station.

The following programming information was gathered by NYSDOT. This includes:

A. Amtrak Rochester Station Functional and Space Requirements, Issued November 30, 2012 – 3 pages

B. Trailways Rochester Station Functional and Space Requirements, Received January 28, 2013 – 1 page

C. Preliminary Design Program Comparison – This table compares requested Amtrak and Trailways program elements with the areas provided in the Preliminary Design documents.

The Design‐Builder shall provide a final design that reconciles the functional, spatial, and aesthetic requirements of all parties, including Amtrak, Trailways, and the Department with all final decisions made by the Department.



AMTRAK ROCHESTER STATION FUNCTIONAL AND SPACE REQUIREMENTS, ISSUED 12/30/2012



TRAILWAYS ROCHESTER STATION FUNCTIONAL AND SPACE REQUIREMENTS, RECEIVED 12/28/2012

Note: The consolidated design presented in the Preliminary Design documents

does not include overall square footage of this size due to the inclusion of shared Trailways and Amtrak spaces, such as Waiting Area, Restrooms, Circulation,

and Utility Spaces.



PRELIMINARY DESIGN PROGRAM COMPARISON



9.7‐ I Innformation Systems

A full signage package shall be prepared by the Design‐Builder for approval by The Department. The Design‐Builder shall be responsible for signage plans, details, and complete installation throughout the facility. All signage shall comply with ADA and ADAAG guidelines. Design‐Builder shall refer to Amtrak Graphic Signage Manual and shall provide a full package of compliant signage for The Department’s review and approval. The package shall include:

A. Parking lot circulation, rules, and parking space directive and informational signage B. ADA Parking Signage C. Parking Pay Station Signage D. Room Identification signs adjacent to or on each Interior and Exterior doors to be six inches

with room name and number. Name to be removable on office signage. E. Building Sign and number to be wall mounted above the new main entrance as indicated on

the drawings and as per Amtrak and Trailways Standards. F. All code compliant and OSHA required signage shall be installed on all equipment, walls,

and doors throughout the Utility spaces, Electrical Room, Communication and Server Rooms, and MRL Control Room

G. Interior Wayfinding Signage / Directional Information H. Restriction Signage at all Electrical Room, Security Room, Communication and Server

Rooms, and any other Utility Room door I. Employee Only signage where appropriate J. Information about connection services and tourist information and pamphlets to be

provided at the Customer Information Kiosk K. Area shall be clearly defined where retail tenants may install a storefront sign L. Passenger Information Display Systems (PIDS) per Amtrak standards

1. LED Variable Message Signs located on the platform and at each bus berth

2. 40” Minimum LED Television monitors displaying departure information within Waiting Area, Concourse, and at train and bus boarding Platforms.

M. Public Announcement System per Amtrak standards

1. Delayed announcement playback

2. Unidirectional microphone to eliminate squeal

3. Signal to noise ratio of 10 dB

4. Master paging locations:

Lead Clerk’s Office Amtrak Ticketing

Amtrak Train Information Operator Console

Trailways Ticketing Trailways Dispatch Office



N. Where a public address system is installed, an ADA compliant method of transmitting the same information visually shall also be provided. Where a public information display system is installed, an ADA compliant method of transmitting the same information audibly shall also be provided.

O. Entertainment

o 40” Minimum LED Television monitors to display cable television

o Ceiling mounted music speaker system to broadcast music

P. The Design‐Builder shall protect, preserve, and reinstall the original historic plaque from the former 1914 Bragdon Station that currently hangs on the north wall of existing facility on this site. This plaque shall be carefully removed, cleaned, and installed in a prominent location within the new Station facility. In addition to reinstallation of the historic plaque, the Design‐Builder shall provide an two (2) interpretive wall‐mounted plaque within the Station Building describing the historic significance of the station site and the former 1914 Bragdon Station that was demolished in the 1970s. The plaque shall be approximately 24 inches by 36 inches.

9.8 Finishes and Materials

A. Materials shall be durable, heavy duty, easily cleanable and maintainable to ensure a high standard of appearance and function for the life of the facilities, and shall be suitable for the environment.

B. All utilities, conduits, ductwork, and other systems provisions shall be concealed and not exposed to view in any space that is accessible to the public.

C. All drywall from finished floor to eight feet to be high impact abuse resistant type 5/8” thick.

D. Accents added to reflect the past design strategies of the original building E. Interior finishes to be provided as indicated on the drawings, specifications, and as directed

by Amtrak Engineering Stations – Standard Design Practices (SDP). F. Exterior walls shall be finished with 4” brick veneer and cast stone veneer and trim. On the

interior face, walls shall be finished with high‐abuse gypsum board with a decorative ceramic tile treatment up to approximately ten feet (10’‐0”) above the finished floor level at all areas exposed to the public. The Design‐Builder shall provide continuous insulation; insulation shall be mounted within the wall cavity outside sheathing board.

G. All fully interior walls exposed to the public shall also be finished with a decorative ceramic tile treatment up to approximately ten feet (10’‐0”) above the finished floor level.

H. All stainless steel throughout the full scope of work shall be Type 316 per Amtrak standards. G.I. R‐values of Walls and Roof to be constructed to meet R‐26 & R‐30 values respectively to

provide a thermally efficient building envelope. H.J. Materials used for waterproofing shall be resistant to deterioration from contaminated

groundwater. Vapor barriers shall be provided for all slabs in contact with the ground.



I.K. Sound‐deadening material shall be used on horizontal and vertical surfaces wherever possible.

J.L. Flooring: Office spaces to be industrial commercial grade carpet tile, Break Rooms to be bio‐based vinyl composition tile, Public and Private Toilet rooms to be ceramic tile. The Design‐Builder shall ensure that the concrete slab has properly cured at all public areas scheduled to receive terrazzo flooring, including but not limited to Waiting Areas, Baggage Claim, and that the manufacturer’s recommended vapor barrier has been installed per all applicable instructions and all install conditions have been met.

K.M. Window blinds to be installed in all windows, at both exterior and interior wall locations within the private Amtrak and Trailways portions of the building.

N. All products to be ENERGY STAR to the maximum extent possible in accordance with the IGCC, New York State Executive Orders No. 4 and 88, and Amtrak’s SDP.

O. Soffit panels and linear metal ceiling system shall be provided at the underside of all exterior roof and canopy surfaces to ensure a finished look and to provide pest control. At any horizontal surface where it is not possible to install soffit panels or the linear metal ceiling system, the Design‐Builder must provide pest control measures as specified within Part 8 to prevent bird roosting and other pest problems.

L.P. Special attention shall be paid to the wall and ceiling finishes and treatments within the Waiting Areas. The Design‐Builder shall provide acoustically absorptive materials where possible, along with decorative trim, concealed lighting coves, and the like, commensurate with the look of the interior renderings that were prepared for Preliminary Design and presented to the Executive Steering Committee and other interested parties.

9.9 Public Art Installations

A major goal of the project is to establish points of interest along North Clinton Avenue within the “downtown sightline” corridor. As part of the Design‐Builder’s contract, the installation of two monumental public art pieces shall be included in the scope of work for the project. The artwork shall not be finalized before the Design‐Build contract is awarded. It is anticipated the artwork will be incorporated into the project as shown on the Phase II site plan along what is called the “Downtown Sightline” Axis. These locations are the center island within the drop‐off / pick‐up loop and the corner of North Clinton and Cumberland Streets. Per the Community Outreach section of this document, the Design‐Builder shall be available and shall allow for meetings with the City of Rochester’s Public Art Committee and the Rochester Arts and Cultural Commission to assist NYSDOT in defining, judging, soliciting Artists, and commissioning these pieces of Art.

9.10 Historic Canopy and SHPO Coordination

At the existing low level boarding platform, the steel frame of the platform canopy from the 1914 Bragdon station still stands in its original location. Amtrak has recently installed a roof surface on a portion of this frame and has completed lead paint abatement on the portion of



the canopy where the roofing was installed. The Design‐Builder shall leave in place the unabated portion of the canopy from a point a minimum of twenty feet west of the proposed loading dock at the new Station Building. The Design‐Builder shall carefully remove, preserve and protect, and deliver the balance of the existing canopy to an offsite storage location to be determined by NYSDOT in coordination with the City of Rochester. Once removed from the site, the abated portion of the canopy shall become property of the City of Rochester.

The Design‐Builder shall provide two interpretive panels discussing historic importance of the site, station and the existing portion of canopy to remain. The art work for the panels will be provided by NYSDOT and shall comply with New York State Historic Preservation Office guidelines.

SECTION 10. VERTICAL CIRCULATION REQUIREMENTS

To provide a safe and accessible path of travel between the site, station, and platform, vertical circulation is a vital component of the program. This shall take the form of ramps, stairs, escalators, and elevators. The station‐side vertical circulation elements shall share the axis of the main corridor and the concourse for clarity of circulation and cost control, relating horizontal and vertical circulation elements to each other. For passengers at the station building, the Design‐Builder shall provide stairs, an escalator, and an elevator down to the Concourse Level. From the Concourse, the Design‐Builder shall an additional set of stairs, an escalator, and an elevator to take patrons to the platform level. All circulation shall be designed to comply with the Building Code of New York State, Amtrak Station Standards, and ADAAG regulations.

Additionally, at both the Station and Platform ends of the Concourse, the Design‐Builder shall provide ADA compliant concrete ramps to be used for baggage transport to and from Amtrak trains. The ramps shall have a non‐slip surface, stainless steel handrails, and sufficient clearance to permit a baggage cart with floats to pass a person on foot. By restricting these ramps to ADA compliant slope, they shall provide redundancy for both accessible travel and egress. The Design‐Builder shall be required to verify the final design complies with all applicable Building Code of New York State and NFPA 130 standards for egress between stairways, ramps, and areas of refuge at each end of the proposed platform.

Elevators shall be APTA‐Grade, 4,000‐lb capacity, machine room‐less models. The elevators must permit the use of a standard 30”x72” Hospital Rolling Stretcher. Elevators shall be front and reverse opening where necessary. All elevator passenger cabs and doors shall be a minimum of 75% clear glass for security purposes and finished as described within Amtrak’s SDP.

Amtrak standards mandate a minimum six foot width at stairs and ramps between sets of hand and guardrails for the convenience of a passenger with baggage. The rise of a typical step shall be six inches, while the tread shall be twelve inches. Twelve inch rounded returns shall be used on the ends of handrails, and intermediate landings shall be provided.

Escalators shall be provided at both the station and platform ends of the concourse. With a 30° incline and speed of 100fpm, APTA grade reversible escalators must be at least forty inches in



width to allow for baggage with six foot clear landings at either end. All escalators must be rated for heavy use in a fully outdoor environment, even though enclosure shall be provided, to provide resistance to harsh weather conditions at the project location.

10.1 Pedestrian Concourse

Amtrak service shall operate on a new high level center island platform for ADA‐compliant passenger boarding, accessible via concourse. The proposed concourse is an underground connection between the main components of the station program; it must be treated as a well‐lit, spacious corridor that is visually connected to the station house and waiting areas. It shall be an integral part of the visual connection between station and platforms, acting as the main corridor for the entire station building. The Design‐Builder shall maintain a twenty foot minimum width and ten foot minimum height within the Concourse. Baggage and pedestrian movements shall be segregated with a stainless steel handrail within the concourse. The Design‐Builder shall install panelized glass paver sidewalk vaults above the entry to the Concourse to permit natural light below grade.

The Concourse shall be finished with highly durable surfaces, including linear metal ceilings, anti‐slip terrazzo flooring, and ceramic wall tile. Supplemental artificial lighting shall be incorporated to provide a bright circulation space at all times of day.

10.2 Baggage Ramps

The concourse shall also provide immediate access to exterior baggage ramps. Baggage movements must be segregated from passenger movements, requiring separate corridors and access. The design shall include a ramp on the station side, where there is sufficient area to permit a switch back layout and at the platform where a straight run ramp shall be implemented. The baggage ramp shall be used solely for the transport of baggage, with a minimum width of eight feet, turning radius of twelve feet, and an ADA compliant slope to accommodate the maneuvering of baggage floats. Building baggage ramps to ADA standards for slope (adhering to a maximum allowable finished slope of 1:12), runs, landings, slip resistance, and handrails shall provide redundancy for accessible travel in the event of an elevator or escalator outage and shall provide additional egress capacity in emergency situations.

SECTION 11. SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS

Sustainable design has been and shall remain a project philosophy across all disciplines through Final Design and Construction. The Design‐Builder’s documentation for Rochester Station shall fully comply with the International Green Construction Code (IgCC) and shall follow the sustainable building practices outlined by Amtrak Engineering Stations – Standard Design Practices (SDP), NYSDOT’s GreenLITES program and New York State Executive Orders 4 and 88 (E04, EO88). Additionally, Amtrak Station Standards utilize major elements of the IgCC to ensure that the cost of ownership and maintenance of new stations is considered in the design.

The Preliminary Design documents include a spreadsheet titled, Sustainable Strategy Analysis, dated April 24, 2013. Compliance strategies shall include, but not be limited to, the items



included in that document. The Design‐Builder shall provide proof of compliant strategies for meeting IgCC, Executive Order, NYSDOT, and NYSERDA worksheet requirements during the design process and shall be required to implement a transparent program to communicate on a monthly basis proof of compliance with the agreed upon strategies throughout the Construction and Commissioning process.

If the Design‐Builder determines that any specified strategy will not be feasible or achievable for this project, the Design‐Builder shall be responsible for fully documenting this determination in a manner acceptable to NYSDOT. NYSDOT shall be notified in writing of any proposed changes, and no change shall be permitted without their permission. If both NYSDOT and the Design‐Builder determine a strategy will not be pursued, the Design‐Builder shall be responsible for confirming that the project will still meet the requirements of the Executive Orders without that strategy. This may require the incorporation of additional strategies and shall be the responsibility of the Design‐Builder.

11.1 Sustainable Strategies

Strategies that shall be included in this project, among others, shall be:

A. Perform a Pre‐design Site Inventory to determine which trees and shrubs shall remain or be relocated on site.

B. Incorporate porous paving to the greatest extent possible. Water drainage shall be funneled to the greatest extent possible into landscaped areas, planting beds, and bioswales throughout the site.

C. Install an energy display in the public Waiting Area of the station.

D. Provide Energy Star equipment throughout the project, wherever an Energy Star product is available.

E. Provide Full Commissioning of all energy consuming systems to achieve the optimal energy performance and indoor air quality for this building type.

F. Provide for the storage and collection of recyclables.

G. Install real‐time Building Monitoring System equipment to allow operators to maintain targets set during the Commissioning process and to help sustain occupant comfort and well‐being.

H. Establish minimum indoor air quality (IAQ) performance to enhance indoor air quality in buildings, thus contributing to the comfort and well‐being of the occupants.

I. Provide additional outdoor air ventilation to improve indoor air quality for improved occupant comfort, well‐being and productivity.

J. Reduce indoor air quality problems resulting from the construction process.

K. Utilize computer modeling to “right size” mechanical systems.

L. Install machine‐room less elevators for greater energy efficiency.

M. The Design‐Builder shall investigate and prepare a study of potential on‐site renewable energy systems to reduce the environmental impact associated with energy



consumption and evaluate their cost‐effectiveness. If a reasonable payback period can be proven for a particular renewable system, the Design‐Builder shall implement.

N. Minimize light trespass from the building and site, reduce sky‐glow to increase night sky access, improve nighttime visibility through glare reduction, and reduce development impact on nocturnal environments.

O. Eliminate the use of potable water, or other natural surface or subsurface water resources available on or near the project site, for landscape irrigation. Provide means to capture rainwater for reuse for irrigation purposes.

P. At a minimum, 75% of plantings used must be native, low maintenance, and resistant to drought, pests, and disease.

Q. Do not provide any landscape irrigation system that uses potable water.

R. Utilize high‐efficiency plumbing fixtures to reduce potable water use for building sewage conveyance. Fixtures should use, at minimum, 10% less water than the requirements of the Energy Policy Act of 1992.

S. Verify that the building’s energy related systems are installed, calibrated and perform according to the owner’s project requirements, basis of design, and construction documents.

T. All HVAC&R and fire suppression systems shall be designed without using Hydrofluorocarbons and Halon.

U. Implement a Construction Waste Management Plan for the recycling and/or salvage of at least 75% of non–hazardous construction material.

V. Specify building products that incorporate recycled content materials to the greatest extent feasible, thereby reducing impacts resulting from extraction and processing of virgin materials.

W. To the greatest extent feasible, specify materials that have been extracted, harvested, recovered as well as manufactured within 500 miles of the project site for a minimum value contained within IgCC.

X. Select materials with low volatile organic compounds (VOCs) content, including architectural coatings, sealants, and adhesives.

Y. Permanent entryway systems shall be installed in the primary direction of travel to capture dirt, dust and particulates from entering the enclosed portions of the building.

Z. Provide a high level of lighting and thermal system control by individual occupants or by specific groups in enclosed multi‐occupant spaces to promote the productivity, comfort and well‐being of building occupants.

AA. Utilize daylight dimming devices and occupancy sensors to reduce lighting and HVAC demand where practical and appropriate.

BB. Provide for the building occupants a connection between indoor spaces and the outdoor through the introduction of daylight and views into the regularly occupied enclosed areas of the building



CC. Install thermally broken window systems with insulated, low‐E double glazing units and a high R‐Value.

DD. Shade fenestration to the greatest extent possible to limit heat gain and glare and to maximize indirect lighting.

EE. Insulate all wall and ceiling assemblies to guard against thermal loss and gain.

11.2 Energy Consumption

The Design‐Builder shall comply with the mandate contained in New York State Executive Order 88 to reduce the average Energy Use Intensity of the new Rochester Station Project by at least 20% from a baseline defined within the Order’s text. Additionally, the facility shall comply with the requirement for submetering of all energy using systems.

The Design‐Builder shall utilize the NYSDOT Draft Energy Analysis Guidelines for Project‐Level Analysis, dated November 25, 2003, as a guideline for quantitative energy analysis.

11.3 Life Cycle Analysis

Per IgCC, the new facility and equipment shall include state‐of‐the‐art energy conserving design features that are shown to be cost‐effective. These features shall be incorporated and discussed during design meetings and verified as the design progresses. Feasibility shall be established based on a defined payback period. In accomplishing life cycle cost analysis, the Design‐Builder shall be required to use established principles and procedures as well as realistic maintenance and repair costs from established sources. Conventional sustainable design systems such as passive solar and day lighting do not require a life cycle cost analysis.

11.4 Material Selection

The Design‐Builder shall comply with the mandate for green procurement contained in New York State Executive Order 4 to utilize products that reduce energy and resource consumption, reduce or eliminate the use of hazardous substances and the generation of hazardous substances, and reduce pollution and waste. The Design‐Builder shall reference and comply with the IgCC, as well as the approved specifications available on the New York State Office of General Services website for the implementation of Executive Order 4.

11.5 Commissioning

In order to verify and ensure that fundamental building elements and systems are designed, installed, and calibrated to operate both as intended and as efficiently as possible, the Design‐Builder shall retain the services of an independent Commissioning Agent. The scope of work required for Commissioning shall include the following:

A. Review the design intent and the basis of the design documentation

B. Incorporate commissioning requirements into the Final Design documents

C. Create and implement the Commissioning Plan

D. All required documentation shall be coordinated with The Department, the Commissioning Agent and the Preliminary Design Engineer



E. Verify the installation, functional performance, training, and operation, and maintenance documentation

F. Complete a Commissioning Report

G. Complete an Operations and Maintenance Manual

H. Provide training to the facility staff.

11.6 Documentation

Compliance with the IgCC and New York State Executive Orders No. 4 and 88 are mandatory. The Design‐Builder shall provide complete documentation sufficient to demonstrate compliance with both Executive Orders upon request by the State, as well as the NYSDOT GreenLITES Project Environmental Sustainability Rating System Scorecard and NYSERDA New Construction Program Pre‐Qualified HVAC and Lighting Worksheets. No formal submission of documentation to USGBC/LEED or the State’s Green Building Working Group is required at any phase of the construction process. Documentation of compliance shall include, though not be limited to, the following items:

A. The Design‐Builder shall provide a Commissioning Agent and Commissioning Plan.

B. The Design‐Builder shall create a Sustainability Compliance Plan to ensure both the completion and compliance of all of the following documents listed in this document.

1. Include all of the sustainable building goals established by the Design Team.

2. List all implementation strategies.

3. Document equivalence with IgCC, as well as with Amtrak Sustainability Guidelines.

4. Document compliance with NYSDOT GreenLITES.

5. Document compliance with New York State Executive Orders No. 4 and 88.

6. Document compliance with NYSERDA’s New Construction Program utilizing Pre‐Qualified HVAC and Lighting Worksheets.

7. If a required strategy is deemed infeasible or unachievable by both the The Department and the Design‐Builder, the Design‐Builder shall demonstrate and fully document and justify this hardship in a manner that shall demonstrate that compliance with the Executive Orders and the IgCC is still achieved.

8. Describe how the plan shall be executed.

9. Lay out a construction schedule.

10. List all systems and components that shall be included and documentation required for each.

11. Detail all of the participants in the process, along with their specific roles and responsibilities.

12. Update this plan and providing progress reports to the Department as the design and construction progresses to reflect all approved revisions.



C. Commissioning Specifications for incorporation into the Construction Documents, including but not limited to:

1. Incorporate Design Intent and Basis of Design from the Design Team members, including all energy consuming equipment

2. Indoor Air Quality Protocol

3. Indoor Air Quality Testing Procedures

4. Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan

5. Start‐up and Check‐out Checklists and Procedures for Building Systems

6. Functional Performance Testing Procedures for Building Systems

7. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Plan

D. Operations and Maintenance Management Plan, including but not limited to:

1. Systems and Energy Management Manual

2. IAQ Management Plan for O&M

3. Facility Maintenance Manual, including preventative and unscheduled maintenance and green housekeeping procedures

4. Environmental Tobacco Smoke policy

5. Integrated Pest Control Plan

E. Commissioning Report must be prepared, documenting effective implementation of the Commissioning Plan and Specifications, including but not limited to:

1. Documentation of all IAQ Testing

2. Construction Indoor Air Quality Report

3. Operations and Maintenance Plans, Manuals, and Policies

F. The Design‐Builder shall prepare a Final Sustainability Compliance Report documenting the implementation of the Sustainability Compliance Plan and completion of all Testing, Reports, Manuals, and Policies, as well as any future requirements for ongoing compliance.

SECTION 12. MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

12.1 General

These criteria shall encompass the work required to design, furnish, install and test the mechanical systems for Rochester Station.

Utilize plumbing, fire suppression, cooling, heating and ventilation equipment and processes that are sustainable and aid in satisfying sustainability requirements for compliance with the IGCC, NYSERDA incentives, New York State Executive Order and NYSDOT requirements, and Amtrak Standards.




The following codes and standards shall apply to design and construction of this project. Use most recent issue unless otherwise noted:

A. Amtrak Engineering Stations Standard Design Practices (SDP) – 6/20/12Station Program and Planning – Standards and Guidelines Appendix G Mechanical Systems v 2.2 March 2008

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 62.1‐2010, Ventilation for Acceptable Air Quality

C. ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low‐Rise Residential Buildings

D. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook

E. ASTM A 653/A 653M, Galvanized Sheet Steel

F. International Green Construction Code (IgCC), 2013 Edition (Note: IGCC requirements and their application are outlined within the Amtrak Engineering Stations – SDP.)

G. State of New York Executive Order No. 4: Establishing a State Green Procurement and Agency Sustainability Program

H. State of New York Executive Order No. 88: Directing State Agencies and Authorities to Improve the Energy Efficiency of State Buildings

I. New York State Department of Transportation Leadership in Transportation and Environmental Sustainability “GreenLITES” Certification Program

J. New York State Building Code, Mechanical Code, Plumbing Code, Fuel Gas Code, Fire Code, Energy Conservation Code

K. NYSDOT Design Guidelines

L. NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems

M. NFPA 31 Installation of Oil Burning Equipment

N. NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code O. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code P. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code

Q. NFPA 85 Boiler and Combustion System Hazards

R. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

S. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

T. NFPA 130 Transit and Passenger Rail Systems

U. NFPA 900 Building Energy Code V. Rochester Gas & Electric Co. Standards, Rules & Regulations

W. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards‐‐Metal and Flexible, latest edition.

12.3 Vibration Isolation / Seismic Design

Provide seismic, vibration and wind restraints for HVAC components as required by code.

Equipment producing vibrations shall be isolated from the structure by spring or rubber‐in‐shear vibration isolators. All pipe and ducts connected to equipment mounted on vibration



isolators shall contain flexible connections or provisions made for vibration isolating type supports. Identify on drawings where vibration isolators are to be provided.

Equipment to be mounted on the floor shall be placed on reinforced concrete housekeeping pads. Minimum pad height shall be six inches; all equipment to be suspended from ceiling shall be provided with suspension type hangers consisting of combination of spring and neoprene in series.

12.4 Mechanical Identification

HVAC and plumbing equipment, ductwork and piping shall be labeled using plastic or aluminum labels with ¼ inch letter size if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

Each equipment item that is scheduled on the design documents shall be identified by its scheduled designation. Labels shall have a background color that contrasts with the lettering color. Lettering shall be sized as noted above.

Pipes shall be labeled with pre‐coiled pipe labels to partially or fully cover the pipe circumference and attached without fasteners or adhesive. Pipe labels shall show the identification of piping service using the same designations or abbreviations used on the construction documents, pipe size, and flow direction. Labels shall be located adjacent to each valve, control device, branch connection (excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units), near penetrations through partitions, and near equipment connections and terminations. Spacing shall be at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run.

Ductwork labels shall be attached by fasteners, and shall show flow direction and duct content designation or abbreviations used on construction documents. Labels shall be attached near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and attach to equipment, and at maximum intervals of 25 feet where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

12.5 HVAC SYSTEMS

12.5.1 Hot Water Heating System

A. The primary heating system shall be by hot water. Air handling units, wall heaters, unit heaters, duct heaters or combination heating/cooling units may be employed as required by the application. Convective type wall heaters are preferred to force‐flow types provided units are available in the required capacity.

B. Heating indoor design dry‐bulb temperatures for all indoor spaces shall be maintained at 68°F. Design heating load will be based on ASHRAE Winter Outdoor Design Dry Bulb 95% and 80% of maximum building ventilation load.

C. Two fire tube type boilers shall be provided. Each shall be sized to meet 80% of the design day heating load as a minimum. The boilers shall be equipped with duel fuel, modulating type power assisted burners that shall be capable of operation on natural gas and No. 2 fuel oil. The burners shall be designed to swing out allowing full burner face access without having to disconnect fuel piping or wiring. The burners shall have full IRI gas and oil trains



and a combined burner management and flame safeguard system. The burner management system shall be capable of providing lead/lag changeover and fuel selection functions.

D. The boiler flue venting shall be accomplished through a pre‐manufactured stainless steel flue system. The flue system shall be designed in accordance with NFPA requirements. Design shall include make‐up air to the boiler room to provide for boiler combustion and ventilation requirements.

E. As an alternate to boilers closed loop ground source heat pumps may be utilized if they are cost effective and contribute to achieving IGgCC Compliance and project sustainability goals.

F. Provide water treatment for the hot water heating system to prevent scale, corrosion, fouling and microbiological growth.

G. Provide a primary‐secondary pumping system. Distribution pumps shall have a standby pump sized equal. Provide variable speed base‐mounted centrifugal distribution pumps to serve the hot water heating system(s).

H. All hot water heating equipment shall be thermostatically controlled. Control transformers shall be provided where required.

12.5.2 HVAC Systems

A. Air conditioning equipment shall be variable‐air‐volume (VAV) self‐ contained air handling units or split system type. Provide cooling with DXchilled water coils and heating primarily with hot‐water coils. Energy recovery unit(s) shall be shall be provided for both sensible and latent energy transfer where required by ASHRAE 90.1 and where justified for energy savings in compliance with the IGgCC, NYSERDA incentives, New York State Executive Order and NYSDOT requirements, and Amtrak Standards. The energy recovery unit(s) shall include but not be limited to the following functions: mechanical cooling, heating, active dehumidification, and total energy recovery. Closed loop ground source heat pumps may be utilized if they are cost effective and contribute to IGgCC compliance and meeting sustainable strategy goals.

B. All enclosed occupied building areas shall be provided with heating, ventilating and air conditioning in accordance with code requirements and applicable standards and design criteria listed. HVAC controls shall provide for occupant comfort control. Mechanical systems shall have control settings for occupied, unoccupied, and temporary override. Interior spaces shall be zoned together and separately from exterior spaces. Each conference room, break room/lunchroom, and training room shall be separately zoned. The spaces shall be zoned such that spaces with dissimilar use and occupancy are not on the same terminalair‐handling unit.

C. Hot water, chilled water, refrigerant and condensate piping shall be selected, installed, sized and insulated per NFPA and ASHRAE standards.

D. Building pressurization shall be maintained positive relative to outdoors at all times. Pressurization shall be highest in the ticketing area and lower in the public waiting areas.



The office areas shall be designed to provide a positive pressure relative to waiting areas. Restrooms, Janitor Closets and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be maintained at negative pressure relative to adjacent areas, from which they shall draw air for ventilation. Restroom shall be exhausted at a rate of 750 cfm min. per urinal and 150 cfm min. per water closet. Janitor closets shall be exhausted at a rate of 150 cfm minimum. Maximum flow rate through an undercut door shall be 150 cfm.

E. Exhaust and makeup air ventilation shall be provided in accordance with all applicable codes and NFPA and ASHRAE standards. Exhaust air shall discharge outdoors.

F. Mechanical systems designs shall insure that airborne and waterborne contaminant emissions will meet all applicable codes and regulations. The percentage of air reciralculated into the occupied spaces of the facility shall take ASHRAE recommendations into account to avoid sick building syndrome and other undesirable effects associated with stagnant air.

G. Air shall be supplied and returned to fans and air handling units by galvanized sheet steel ducts. Exposed ductwork shall be painted spiral duct. Provide elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction fabricated of galvanized, sheet steel. Ducts that serve ceiling air outlets in air conditioned spaces shall be externally insulated galvanized steel with short runs of insulated flexible ducts. Flexible duct runs shall not exceed 5 ft in length and shall only be used in concealed locations. Ductwork shall be fitted with volume control dampers at supply and return branches to provide for accurate air balancing. Fire and smoke dampers shall be provided in fire partitions. Duct access panels shall be provided for duct mounted equipment. Air devices shall be factory‐fabricated of corrosion‐resistant steel or aluminum to distribute the specified amount of air uniformly over the conditioned space. All air intake louvers shall be fitted with thermostatically controlled motorized dampers.

H. Static pressure classifications shall conform to the following:

1. Supply Ducts: 3‐inch wg .

2. Return Ducts: 2‐inch wg , negative pressure.

3. Exhaust Ducts: 2‐inch wg , negative pressure.

I. Provide duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards‐‐Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. Provide duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Provide duct access panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment unless noted otherwise.

J. Externally insulate concealed supply ductwork. Externally insulate concealed return ductwork as required by code and ASHRAE. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be blanket fiberglass. Insulation for exposed ductwork in mechanical rooms shall be rigid board insulation. Insulate exposed ductwork outside of mechanical rooms with liner. Outside air ductwork shall be insulated externally with mineral‐fiber blanket for concealed and mineral‐fiber board for exposed ductwork. Provide field applied glass cloth jacket on all insulation and a vapor barrier on ducts subject to cold temperatures. Provide insulation thickness as



required to meet the minimum R‐value per code but supply and outside air ductwork shall have R‐4.2 min.Supply and outside air ductwork shall be insulated externally with mineral‐fiber blanket for concealed and mineral‐fiber board for exposed ductwork. Provide field applied glass cloth jacket on all insulation and a vapor barrier on ducts subject to cold temperatures. Provide thickness as required to meet the minimum R‐value per code.

K. In acoustical tile ceilings provide square, fully adjustable air pattern supply diffusers. At perimeters provide linear slot diffusers. Where air is to be distributed in high bay areas (20'+) provide high velocity drum type diffusers. Insulate the backs of all supply air diffusers installed in ceilings with blanket fiberglass insulation.

L. Air filters shall be of the following types: Under 5,000 cfm shall be replaceable media; 5,000 cfm and over shall be primary ‐ bag type, 80‐85% efficiency with prefilter – replaceable media.

M. All mechanical equipment shall be located to allow easy access. Provide access doors for equipment accessed through walls, partitions, or fixed ceilings. Locate equipment such as VAV boxes above the ceiling in corridors to the extent possible.

N. Start‐up: After completion of installation, prepare services for starting‐up by testing appropriately for proper operation. Engage a factory‐authorized service representative to inspect, test and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations on major equipment. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

L.O. Provide complete Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) of all air and water distribution systems for HVAC equipment. Provide a report conforming to the most recent procedural standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing requirements of AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

12.5.3 Air Curtains

Heated air curtains shall be provided at all train entrances and exits as well as all overhead door service area entrances. Air curtains shall be designed for the local winter wind velocity as identified in the latest version of the ASHRAE Fundamentals. Air curtains supply air temperature shall be tempered to a minimum of 50°F DB.

12.5.4 Fuel Oil System

A. No. 2 fuel oil shall be pumped to the boilers from an exterior underground oil tank capable of storing one (1) month’s oil at fully loaded boiler operation. The tank shall be dual wall fiberglass design and be provided with leak detection system. Ancillary tank equipment such as oil fill boxes, vents, manholes, oil level indicators, anti‐siphon valves, and alarms shall be provided. The fuel oil transfer pumps shall be skid mounted duplex type each being capable of providing sufficient oil for both boilers operating 100% loaded.

A. 12.5.3 Diesel Emissions and Emergency Ventilation

B. A. Diesel Emissions and Emergency VentilationWhere a closed or partially enclosed overbuild is utilized, a ventilation system shall be designed to accommodate normal operations as well as life safety requirements.



C.B. Diesel emissions and emergency ventilation systems shall be analyzed and designed pursuant to requirements of the Amtrak Station SDPStation Program and Planning Standards and Guidelines Appendix G.

12.5.45 HVAC Controls

A. Provide a Building Management System (BMS) based on a distributive type Direct Digital Control (DDC). The system shall be capable of peer to peer communication on a primary or primary/ secondary, BACnet or Lontalk, open protocol network. Provide an operator workstation to permit interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point‐and‐click graphics. Access to the network shall be available through a local workstation or a portable personal computer able to be plugged into the system devices and remotely through the use of the Internet. Provide means for the BMS to integrate into existing Amtrak systems.

B. The Internet access shall be made possible through the creation of a Rochester Station specific web site. The control system shall be furnished with all software, programming, hardware and start‐up services necessary for the implementation of the web site. The web site access shall allow full BMS control from a remote personal computer without the need for additional software and through standard internet protocol and graphics and be password secured.

C. The BMS shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token‐passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems and equipment.

D. Microprocessor controlled HVAC equipment shall be furnished with all necessary interface equipment and software necessary for full BMS control and monitoring. This equipment would include but not be limited to boilers, chillers, pumps, exhaust fans, variable frequency drives, heat recovery units, packaged rooftop units, and air handling units. All sensors and controls devices shall be electronic. Where torque requirements do not allow for the use of electronic actuators, electric actuators shall be used.

E. A CO2 detection system shall be provided in order to control the rate of outdoor air ventilation. The system shall initiate an audio/visual alarm and send an alarm signal to the BMS.Provide CO2 sensors as required per code and ASHRAE standards.

F. Provide damper and valve actuators with position indicators and manual overrides.

G. The Building Management System (BMS) shall meet but not be limited to the following criteria:

1. Ability to conform to peak load criteria for energy cost savings.

2. Automated equipment maintenance scheduling resulting in lower anticipated equipment life cycle costs.

3. Benefits of monitoring equipment performance to be within acceptable limits.



4. Utility usage patterns.

5. Temperature setbacks corresponding to occupancy and utilization patterns.

6. Uniform and limited control of temperature settings.

7. Filter performance monitoring and replacement pattern data accumulation.

8. Ability to monitor and record indoor and outdoor conditions affecting HVAC systems, as well as alarms, failures, and abnormal operating conditions.

9. Ability to automatically control selected equipment such as rooftop units, air handlers, pumps, fans, boilers, heaters, valves, and automated dampers.

10. Ability to perform utility accounting by displaying and recording water, electrical and natural gas usage.

11. The BMS input/output hardware shall be capable of receiving and sending both digital and analog signals.

12. All functions of the BMS shall be monitored by means of color coded graphics displays on monitors.

13. The BMS operating environment shall be the current version of Windows operating system.

12.6 PLUMBING SYSTEMS

The plumbing system consists of all fixtures, potable cold and hot water piping and equipment, piping insulation, water heating equipment, sanitary waste and vent piping systems, and other specialty piping and equipment within 6 feet of the building. Provide working space around all equipment. Provide concrete pads under all equipment. Provide all required fittings, connections and accessories required for a complete and usable system.

12.6.1 Domestic Water Distribution

Domestic water distribution consists of the following elements: Piping, Piping specialties, Valves, Insulation, Meters and Gauges.

Provide a domestic cold, hot and hot water re‐circulating water distribution system without supply interruptions. Provide natural gas domestic water heater(s) with adequate capacity for serving fixtures. Provide in‐line circulator for hot water re‐circulating water distribution system. Provide service valves, unions, meters and gauges, and access panels sufficient for maintenance per the plumbing code and regulations. Provide service valves to separately shut off each fixture, each toilet group each wing or functional area of the building. Provide identification for piping and equipment. Provide ice‐maker connector box for refrigerators.

Perform a flow test to determine system requirements prior to system design.



12.6.2 Piping Materials

Hot, Cold and Recirculation Water Piping 2 1/2” and Smaller: Aboveground, shall be ASTM B 88, Type L drawn‐temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Below ground or within slabs, provide ASTM B 88, Type K annealed‐temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints below ground and within slabs.

Hot, Cold and Recirculation Water Piping 3” and Larger: Provide ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40, galvanized. Include ends matching joining method.

12.6.3 Piping Specialties

Hammer Arrestors: Install Hammer Arrestors, also known as shock absorbers, on the cold and hot water distribution systems, where the action of quick operating valves could result in a water hammer condition.

Hose Bibs/Hydrants: Freeze proof wall hydrants shall be provided every 200 feet around the perimeter of the station building. Provide hose bibs in mechanical rooms.

Pressure reducing valves shall be provided where water pressure is above 60 psi at the water service entry area.

Dielectric Fittings: Install dielectric fittings for pipe connections where there are dissimilar metals.

12.6.4 Valves

General‐Duty Valve Applications: Provide the following valve types:

A. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use cast‐iron gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 4 and larger.

B. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball valves or butterfly valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use cast‐iron globe or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 4 and larger.

C. Hot‐Water‐Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.

D. Drain Duty: Hose‐end drain valves.

E. Provide sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment. Use ball valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use gate valves for piping NPS 4 and larger.

F. Provide shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use gate valves for piping NPS 4 and larger.

G. Provide drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

H. Provide hose‐end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.



I. Provide calibrated balancing valves in each hot‐water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.

C.

12.6.5 Drain Duty: Hose‐end drain valves.

A. Provide sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment. Use ball valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use gate valves for piping NPS 4 and larger.

B. Provide shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use gate valves for piping NPS 4 and larger.

C. Provide drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

D. Provide hose‐end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

E. Provide calibrated balancing valves in each hot‐water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.

12.6.65 Water Service

A. A Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer shall be provided for the incoming water service and on mechanical system water make‐up lines.

B. Shutoff valve, hose‐end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, shall be inside the building at the domestic water service.

C. Provide cast‐iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through a foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight.

12.6.67 Cleaning

Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: Disinfect and purge the water supply as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction prior to use. Procedures shall be at least equivalent to either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652.

12.6.7 Piping Insulation:

A. Provide pipe insulation thickness as required by code.

B. Provide minimum ½” thick insulation on cold water piping.

C. Provide vapor retarder on all piping subject to water temperatures below 70 deg F.

D. Provide heavy PVC fitting covers on all fittings.



E. Provide insulation on all piping subject to condensation formation.

12.6.8 Plumbing Fixtures

A. Provide quantity and type of plumbing fixtures required for the occupancy, use, and functions described for this facility.

B. General: Plumbing fixtures consist of the following elements: Water Closets, Urinals, Lavatories, Sinks, Service Sinks, Showers, Basins, Drinking fountains.

C. Provide durable and efficient plumbing fixtures that operate smoothly and easily without leaks, stoppages or other malfunctions. Conform to code including accessibility requirements.

D. All plumbing fixtures, where applicable, shall be of a water saving design.

E. All drainage piping shall have adequate slope toward the collection points.

F. Trap primers shall be used as required by local codes and shall be installed on lines with consideration to the frequency of operation.

G. Exterior hose bibs shall be key‐type with freeze protection.

H. All janitor and custodial rooms shall have floor mounted mop basin with bucket holding supported spout and short flexible hose connection and rack for storing mops. Provide stainless steel wall guards where installed against gypsum wallboard construction.

I. Provide all water supplies with key operated service valves.

J. Water Closets: Provide wall‐hung Low‐Flush water closets with hard‐wired sensor‐operated electronic flushometers throughout the facility in sufficient quantity to serve occupant load.

K. Urinals: Provide wall‐hung Low Flow urinals with hard‐wired sensor operated electronic flushometers in all men’s rooms in sufficient quantity to serve occupant load.

L. Lavatories: Provide wall‐hung lavatories in staff areas and under‐mount countertop lavatories in public restrooms. Hard‐wired sensor operated electronic faucets shall be installed for washing hands.

M. Sinks: Provide stainless steel countertop sinks in break rooms.

N. Drinking Fountains: Provide wall hung electric water coolers outside of grouped restrooms, with accessibility compliance.

O. Not Allowed:

1. Battery operated flushometers and faucets.

2. Flexible Elastomeric insulation on piping containing fluids with temperatures greater than 100 deg F.

3. Air admittance valves.



12.6.9 Sanitary Drainage System

A. General: Sanitary waste consists of the following elements: Piping, Cleanouts, and Drains.

B. All floor/area drain piping shall be sized based on the maximum expected flow loading with a generous allowance for fouling due to gravity flow velocities.

C. Provide a floor drain at all equipment having a condensate drain, including air handling units with cooling coils and other mechanical equipment.

D. Above‐ground Waste pipe & fittings: Provide cast iron hub and spigot, with neoprene joint seals.

E. Below‐ground Waste pipe & fittings: Provide schedule 40 PVC.

F. Vent pipe & fittings: Provide cast iron hub and spigot, with neoprene joint seals. Where approved for use, plenum‐rated schedule 40 CPVC per ASTM D 2665 may be provided.

G. Minimum pipe size used underground shall be 3”.

H. Service Pipe Installation: Provide cast‐iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through a foundation wall.

I. Cleanouts:

1. Provide cleanouts at all changes in direction of 45° or greater, every 50 feet on piping 4” and less, and every 100 feet for piping over 4”.

2. Provide cleanouts at the base of all risers. 3. Provide wall cleanouts at gang toilets.

J. Drains:

1. General: All floor drainage systems shall be coordinated with the under floor building elements.

1.2. Floor drains in toilet rooms shall be stainless steel type.

2.3. All floor drains shall be installed with trap primers. Electronic trap primers shall be provided where water supply is not based on operation of toilet fixture flush valves.

3.4. Miscellaneous Areas (sanitary waste):

4.a. Restrooms: Provide at least one floor drain in each room.

5.b. Mechanical Rooms. Provide a minimum of one floor drain in each mechanical room. Provide additional floor drains where required to eliminate horizontal drainage piping from equipment exceeding 10 feet.

12.6.10 Rain Water Drainage

A. Rain water drainage consists of the following elements: Piping, Cleanouts, and Insulation.

B. Provide drainage for disposal of rain water and clear wastes, as required by the code.



C. Drainage for outdoor areas that are completely surrounded by construction that prevents natural drainage (e.g. areaways) or that are so sloped as to result in accumulation of water or ponding.

D. Drainage of interior areas where ground water may accumulate naturally, including sump pits and elevator pits.

E. Prevent inadvertent ponding by protecting drain openings from clogging, using raised strainers with minimum height of 4 inches wherever possible and flat gratings in all other locations.

F. Maintenance of Drainage: Pipes sloped at 1/8 inch per foot, minimum, downward in direction of flow.

F.G. Drainage Outlets:

1. Drainage Outlets:

2.1. Secondary Drainage: Drain to completely redundant drain piping system.

3.2. Scuppers: Drain to grade adjacent to building, rain water drainage system, street gutter, or dry well located in landscaped area.

4.3. Areaways and Courtyards: Drain to rain water drainage system, sump pit with pump, dry well located in landscaped area, or water retention pond.

5.H.Above‐ground Rain Water Piping: Use one or both of the following: 6.1. Cast iron pipe, hub and spigot, with neoprene joint seals. 7.2. Cast iron pipe, hubless, with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamps.

8.I. Below‐ground Rain Water Piping: Use one or both of the following: 9.1. Cast iron pipe, hub and spigot, with neoprene joint seals. 10.2. PVC pipe and fittings, with solvent welded or gasketed joints.

11.J. Roof drains, Area drains, and Floor drains: Use galvanized steel, cast iron, or stainless steel.

12.K. Insulation: Provide ½” thick insulation with vapor retarder on roof drain bodies and horizontal leaders inside the facility.

12.6.11 Natural Gas Piping

A. Provide natural gas for use by HVAC and plumbing in accordance with code.

B. Obtain natural gas pressures from the local gas utility provider. Provide pressure regulators accordingly.

C. Coordinate required inlet pressure with equipment manufacturer and size gas piping accordingly per code.

D. Drips and Sediment Traps: Provide drips at connections to equipment and other points where condensate may collect and at the outlet of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.



E. Provide unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

F. Provide shutoff valves at each piece of equipment. Locate shutoff valves upstream of drip and sediment traps.

G. Provide vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned‐down, reducing‐elbow fittings with corrosion‐resistant insect screens in large end.

H. Prepare, prime and paint exterior gas piping with yellow oil‐based enamel paint.

I. Above‐ground gas pipe shall be ASTM A 53/53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B with threaded or welded joints.

12.7 Fire Protection

A. Provide an integrated fire alarm and automatic suppression system capable of notifying building occupants and controlling any fire that may start inside the facility. Provide working space around all equipment. Provide concrete pads under all equipment. Provide all required fittings, connections and accessories required for a complete and usable system. Provide portable fire extinguishers and recessed fire rated extinguisher cabinets in accordance with NFPA 10.

B. Provide systems complying with the code and with the latest versions of NFPA as they apply to the space and/or application being served.

C. Coordinate building systems and services with the Fire Protection and Alarm systems such that there shall be, where appropriate, automatic shutdown of the affected system(s) or service(s) should any of the fire protection systems are activated. (e.g. air handling system shutdown where the associated fire protection system is activated).

D. Clean Agent Systems: In areas within the building where high value electronics or critical functions occur, clean agent systems may be used.

E. Standpipe Design and Installation: The construction shall provide a standpipe system as required by code and NFPA 14‐2007.

F. Sprinkler Systems

1. Provide automatic fire sprinkler or fire extinguishing systems to provide complete coverage throughout the facility. Provide wet pipe sprinkler systems unless otherwise required by code.

2. Provide quick‐response recessed sprinklers with ordinary temperature rating in areas with finished ceilings. Provide white sprinklers and escutcheon plates to match ceiling color.

3. Provide sprinkler head wire guards in storage rooms, mechanical rooms and other areas where heads could be subjected to damage from material handling.



4. The incoming sprinkler service shall be provided with a double check backflow preventer.

5. The systems shall be completely hydraulically designed to meet the density and flow requirements set‐forth in NFPA 13, 30 and 30A. The areas of the building shall have Hazard Classifications per NFPA 13 and code. Confirm water pressure at the site prior to finalizing Fire Sprinkler construction documents.

6. System Testing: After the system has been installed, a pre‐test and final acceptance test shall be performed. The testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate NFPA sections and local and state requirements.

7. Pipe: Use one or more of the following:

o Materials permitted by code

o Copper pipe with soldered joints. o Steel pipe with threaded, grooved, or welded joints.

8. Fittings: Use one or more of the following:

o Materials permitted by code

o Copper.

o Steel.

o Cast iron.

SECTION 13. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

13.1 General Requirements


A. Furnish and install all electrical items of work required for a complete, fully operational, energy efficient and low maintenance electrical system in Rochester Station. The design shall consider equipment life expectancy, energy costs, future expansion, maintainability, and maintenance costs.

B. In addition to these requirements, the contractor shall refer to Amtrak Engineering Stations Standard Design Practices (SDP) for additional requirements.

C. All electrical equipment and materials furnished and installed under this Contract shall be compatible in all respects with the other equipment in the respective system.

D. The design shall meet or exceed all current industry standards and applicable codes. Electrical equipment, attachments and supports shall be designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Building Code of New York State.

E. The room sizes for the electrical and communication rooms shown on the Conceptual Drawings are for guidance only. The Design Professional shall determine the actual room



sizes and locations. Any changes to the room sizes must be justifiable and approved by the Department. Similarly, the ratings and sizes of the electrical equipment, if shown, are the minimum requirements; the actual ratings and sizes shall be determined by the Design Professional.

F. Electrical one‐line diagrams, communication riser diagrams, security riser diagrams and closed circuit television (CCTV) riser diagrams are provided for conceptual reference of anticipated systems. Final design of these systems including sizes, quantities and locations of all devices should be performed by the Design‐Build Contractor and coordinated with all agencies (Amtrak and Trailways).

G. In the case of any conflict between the Specifications, Codes, Standards, Drawings, Comprehensive User’s Requirements and/or the Project Requirements for the same subject, the Design‐Builder shall comply with the most stringent requirement.

H. All Electrical equipment shall be of heavy‐duty industrial‐grade quality. Catalog cuts and samples of equipment (such as wires/cables, devices and fittings) shall be submitted to Amtrak for information. All electrical equipment shall be UL Listed.

I. All electrical equipment including but not limited to distribution equipment, conduit, wires/cables, fixtures, panels, and receptacles shall be furnished and installed with permanent nameplates or tags that shall identify the equipment, voltage, circuit number, source, phase orientation, and destination of power flow as applicable.

J. For any repetitive type of installation such as lighting fixtures a sample mock‐up shall be installed for review and approval by the Department before commencement of remaining associated.

K. Design for all electrical and data cabling for the concourse level shall comply with NFPA 130‐2010 Section 5.4 Wiring Requirements.

L. Provide tables and schedules listing the manufacturers, ratings and details of all overcurrent protective devices and electrical equipment (including but not limited to switchboards, panels, disconnects and transformers). Provide full‐size drawings showing the locations of all panels (distribution boards, subdistribution boards, panelboards (typical)) on each floor. Use Amtrak standard panel schedules and fill in all information.

M. All wires, cables, busses, lugs and electrical connections shall be copper. Lugs shall be suitable for copper cables only.

N. All electrical distribution equipment shall be fully rated for the available short circuit current. Series rated equipment and systems are not acceptable. The Design‐Build Contractor shall perform a short circuit current study using an industry approved software application. All busses, motor loads, cable lengths and inputs to this study shall be accurately reflected on this study.

O. The Contract documents detail the minimum requirements for equipment, material and installation procedures. All equipment and material that is furnished and installed, and all installation procedures, must meet or exceed these minimum requirements.



P. There shall not be any plumbing (water, sewer, or drain), gas, sprinkler, steam or hydraulic lines passing through any electrical or Communications equipment rooms. In all other locations, a minimum of 12” separation in all directions shall be maintained between electrical raceway and plumbing, steam, hydraulic, and other lines and their appurtenances.

Q. All Amtrak Standard Drawings included in the RFP documents shall be part of the design package.

R. Upon completion of equipment installation, the Design‐Builder shall fill in and waterproof all openings in an approved manner. All waterproofing shall be maintained when penetrating exterior walls, ceilings, roofs and slabs.

S. UPS‐backed electrical panels in the Communications Rooms shall only feed the equipment inside the respective room. UPS backed panels feeding computer workstations outlets and other loads outside the communication rooms shall not be installed inside the communications rooms.

T. Power, lighting, and receptacle panels and disconnects shall not be installed in the same rooms as Communications panels, UPSs and transformers if they are not dedicated for the equipment in that room.

U. Coordinate the design with all other trades and also furnish and install power as required to all mechanical, architectural, instrumentation and controls, communications, and other equipment, including but not limited to electrically operated skylights, doors, gates, grilles, all cranes (including jib and monorail cranes). Provide General Arrangement drawings showing the coordination of all equipment.

V. Follow NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 408.3(E) for electrical equipment phase arrangement.

W. Electrical equipment requiring examination, adjustment, servicing or maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn qualified personnel of potential electric arc flash hazards in accordance with NEC Article 110.16.


A. NFPA

a. NFPA 70 (2011): National Electrical Code

b. NFPA 72 (2010): National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

c. NFPA 130 (2010): Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail Systems

B. Amtrak

a. Amtrak Station Program and Planning – Standards and Guidelines

b. Amtrak Engineering Stations Standards Design Practices (SDP)

c. Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards

C. Standards for materials listed in Specifications (NEMA, UL, ANSI, etc.) shall be referenced under each specification section where applicable in order to ensure durable and quality



materials are provided and installed on the project. Non‐applicable references should be deleted in order to eliminate confusion.

D. Symbols on drawings shall comply with current ANSI standards.

13.3 Calculations and Coordination Drawings

A. Calculations ‐ The Design‐Builder shall provide the following design calculations certified by a licensed Professional Engineer for Department records:

1. Load calculations ‐ The complete electrical system shall be sized for the connected load plus an additional 30% spare capacity. This includes but is not limited to all feeders, switchboards, distribution boards, subdistribution boards, panelboards, transformers, and uninterruptible power supplies.

2. Voltage Drop calculations:

a. The system working voltages shall satisfy ANSI C84.1.

b. The total voltage drop from the power source (main circuit breaker) to the utilization device shall not exceed 5% except as noted below in 3) and 4).

c. The total voltage drop in the main and sub feeders shall not exceed 3%.

d. The voltage drop in the branch circuit conductors shall not exceed 3%.

e. The motor feeder total voltage drop shall not exceed 4%. Fire water pump motor feeder voltage drop on inrush shall not exceed 15%.

f. The voltage drop on separately derived systems for sensitive electronic equipment such as computers shall not exceed the limits as per NEC Article 647.4D.

3. Short circuit current calculations ‐ The short circuit ratings of all the power distribution equipment shall be based on short circuit study calculations, with minimum ratings as per Section 13.6. The Design‐Builder shall obtain, in writing, the available short circuit current at the utility from Rochester Gas & Electric. Provide a detailed short circuit current calculation from Rochester Gas & Electric’s transformer vault to the final panelboard or disconnect switch on each bus and feeder on the one‐line diagram, taking into account all transformers, motors, feeder and branch circuit lengths.

B. Coordination study ‐ The over‐current protective devices shall be sized and set based on a coordination study developed at the design development phase. The study shall contain the fault and load current values listed at key points on the one‐line diagram to determine the necessary equipment fault ratings. Ground fault protection shall be furnished and installed on the main circuit breaker and on all feeder breakers. Zone selective interlocking shall be used to achieve the best possible coordination with the downstream breakers. Provide a coordination study showing that the primary‐side circuit breaker can handle the inrush current of any associated transformer(s). The design professional shall propose solutions to



any problems and demonstrate that coordination can be achieved with the proposed devices.

C. Furnish and install seismic restraints & vibration isolation for all supporting systems for electrical equipment, including but not limited to conduit racks and lighting fixtures.

D. Coordination Drawings – Before commencing on the electrical work at the station, the DB contractor shall prepare a set of coordination drawings displaying all HVAC, plumbing, fire protection, fire detection, electrical power, electrical lighting and electrical equipment. All ‘clashes’ of system shall be clearly identified to the engineer for expeditious review; otherwise it is assumed that the entire drawing is coordinated with no ‘clashes’. In preparing the Coordination Drawings the following should be followed:

1. Underground Plans: Shall clearly show all elements of HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Fire Detection, Communication and Electrical being routed under the slab of referenced floor.

2. Floorplans: Shall clearly show all elements of HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Fire Detection, Communication and Electrical being routed above the slab of referenced floor and below the ceiling.

3. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Shall clearly show all elements of HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Fire Detection, Communication and Electrical being at or above the ceiling of the reference floor.

13.4 Area Types

A. Classified (Hazardous) Areas ‐ The area classifications given here are the minimum requirements. The Design‐Builder shall make a comprehensive study of the entire Amtrak Station to identify all areas that are required to be classified and determine their classifications. The extent of classification shall be as per area classification drawings based on the comprehensive study. All classification drawings shall be certified by a licensed Professional Engineer and shall be submitted to the Department for information. Area classifications shall be based on the use of diesel fuel or as noted. The study shall include:

1. calculations to determine the actual extent of the classified areas;

2. explanation of NEC classifications;

3. fueling regulations and considerations;

4. design criteria for electrical systems in hazardous locations;

5. ventilation requirements;

6. temperature limits of diesel fuels before ignition/detonation;

7. references.

B. The study should comply with all applicable local and national codes. The following areas in Rochester Station shall be considered to be Class 1, Division 1, Group ‘D’ throughout the area regardless of height unless otherwise noted below:



1. All areas TBD.

2. Wherever possible, all electrical equipment shall be installed outside the classified areas except where required by the Codes or equipment restrictions. All feeder and branch circuit conduits shall be installed exposed.

3. Wet Areas ‐ (Wherever possible, except where required by the Codes or equipment restrictions, the electrical equipment shall be installed outside of the wet areas or at least out of the direct path of water.)

4. The following open areas plus the 25’ periphery around them:

o Outdoors, including under canopies and platforms;

o Under skylights;

o Any other areas required by the Codes.

o Enclosed (the indicated area only):

o Water meter room;

o Sewer ejector pump room;

o High‐pressure wash room;

o Elevator pit;

o Escalator pit;

o Sump pits;

o Restrooms, toilets and personnel wash areas;


o Harsh/corrosive atmosphere areas:

o Battery charging room;

o Boiler room;


o Wet and classified:

o Pits

13.4 Maintenance requirements

A. Provide workspace around all electrical and communication equipment as required by the National Electric Code and referenced Amtrak Standards.

B. All lighting fixtures shall be accessible with a stepladder (up to 10 feet) or a scissors‐lift (higher than 10 feet) for lamp replacement and other maintenance.

C. Free space on both sides of a panelboard shall be minimum 2’‐0”. Exception: if there is a minimum of 3’‐0” from the top of the panel to the ceiling, and if there is sufficient entrance



space at the top panel surface for conduit for spare breakers, then the minimum spacing may be 6” between panels.

D. Furnish and install personnel access and exit doors as per Code requirements in all electrical equipment rooms.

E. All equipment shall be installed to permit easy access for operation and maintenance.

F. There shall be no electrical distribution equipment in the communications rooms not dedicated for communications equipment.

13.5 Mounting of equipment

A. Mounting arrangement (general):

1. Unless otherwise noted, mount all electrical equipment as per applicable codes, manufacturer’s recommendations and the attached Specifications;

2. Where panelboards are installed in stud walls, install horizontal metal studs for securing panelboard to wall. Anchoring panelboards to gypsum walls with mechanical anchors is not acceptable.

3. No equipment shall interfere with operation of the facility, especially the movement of the buses and personnel;

4. Maintain proper clearances around all equipment as required by code and maintenance considerations;

5. Furnish and install bollards to protect exterior panelboards, transformers and other electrical distribution equipment exposed to vehicle travel;

6. Provide dedicated space for conduit runs at the ceiling, including minimum 25% space (of the width of the rack) for installing future additional conduit without obstructing access to existing conduit or other equipment. Ceiling conduit runs shall not cast shadows;

7. Furnish and install seismic restraints and vibration isolation as required per seismic zone and applicable Codes.

B. Lighting Fixtures:

1. Mounting heights of fixtures in areas with finished ceilings shall be based on the Architectural drawings (installed above the required clearances shown on the drawings).

2. Mounting heights of fixtures in areas without finished ceilings shall be based on Electrical drawings.

3. Wall mounted fixtures (interior and exterior) shall be indicated on the Electrical drawings for proper elevation and correctly displayed on all Architectural drawings.

4. Lighting fixtures shall not be installed in classified areas unless they are suitable for use in Class 1, Division 1, Group D locations;



5. Do not install lighting fixtures above anything that would block the light from reaching the work plane. Relocate the fixtures if required, adding fixtures as necessary to maintain the required lighting levels;

6. The arrangement of lighting fixtures shall be coordinated with the layout of the areas/rooms in which they are installed. Refer to Coordination Drawing requirements.

C. Receptacles

1. Install the computer receptacles at desk height.

2. Install all counter receptacles 8” above the finished counter height, coordinate with architectural millwork.

3. Mount all receptacles 18” AFF, unless otherwise detailed on the plan drawings.

4. All receptacles shall be NEMA 5‐15R unless noted otherwise, rated at 15A 120 volts.

5. Ground Fault Circuit Interupting (GFCI) receptacles shall be located on the Contract Drawings and elsewhere where required by Code.

6. Dedicated circuit receptacles are shown on the plan for specific devices. These receptacles shall have a dedicated 120 volt, 20 ampere single pole circuit dedicated to these locations.

7. All receptacles shall be coordinated with the Architect for color of faceplate and receptacle.

D. Lighting Switches:

1. Install all lighting switches in the office area 48” above finished floor to the top of the operating handle.

2. Where there is a single door, install the lighting switches near the door strike plate. Where there is a double door, install the lighting switches on the end of the right‐hand‐side of the door swing.

3. All switches shall be installed so that “ON” is in the position with the switch toggle up and “OFF” is in the position with the switch toggle down.

4. Install switches in separate single boxes if the voltage between the exposed live metal parts of adjacent switches exceeds 300 volts.

E. Panel Boards ‐ Install panel boards on channels.

F. Distribution Panel‐ Allocate floor space for Distribution Panels, minimum 25% or enough for one additional vertical section, whichever is greater. Distribution Panels shall be mounted on a 4” concrete housekeeping pad with a 3” extension from the front/sides/back of the distribution panel enclosure.

G. Transformers ‐ Install transformers on vibration isolators.

H. Generator(s) ‐ Install the generator(s) on vibration isolators. Also refer to the attached Specifications.



I. Rubber mats ‐ Furnish and install rubber mats in front of electrical equipment in each room containing electrical distribution equipment.

J. Disconnect Switches ‐ Install disconnect switches on channels.

K. Owner‐furnished/ Design‐Builder‐installed equipment: 1. Kiosks: DB Contractor shall coordinate with Amtrak and provide required electrical

connections in quantity and type at each kiosk location.

2. Passenger Information Display System: DB Contractor shall coordinate with Amtrak and provide required electrical connections in quantity and type at each kiosk location.

3. Vending Machines: DB Contractor shall coordinate with Amtrak and provide required electrical connections in quantity and type at each kiosk location.

4. ATM: DB Contractor shall coordinate with Amtrak and provide required electrical connections in quantity and type at each kiosk location.

5.

13.6 Electrical Service:

Furnish and install a 3‐phase, 4‐wire surge‐protected electrical service into the Temporary Station, permanent Station and a temporary service for site construction power from the utility company (Rochester Gas & Electric). The preferred service voltage is 480/277V. The Design‐Builder shall construct, furnish, and install all required equipment as per Rochester Gas & Electric’s final service layout (ruling):

A. If the service layout calls for transformer vaults and network protector (NWP) compartments, the requirement could be:

1. Transformer Vaults, either:

• Below grade in the sidewalk and/or Amtrak property; or

• Above grade inside Amtrak property (with direct access to the outside).

2. Network Protector Compartments ‐ Above grade inside Amtrak property. Install the NWP compartments inside the Amtrak building per Rochester Gas & Electric requirements.

3. If the service layout calls for pad‐mounted transformers, the requirement would be:

• Pad Mounted Transformers ‐ Installed above grade on concrete pads inside Amtrak property. Furnish and install bollards and a fence to protect the equipment on the pad. There shall be direct, independent access to the transformers from the sidewalk.

• Or any other Rochester Gas & Electric requirement.

In any of the above cases, furnish and install property line boxes (PLBs) as per Rochester Gas & Electric requirements, and cables from the PLBs to the NWP compartments. The final location of the transformers, vaults and NWP



compartments shall be based on Rochester Gas & Electric’s final service layout (ruling). The Design‐Builder shall coordinate the design and construction of the network protector rooms and transformer vaults or pads with Rochester Gas & Electric, and build as per Rochester Gas & Electric’s requirements. Crabs for connecting Rochester Gas & Electric cables to AMTRAK cables shall be as approved by Rochester Gas & Electric.

4. Tenant Electrical Service: Provide necessary infrastructure for tenant spaces. Coordinate requirements with Rochester Gas & Electric.

5. Metering: Coordinate locations of electrical meters with Rochester Gas & Electric.

6. Service Rating (Capacity)

a. The service shall be based on the total connected load plus a 30% (of connected load) spare capacity. The spare capacity shall be included in the sizing of the service/feeder breakers, distribution boards, subdistribution‐boards panelboards uninterruptible power supplies and other electrical equipment, Furnish and install 30% spare breakers in the switchboard distribution boards, subdistribution boards and panelboards.

b. The minimum number of service takeoffs shall be determined per the total connected load requirements plus a spare capacity of 30% of the total connected load. Each takeoff shall be limited to a maximum of 4000A regardless of the Rochester Gas & Electric supply voltage. If there are multiple takeoffs, then the takeoffs shall have equal Ampere ratings. Each takeoff shall include 30% spare capacity.

c. Rochester Gas & Electric approval for service equipment shall be obtained prior to installation. Coordination with Rochester Gas & Electric, furnishing and installing all required equipment as specified, and complete installation as per Rochester Gas & Electric standards shall be the responsibility of the Design‐Builder.

d. The Design‐Builder shall prepare and submit a load request letter (via email) for electrical service to the Department for signature and transmission to the electrical utility (Rochester Gas & Electric). A sample letter shall be furnished upon request. A load breakdown letter listing the connected and demand loads (winter and summer), must be furnished to Rochester Gas & Electric refer to Exhibit “A” for a blank form

e. Fuse cut outs shall be furnished and installed for the fire alarm systems and other stand alone panels and as required by the City of Rochester Fire Department in coordination with Communications Engineering Division. The fire alarm control panel shall monitor the indication of ATS power failure.

f. The service feeders shall be installed in ducts between the point of entry and the main switchboard or transformer vault(s), whichever is applicable. All electrical service work shall comply with all of Rochester Gas & Electric’s regulations. The



installation of service equipment and the number of network protector rooms and transformer vaults shall be based on the approved final service layout and approved shop drawings.

g. Rochester Gas & Electric’s equipment (transformers, switchgear and network protectors) shall be brought to and installed in the electrical vault/network protector room (where applicable) by the Design‐Builder under Rochester Gas & Electric supervision.

h. There shall be no breaks in the service lateral or metering conduits unless approval is obtained in writing from Rochester Gas & Electric. Conduits and pull boxes are considered breaks in the conduit.

i. Furnish and install cable limiters as per Rochester Gas & Electric’s requirements where three or more sets of service cables are used between the PLB and the CT cabinets. The cable limiters shall be installed on both ends of the service cables.

13.6.2 Electrical Distribution Rooms, Electrical Panel Rooms and Electrical Closets

A. All electrical distribution equipment shall be installed inside dedicated electrical equipment rooms, unless shown otherwise on the plans. Provide 25% spare wall space in the electrical distribution and panel rooms for future use. Provide electrical closets at various locations for distribution boards and panelboards.

B. Mechanical ventilation is required for all electrical equipment rooms. The preferred method of cooling/ventilating electrical equipment rooms is with ventilation/exhaust fans. Refer to the Mechanical OPR for temperature limits. If such temperature limits cannot be reached via fans, submit an alternate scheme for approval.

C. Provide equipment replacement clearances and removal routes in all electrical rooms.

13.6.3 Main Distribution Switchboard

A. The main disconnect will be a 100% rated draw‐out circuit breaker of the required overcurrent and short circuit interrupting ratings:

1. Main circuit breakers shall not work in conjunction with current limiters at available short circuit current levels up to and including 200kA;

2. For available short circuit current levels more than 200kA, circuit breakers with integral current limiters shall be accepted;

3. The main and switchboard distribution circuit breakers shall be electronic‐trip, with adjustments for long‐term, short‐term, instantaneous and ground fault conditions.

4. Furnish and install undervoltage relays with voltage and time settings on all main circuit breakers to trip the breakers in the event of an undervoltage condition.



B. Circuit breakers shall be installed for over‐current protection of all switchboards, distribution boards, subdistribution boards and panelboards. Branch circuit protection shall be by breakers only.

C. Switchboard shall have a minimum of 50% spare feeder poles.

D. Coordinate all tripping curves (long term, short term, instantaneous, and ground fault) to the specific facility electrical conditions. Submit a detailed coordination study. Where required the DB Contractor should consider the use of electronic trip circuit breakers to assist in the coordination study.

E. The switchboard busses shall be copper, and rated for and braced to withstand minimum 200,000A of available short circuit current (Rochester Gas & Electric short circuit plus rotating or other equipment contribution), or more if determined by the short circuit current calculations required.

F. Circuit monitors: Square D CM4000T series with remote monitoring capability (or approved equal) shall be installed on the switchboard/main distribution board. A IP based communications interface shall enable a PC to communicate remotely with a circuit monitor through a dedicated IP address: furnish and install the necessary phone, ethernet and data outlets in the vicinity of the switchboard. The circuit monitors shall be installed on the line sides of the main breakers on both the Rochester Gas & Electric and generator power supplies.

G. Building Management System (BMS)

1. The BMS shall monitor all line‐to‐line and line‐to‐neutral voltages (on the line side of the main disconnect, in order to monitor Rochester Gas & Electric power), line and neutral currents, kilowatts and kilowatt‐hours used, voltage frequency, and power factor at all switchboards.

2. The BMS shall record all of the required values with timestamps, and shall output the information in a format suitable for inclusion in a report. The BMS shall record any alarms with the time of occurrence. These alarms shall consist of voltages greater or less than 5% of the standard incoming Rochester Gas & Electric voltage. The BMS shall also record currents that exceed the transformer rating.

3. All monitored variables shall be made available to the BMS system through an industry standard communications protocol such as BACNET, MODBUS, or approved equal, along with any required hardware and/or software interface, such that it is compatible with the BMS system being furnished and installed.

4. Refer to Section 15, Instrumentation and Controls, for more details regarding the BMS.

13.6.4 Distribution System

A. Power Distribution ‐The power in the Amtrak Station shall be distributed preferably at 480/277V. In case power is obtained at a different voltage from Rochester Gas & Electric,



the voltage shall be stepped up or down (as applicable) to 480/277V. Refer to Section 13.6 Utility Service for additional requirements.

B. Furnish and install step‐down transformers of adequate capacity for all equipment requiring 208/120V power supply including but not limited to:

1. Convenience receptacles;

2. Communications equipment;

3. Security equipment;

4. Clock and Kronos system;

5. Computer loads;

6. Any other equipment needing 208/120V power supply;

7. Fire detection system.

C. Short Circuit Current Ratings of Equipment ‐ The short circuit current ratings of all power distribution equipment shall be based on a short‐circuit current study prepared and furnished by the Design Professional. The available short circuit current at Rochester Gas & Electric shall be obtained in writing from the Electric Utility. However, all circuit breakers shall have the following minimum short circuit current interrupting ratings, RMS symmetrical:

1. Distribution Boards (DBs): 65,000A;

2. Subdistribution Boards: 42,000A;

3. Panelboards: 22,000A

Where the short circuit current exceeds the above minimum values based on the calculations, the circuit breakers shall be rated at the next higher standard interrupting rating above the calculated short circuit current value.

D. Distribution panels and panelboards:

1. In order to minimize the sizes of the service switchboards and the number of feeder runs, furnish and install distribution boards of adequate capacity (plus spare) in each Electrical Room to feed the local panelboards.

2. All electrical panels (henceforth defined panelboards) shall be furnished and installed with main breakers, and copper phase, neutral and ground bus bars. Ground and neutral busses shall be one hundred percent (100%) rated. No panels shall have more than 42 single pole breakers excluding the 3‐pole main breaker. Every panel’s feeder shall have appropriately sized neutral (minimum size equal to phase cable size; larger if required to handle nonlinear loads) and ground cables.

3. Feeders for all panels shall be sized as per the main circuit breaker frame rating, not the trip rating (Example: a 400AF/300AT panel will have its feeder sized for 400A, not 300A).



4. Furnish and install dedicated electrical panels in rooms/areas that have concentrated loads or special electrical requirements.

5. Panelboards for nonlinear loads (including computers) shall have 200% rated neutrals. Adjust the neutral busses in all required electrical equipment accordingly.

6. Furnish and install one UPS‐backed 100A, 3‐Phase, 4‐wires, 208/120VAC, 42 Breakers electrical panel inside the Communications Room to feed dedicated 20 Amp circuit outlets (1 duplex and 1 quad for telephone equipment; 1 duplex and 1 quad for paging equipment; 1 quad 125VAC and 1 single 250VAC for each data cabinet), and all dedicated circuit outlets required.

7. Furnish and install one UPS‐backed 100A, 3‐Phase, 4‐wires, 208/120VAC, 42 Breakers electrical panel inside the PIDS Server Room to feed dedicated 20 Amp circuit outlets (1 duplex and 1 quad for telephone equipment; 1 duplex and 1 quad for paging equipment; 1 quad 125VAC and 1 single 250VAC for each data cabinet), and all dedicated circuit outlets required in the Revenue Server room.

8. All panels feeding computer loads shall be protected against voltage and current surges and lightning strikes as per spec IEEE/ANSI standard C62.41 Category A and B testing levels, and shall meet UL spec 1449. Maximum allowable surge levels shall be calculated and affixed to the system. The surge protector shall be type SPB as manufactured by MCG Electronics or approved equal.

E. Transformers:

1. All transformers shall be delta‐wye.

2. All transformers shall be sized with 30% spare capacity of the full connected load. Dedicated primary and secondary protection breakers shall be furnished and installed for all transformers. The main circuit breaker of a panel or distribution board on the secondary side of the transformer does not constitute secondary protection by Amtrak standards, and shall not be accepted. Also refer to the attached Specifications.

3. The design shall compensate for harmonics currents created by nonlinear loads by the reduction or elimination of the harmonics currents. Isolation transformers for nonlinear loads shall be UL listed 1561 for K‐factor operation, triple‐shielded for high common mode noise attenuation, and filtered for high‐frequency noise attenuation. K‐rated isolation transformers shall be type “Ultra‐K” as manufactured by Controlled Power Company or approved equal.

4. Neutral wires and busses for computer and other nonlinear loads shall be 200% rated, from the isolation transformer, to the disconnect switch, to the panel, and to the load.

5. All transformer coil windings shall be copper.

F. Disconnect switches:

1. A dedicated horsepower‐rated, heavy‐duty, industrial‐grade disconnecting means shall be furnished and installed for all electrical equipment including packaged units and all other mechanical, communications and/or architectural equipment covered in the



complete Project Requirements, regardless if the equipment is supplied by Amtrak or the Design‐Builder. Furnish and install power for all of the equipment installed by all other disciplines as required, and/or as per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Furnish and install local isolating switches for all electrical equipment within 5’ of the equipment with an enclosure rated for the area in which it is installed. Wherever a manufacturer has not furnished a disconnect means, furnish and install a dedicated external horsepower‐rated disconnect sized as per the NEC.

2. Furnish and install Code sized disconnects for all Owner‐furnished/Owner‐installed, Owner‐furnished/Design‐Builder‐installed and Design‐Builder‐ furnished/Design‐Builder‐installed power equipment.

G. Raceway, Boxes and Fittings ‐ Unless otherwise noted, all cables and wires shall be installed in raceways.

1. Raceways shall be of the following types:

a. Hot‐dip galvanized rigid steel conduits (HDG RSC) with hot‐dip galvanized malleable iron (HDG) fittings and HDG cast iron boxes;

b. Hot‐galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (HG EMT) with raintight galvanized steel compression fittings and galvanized stamped steel boxes.

c. Underground fiberglass or PVC ducts in ductbanks.

d. Zero‐halogen‐jacketed galvanized liquidtight flexible metallic conduit, galvanized liquidtight fittings and galvanized stamped steel boxes.

e. Infloor ducts for built‐in type furniture only, where required by the furniture layout.

2. Furnish and install HDG cast iron boxes for any transition between HDG RSC and any of the other raceway types.

3. Any raceway passing through any particular area on its way to its destination shall be rated for use in that area (e.g., wet, classified, corrosive), and not only for the final area in which the load is located.

4. All PVC conduits routed horizontally underground (or under slab) shall transition vertically to HDG RSC with a large radius HDS RSC elbow and extend 6” above the finished floor slab. The metallic portion of the conduit run shall be painted with corrosion resistant paint. Bonding bushings shall be installed on each conduit and a #6 AWG bare copper boding conductor shall be connected to the nearest grounding bus bar.

5. Concrete‐encased fiberglass or PVC ducts shall be used for the following applications. The minimum size of fiberglass or PVC ducts shall be 4” with a minimum of two fiberglass or PVC ducts (at least one spare) per run or as noted below.

6. Incoming underground service feeders. Furnish and install a minimum of two spare 4” PVC ducts.



a. From the PLB to the transformer vaults where there are transformer vaults and Network Protector Rooms.

b. From the PLB to the CT Cabinet where there are no transformer vaults and no Network Protector Rooms.

c. From the pad ‐mounted transformers to the PLBs, and then to the CT cabinets in the EDR, where there are pad‐mounted transformers.

7. Classified locations:

a. Dry areas: HDG RSC, explosion proof HDG cast iron boxes and couplings, HDG sealing fittings.

b. Wet areas and harsh/corrosive atmosphere locations: HDG RSC, explosion proof HDG cast iron boxes and couplings, HDG sealing fittings, all polyurethane coated.

8. Nonclassified locations:

a. Wet areas and harsh/corrosive atmosphere locations: HDG RSC, HDG cast iron boxes and HDG malleable iron fittings, all polyurethane coated.

b. Under the concrete slab ‐ Polyurethane‐coated HDG RSC and fittings, minimum size 1”, maximum 2”, from the load side of the local disconnect switch to the shop equipment (e.g., brake lathes and other heavy machinery). Only if:

1. The slab thickness is 12” minimum; and

2. There is no vehicle travel in the area.

a. The locations of the conduit shall be clearly indicated in the vicinity of installation.

b. In hung ceiling areas, behind the sheetrock walls for devices only: galvanized, zero‐halogen‐jacketed flexible metallic conduit.

c. Dry industrial areas exposed to vehicle travel, including the maintenance area, up to 12’ AFF: HDG RSC, HDG cast iron boxes and HDG fittings.

d. For emergency circuits consisting of: power, communications (including the fire alarm equipment, fuse cut‐out boxes and CCTV equipment), emergency lighting,(including illuminated exit signs), and the fire water pump: HDG RSC, HDG cast iron boxes and HDG fittings.

e. Remaining nonclassified dry locations: hot galvanized EMT and galvanized steel raintight compression fittings and galvanized stamped steel boxes.

9. All steel raceways shall be electrically continuous and grounded.

10. Furnish and install overhead exposed raceways on racks in maintenance and other areas throughout the Station.

11. All conduits feeding lighting fixtures on the outside walls shall be concealed.



12. There shall not be any underground or underfloor ducts within the Station except where noted.

13. All raceways shall be as per the National Electrical Code in approved sizes. Conduits of diameter ¾” and greater are to be used. Smaller diameter conduits are not allowed.

14. Hangers from the ceiling steel or concrete for the conduit supporting trapezes shall be furnished and installed. Use hot‐dip galvanized steel in dry and noncorrosive atmosphere areas, and Type 304 stainless steel everywhere else.

15. In areas without hung ceilings, raceways shall be installed exposed in all of the rooms/areas on that floor. In areas with hung ceilings, raceways shall be installed above the hung ceilings for all lighting, receptacle and power systems. The vertical runs running under the hung ceiling shall be concealed within the walls. All device boxes shall be mounted flush in the walls.

16. Waterproof all incoming ducts. Seal all ducts containing cables with watertight expandable plugs, OZ/Gedney type “CSBG” or approved equal. Seal all spare ducts with watertight caps.

17. Raceway shall not run through any structural members.

18. No electrical raceway (conduit, tubing, or trough) shall be installed inside any utility room, space, shaft (elevator room, hoist way and shaft, gas meter room, pump room, machinery space/room, communications room, control room or space), computer room is not dedicated for the electrical equipment in that room. Do not through‐feed any other raceway in any such areas.

19. Sealing fittings shall be installed at maximum 80 foot intervals for all conduit runs longer than 80 feet that pass through classified (hazardous) areas.

20. Conduit seals and drain fittings shall be installed as per Code in conduit runs from classified areas to unclassified areas on all sides of the classified area.

21. All electrical equipment, feeders (conduits) and wiring installed in classified areas shall be suitable for Class 1, Division 1, Group ‘D’ locations. Threaded, rigid steel hot‐dip galvanized conduits, explosion‐proof fittings, couplings, boxes, hubs, sealing fittings, sealing compounds and other associated requirements per both the Building Code of New York State and the NEC (NFPA 70 Articles 500 thru 505 and 511 thru 516) shall be used in these areas.

22. Conduit shall not block or interfere with the operation of windows, doors, skylights, HVAC equipment, communications equipment and other electrical equipment. Do not install conduit directly below skylights or across windows or other openings.

13.6.5 Wiring

A. All cables and wires shall be installed in the applicable type of raceway.



B. Wiring for the following electrical systems shall be installed in their own dedicated raceway systems: emergency compact fluorescent lighting, explosion proof lighting, explosion proof receptacles, communications, fire alarm panel, fire water pump, computers, telephone, telecommunications, data, clock, paging, CCTV, and security systems.

C. Cover all cable connections in the manholes and property line boxes with heavy‐duty, thick‐wall, waterproof, heat‐shrink splice insulation with integral silicone sealant.

D. The minimum size wire shall be No. 12 AWG, rated at 15A maximum. No. 10 AWG wire shall be rated at 20A maximum. All larger wire/cable sizes shall be rated as per the NEC. All wires and cables shall be rated at 75°C. The branch circuit wires tapped off the home runs for lighting fixtures shall be minimum No. 12 AWG, and those for receptacles shall be minimum No. 10 AWG. All wires and cables (including ground wires) shall be sized as required to account for the load and the voltage drop, and shall fit the terminals of the device or equipment properly. Cutting strands off of the wire/cable to fit the terminals is not permitted. In the event that the feeder cables/wires do not fit the equipment terminals, furnish and install a transition to cables/wires that will.

E. All wiring size No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. All wiring size No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.

F. Install a pull cord in each empty conduit/tube. The pull cord shall be rated for 200 pounds and be marked for every foot.

G. Each electrical raceway shall contain insulated grounding conductor(s). Isolated ground circuits shall contain two grounding conductors: one for the system ground, and one dedicated isolated equipment ground. The system ground conductor shall have green insulation, and the isolated equipment ground conductor shall have green insulation with a yellow stripe.

13.6.6 Enclosures

A. Switchboard enclosures shall be NEMA 1A gasketed.

B. All electrical equipment enclosures (including panel and distribution boards, disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers) for dry and nonclassified areas shall be combination NEMA 12/3R, hot‐dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. All equipment enclosures for wet and corrosive atmosphere locations shall be minimum 12 gauge NEMA 4X type 304 stainless steel.

D. All equipment enclosures for dry classified (hazardous) locations shall be NEMA 7, suitable for Class 1, Division 1, Group D locations.

13.6.7 Grounding and Ground Fault Protection

A. All electrical equipment shall be grounded as per the NEC, IEEE standards, and Amtrak Specifications and Standard Drawings.



B. The grounding system shall consist of the following systems bonded together. Rochester Gas & Electric, the utility company, shall approve the grounding system.

C. A building ground loop consisting of a bare 4/0 ground cable with necessary ground rods shall be designed to provide a ground resistance shall be less than 5 Ohms.

D. The main grounding busses in electrical and communication rooms shall be made of copper and be a minimum of ¼” thick and 20” long.

E. Bonding of the following structures shall be done in an approved manner:

1. The water pipe on the street side of water meter;

2. Steel pilings and the metal frame of the building bonded together with cable;

3. Concrete encased grounding electrode system;

4. Grounding rod.

F. All below‐grade ground connections shall be done using the ‘Cadweld’ process. All above ground connections shall be with pressure type connectors. All connectors shall be covered with epoxy paint or taped.

G. All ground connections shall be as per AMTRAK Standards.

H. Rochester Gas & Electric’s neutral shall be grounded as per code on the line side of the service equipment.

I. Each transformer shall have its secondary neutral grounded for a separately grounded system. (For transformers on the load side of the service).

J. Exposed non‐current carrying metal parts and cord and plug connected electric equipment, as well as some electric equipment (track of electrically operated cranes, frames of non‐electric elevators, metal partitions, etc), that might accidentally become energized shall be grounded through an equipment grounding conductor.

K. Computer room grounding shall be as per Amtrak, TIA/EIA and IEEE standards.

L. Ground fault protection shall also be installed downstream breakers of the main disconnect to prevent a ground fault on any one feeder from interrupting power to all feeders.

M. All panels, motors, starters, the metal hung ceiling system, and other permanently mounted electrical equipment shall be permanently and effectively grounded.

N. Furnish and install bonding jumpers in all boxes and enclosures.

O. After installation, the grounding system shall be tested. All related tests and measurements should be performed by the Design‐Builder in the presence of the Engineer.



13.6.8 Heat Tracing

A. The temporary station trailers shall have all exposed plumbing piping subject to freezing heat traced with a minimum of 8 watts per linear foot along all exposed piping.

B. The DB Contractor shall perform calculations to ensure the necessary amount of circuits are provided. The design shall be coordinated directly with the plumbing contractor.

C. The DB Contractor shall provide a heat trace control panel, heat trace wiring and necessary

appurtenances in order to make a complete operational system.

13.7 Generator

A. Furnish and install a generator in an exterior location along an exterior wall. The generator shall use fuel oil and shall have independent fuel supply and exhaust systems as well as its own HVAC systems for the room and for the engines. The engine shall be radiator cooled. The installations shall meet all the Code requirements and manufacturer’s installation recommendations;

B. The generator shall meet all EPA Tier emission requirements for the rated size of the electrical output of the engine generator as classified in the state environmental regulations for air pollution.

C. The whole system (the engine, generator and all other major auxiliary equipment) shall be built, tested and shipped by the same manufacturer;

D. Furnish and install a day tank with rupture basin.

E. The system shall include all necessary accessories including a silencer, overcurrent protection, exhaust system, over‐voltage protection, detailed instrumentation panel (voltage, ampere, kW and run time electronic recording meters), battery and battery chargers, local and remote annunciator, keep‐warm system, and fuel pumps;

F. The remote annunciator shall be installed within the station. The DB Contractor shall coordinate with Amtrak for the proper location.

G. The generator shall have the ability of being exercised (manual/automatic) on a regular basis.

H. All accessories for the generator that require power (fuel pumps, heaters, and other equipment) shall be fed from the generator;

I. The parameters of the complete integrated engine‐generator system (consisting of the engine‐generator set(s), automatic transfer switch(es), switchboards, uninterruptible power supplies, and all appurtenances (fuel pumps, heaters, damper motors, et al)) shall be monitored by the BMS. The monitored parameters shall include, but not be limited to:

1. System and appurtenances electrical and mechanical parameters;



2. System and appurtenances fluids (fuel, oil, coolant, antifreeze, et al) parameters (pressures, levels, temperatures, et al);

3. Operational records (event history, run times and durations, system warnings and shutdowns, et al);

4. Time delays;

5. System and appurtenances parameters (including serial and model numbers);

6. System and appurtenances diagnostics;

7. System and appurtenances warnings;

8. NFPA 110 Alarms;

9. Digital inputs;

10. Switchgear inputs;

11. Digital outputs;

12. User‐defined faults and status indicators (refer to the I&C and Communications OPRs)

13. Any other system parameters as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

J. A power failure shall start the generator automatically.

K. The generator shall be sized based on 100% of the total sum of items 1) through 7) below, plus 20% spare of this sum. If the calculated value is not a standard frame size, the next higher standard generator frame size shall be furnished and installed:

1. 100% of whichever is greater: the heating system plus the ventilation system, or the cooling system plus the ventilation system. Include all appurtenances for each system in the determination.

2. 100% of the nameplate rating of the fire water pump and associated equipment.

3. 100% of the rated connected fluorescent lighting load

4. 120% of the rated connected HID and LED lighting load.

5. 140% of the nameplate ratings of all UPSs.

6. All general convenience duplex receptacles as per the NEC.

7. 4W/ft2 for all remaining loads.

L. The nameplate (input) power ratings, not BHPs, of all load motors shall be used in determining the rating of the generator.

13.7.2 Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

A. The generator shall be connected to the distribution system via an automatic transfer and bypass isolation switch, ASCO 7000 Series with Group 5 control panel (or approved equal)



and all required accessories. The Design Professional shall determine the actual number of bypass‐isolation ATSs required;

B. The power supply to the Fire Alarm Panel shall be made as per the requirements of the City of Rochester Fire Department. A fuse‐cutout box shall be installed after the ATS, which will be installed between Rochester Gas & Electric power and the generator. Power will be tapped from the line side of the main breaker. An additional 30‐amp spare fuse‐cutout box shall be installed for future use. The entire installation shall be approved by the City of Rochester Fire Department and written approval shall be submitted to the Department Additional auxiliary contacts shall be furnished and installed in the ATS for monitoring the switch position and/or power failure as required by Section 14 Communications.

C. All Automatic Transfer Switches shall be equipped with accessories to detect fault conditions (short‐circuit, ground‐fault, and/or other faults) downstream, and shall prevent the transfer from Rochester Gas & Electric to the Generator in that situation.

D. The ATS enclosure shall be furnished and installed with an integral generator‐side circuit breaker of the required AIC with ground‐fault protection relay.

E. The Automatic Transfer Switch(es) shall be installed in the Emergency Power Supply System (Generator) Room.

13.7.3 Power to the following shall be fed through UPSs

A. BMS;

B. Generator control panel;

C. Equipment included in section 6.10;

D. Egress lighting;

E. All circuits required for telecommunications equipment.

13.8 Lighting

The Design Builder (DB) must adhere to the following criteria encompassing the work required to design, furnish, and install complete and operational lighting systems for the Rochester Intermodal Transportation Center (RITC) Project. The DB shall conduct all work necessary to provide all lighting related systems located inside the project limits. This includes all work related to the exterior site areas (parking lots, roadways, intersections, crosswalks, walkways/sidewalks, bus drop offs, security, building façade, train platform, plaza, etc.) and the entire interior of the train facility. The DB shall also provide all lighting associated with temporary works for usage of the train facility and its amenities throughout the entire construction of the new facility.

A. General Requirements a. Features included under this requirement include new Light Emitting Diode (LED)

interior and exterior luminaires, poles, mounting equipment, procurement, containment, installation, programming, focusing, commissioning, and any record



information necessary for delivering a complete and functional system. The DB shall coordinate all aspects of the lighting (functional and accent) for all project requirements and for all applicable governing standards.

b. The DB shall employ a professional lighting designer with a minimum of 2 (TWO) successful train facility lighting project experiences and a minimum of 10 (TEN) years of experience in interior and exterior lighting design. Said individual or firm shall also employ a lighting designer / lighting engineer who is lighting certified (LC) and who is a current member of the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES), with a minimum of 5 (FIVE) years of site and interior lighting design experience. These skills are to be used together to provide a unified visual concept combining the aesthetics and technical requirements of the project, along with electrical and structural engineering.

c. The DB shall coordinate with Amtrak and NYSDOT and their affected agencies to ensure the appropriate design methods, procedures, submittals, plan preparation, analysis, review and comment processes, approval procedures, specifications, and construction requirements are met.

d. The DB shall prepare the necessary aesthetics, designs, and engineering studies, as well as applicable design reports to describe and justify all lighting components to be incorporated into the Project

e. Lighting shall be designed to satisfy security requirements and to provide a pleasant

and bright environment. Lighting shall be provided such that all areas throughout the facility are illuminated. The lighting shall be designed to be functional, yet complementary to those other aesthetic features in the space that provide an atmosphere of relative comfort, pleasantness and cleanliness of surroundings, and a sense of personal safety and security. Style of fixtures shall complement the overall architectural design of the station and platform. The DB lighting designer shall coordinate all aesthetic designs with the Architect.

f. The lighting system shall be designed to be relatively simple and minimize initial capital cost, as well as frequency and expense of maintenance.

g. Lighting shall permit safe use of the facility on a 24 hour per day, 365 day per year basis.

h. Adequate lighting levels, uniformity ratios, contrast, and other visibility attributes necessary to stimulate productivity, facilitate the use of facilities by patrons or the completion of tasks in a timely yet safe manner, and maintain the appropriate surveillance levels under all ambient lighting conditions shall be provided. Tables E‐1, E‐2, and E‐3 of this document categorize by Room/Area/Locations for required



lighting levels. Lighting shall meet or exceed recommendations in this guide in accordance with all applicable IESNA Recommended Practices.

i. The lighting system shall be energy efficient and comply with the Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State, all IESNA Recommended Practices, ASHRAE and ANSI standards.

j. Lighting fixture locations shall permit easy accessibility for repair, maintenance, and periodic cleaning

k. Any required illumination shall be arranged and wired so that the failure of any single lighting unit or circuit shall not leave the area in total darkness.

l. Lighting shall be designed to avoid “spill” light, objectionable glare, and light trespass in accordance with IESNA Recommended Practices.

m. Lighting designs shall effectively control glare or other extraneous reflections in the visual field.

n. Lighting fixtures shall be vandal resistant in spaces where the fixtures are easily accessible to patrons or the general public.

o. The DB shall provide lighting materials that: i. Are new at the time of installation ii. Meet all visual and aesthetic goals of the project iii. Are long life and energy efficient iv. Are compatible with the electrical characteristics (voltage, phases, wires) of

the power supply available. v. Are easily maintained by the in‐house personnel using current equipment.

p. At a minimum, the drawings and specifications shall cover the following lighting

aspects: i. Interior Lighting Location plans ii. Exterior Lighting Location plans iii. Luminaire location callouts iv. Interior luminaire Mounting Details v. Exterior Luminaire Mounting Details vi. Luminaire Specifications and Technical Data vii. Pole Specifications and Technical Data

B. Codes and Standards

The following codes and standards shall be used in addition to the electrical codes and standards listed in section 13.1 of this document.



a. New York State Building Code 2010

b. Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State

c. Amtrak Station Program and Planning – Standards and Guidelines, Version 2.2

d. Amtrak Engineering Stations Standard Design Practices (SDP)

e. Amtrak Police Department Corporate Security Guidance, Practices and Recommendations 2011

f. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) Publications:

i. HB‐10 IESNA The Lighting Handbook

ii. RP‐1 Practice for Office Lighting

iii. RP‐8 Practice for Roadway Lighting

iv. RP‐16 Nomenclature and Definitions

v. RP‐20 Lighting for Parking Facilities

vi. RP‐33 Lighting for Exterior Environments

vii. DG‐5 Lighting for Walkways and Class 1 Bikeways

viii. LM‐79 Photometric Measurements of Solid State Lighting Products

ix. LM‐80 Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Sources

x. TM‐10 Obtrusive Light

xi. TM‐11 Light Trespass

xii. TM‐15 Lighting Classification System, with Addendum A (BUG Ratings)

xiii. G‐1 Guideline on Security Lighting for Public Spaces

g. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Publications

i. 1598 Standard for Luminaires

ii. 773 Plug‐in Locking Type Photocontrols for use with Area Lighting

h. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air‐Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)

i. Energy Standard for Buildings; Standard 90.1‐2010 with all applicable addenda

i. ASTM International (ASTM)

i. A123/A123M Specification for Zinc (Hot‐Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ii. A167 Specification for Stainless and Heat‐Resisting Chromium‐ Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip



iii. A3661/A366M Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold‐Rolled, Commercial Quality

C. Quality of Illumination

1. Lighting designs shall be free from distracting and uncomfortable glare; care shall be exercised to prevent specular reflection on signage, direct glare from exposed lamps, high brightness areas of individual fixtures and reflections in glazing or other specular surfaces.

2. Lighting design shall promote safety, security and well being.

3. The lighting source shall utilize energy efficient, long life, and low maintenance Light Emitting Diode (LED) lighting technologies. The LED’s shall be of the latest technology and of the highest quality. The LED luminaires shall be of a constant lumen output and color temperature.

4. In order to address the most up to date lighting technologies, the DB Entity shall present to Amtrak the proposed lighting scheme utilizing LED luminaires. This shall include:

a. Interior luminaires with a minimum of 50,000 hours of maintenance free operation attaining 70% of the initial lumen output (L70).

b. Exterior luminaires with a minimum of 70,000 hours of maintenance free operation attaining 70% of the initial lumen output (L70)

c. Documentation illustrating the LED luminaires have been tested in accordance with IES‐LM‐79 and IES‐LM‐80

d. LED lifespan data analysis, specific to the led junction temperature during the lifespan test period

5. Uniformity ratios shall not exceed the recommended levels as directed by this document and IESNA.

6. Interior correlated color temperature (CCT) of the light sources shall be between 3000 and 3500 Kelvin (K) with a color rendering index (CRI) minimum of 80.

7. Exterior correlated color temperature (CCT) of the light sources shall be between 4000 and 4500 Kelvin (K) with a color rendering index (CRI) minimum of 70.

8. Lamps of the same type within each area of illumination shall have the same color temperature. In areas where different types of light fixtures are required, the color temperature of each type shall be matched as close as practicable to ensure uniformity of color.

9. Special care shall be taken to avoid objectionable glare to streets, tracks and adjacent properties. Light fixtures shall be positioned to minimize spill light. Light fixtures shall be provided with optics to prevent spill light and glare in the direction of adjacent properties. Furnish and install lighting fixtures specifically designed for rooms with video display terminals (VDTs) to reduce glare on the VDT screens.



10. All exterior luminaires shall have U0 BUG rating optics to minimize night sky light pollution and be “Dark Sky” compliant.

11. All security lighting shall meet the requirements of the Amtrak Police Department Corporate Security Guidance, Practices and Recommendations 2011.

D. Quality of Materials

a. The luminaires for the project shall be constructed of the highest quality materials and designed to provide a minimum of 20 years of operation.

b. Manufacturers of lighting fixtures, poles, and accessories shall have a minimum of 10 years of reputable performance in the industry.

c. All luminaires shall be designed to allow heat dissipation through the fixtures housing and away from the LED’s, effectively keeping the LED light engines below the LED manufacturer’s recommended maximum operation temperature for extended life and minimal LED failures.

d. All exterior luminaires, along with those interior luminaires that require an occasional wash down or will be accessible to water, shall be UL Listed for Wet Locations and for Direct Spray.

e. No interior luminaires shall be constructed using a fiberglass or polymer housing. All luminaires shall be cast, extruded, or rigidly formed aluminum with stainless steel hardware.

f. All poles shall be galvanized round tapered steel constructed; base plate welds to the bottom of the pole shall be continuous around both the outside and inside diameters. All the poles shall include a grounding lug positioned in the pole opposite the reinforced hand hole. Additionally, all poles greater than 30 feet in height shall incorporate an internal vibration dampener to minimize vibration during steady winds or structural vibrations. All pole hardware shall be stainless steel.

g. All exterior pole mounted luminaires shall withstand a minimum 3G vibration, as defined in ANSI 136.31.

h. All steel poles, bases, arms, and miscellaneous mounting brackets shall be hot‐dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 / A123M ‐ 12 standards. All steel shall be completely hot‐dipped galvanized after fabrication. Any holes that are required for mounting of accessories on the pole must be made during the manufacturing process and before any galvanizing or surface finishing is performed.

i. All lighting poles on the project shall be designed to meet AASHTO LTS with the maximum weight and EPA of the luminaires, arms, ITS equipment, cameras, other luminaires, signs, or any other accessories deemed necessary to be mounted to the



poles included in the calculations. Pole shop drawings must be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer.

j. All materials must be corrosion‐resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Each component shall be formed or supported to prevent warping and sagging.

k. Enclosures shall be rigidly formed or cast, weather tight (if exterior grade) that will not warp, sag, or deform in use.

l. Enclosures shall be smooth operating and free of light leakage under operating conditions.

m. Exterior site area and roadway luminaires shall be designed to prevent doors, frames, lens, and other components from falling accidentally during maintenance and when secured in operating position. These luminaires shall also have a driver that can be accessed easily without the use of tools.

n. All exterior grade fixture hardware shall be stainless steel.

o. All exterior luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations and a minimum of IP65 rated.

p. All finish colors for poles, arms, brackets, and luminaires shall be coordinated with the Architect.

q. Luminaire Manufacturer submittals shall include at a minimum the following information:

i. Product Data; description, materials, dimensions, weights, effective projected area (EPA)

ii. Electrical data; LED drivers, Printed Circuit Boards, LED Chips, LED Modules, wiring diagrams

iii. Catalogue cuts and manufacturer drawings iv. Operation and Maintenance Data v. UL Documentation vi. Independently tested photometric data vii. Computerized printout of calculations viii. Written Warranties ix. Product Samples, as deemed necessary by the engineer

r. Pole Manufacturer submittals shall include at a minimum the following information:

i. Product Data; description, materials, dimensions, weights, effective

projected area (EPA) ii. Catalogue cuts and manufacturer drawings



iii. Written Warranties iv. Product Samples, as deemed necessary by the engineer v. Signed and Stamped Product Certificates vi. Design calculations certified by a Professional Engineer (PE)

E. Lighting Calculations

a. DB Contractor shall design and calculate all lighting levels within the entire project limits. IES standards shall be used on the method to calculate illumination levels unless otherwise noted elsewhere in this document.

b. The DB shall obtain Amtrak’s consent on the use of software programs and techniques. The use of proven and commonly available software familiar to Amtrak is encouraged. For lighting calculations the DB is required to utilize Lighting Analysts AGI32 or Radiance lighting analysis and simulation software for full detailed reports to demonstrate compliance with reference standards utilizing IES format files, along with reflectances. Compliance calculations and checks are required. The DB shall detail each geometric design condition for exterior and interior lighting, along with clearly outlining the design criteria used. These different analysis components shall demonstrate compliance with relevant standards or references. These shall be demonstrated through graphical output, which also includes numerical summaries for the analysis grid areas.

c. For both interior and exterior calculations the light loss factors (LLFs) shall be calculated based on the environmental conditions of the respective area and on the specific characteristics of each component of the lighting system (lamps, ballasts, lighting fixtures) including voltage drop, luminaire reflectance and transmittance changes, lamp outages, lamp lumen depreciation, luminaire dirt depreciation, and lamp mortality rates. The maintenance and parking areas of the facility are especially dirty due to exhaust fumes, grease and other pollutants. Therefore, all LLFs must be carefully determined in order to achieve the minimum required maintained footcandle levels.

d. Submit a detailed list of all LLFs and provide justification for the determination of each variable.

e. The required maintained illumination levels are listed in Table E‐1, E‐2, and E‐3. The illumination levels shall be measured in accordance to all applicable IESNA and project standards and guidelines.

F. Temporary Lighting

a. Lighting requirements for both exterior and interior rooms and areas are listed in Table E‐3 located in this section.

b. Provide for sufficient quality illumination for orderly and predictable movement for all the operations of facility.



c. The DB shall develop temporary lighting plans that include interior and exterior lighting, meeting or exceeding all applicable codes and standards listed in this section.

d. Fluorescent luminaires shall be limited to 2 foot and 4 foot linear T‐8 or T‐5 fluorescent lamp light sources with a 3500K CCT and program start electronic ballasts, and Compact Fluorescents (CFL) with a 3500K CCT.

e. Exterior luminaire shall be of a High Pressure Sodium (HPS), Metal Halide (MH), Amalgam (Cold Weather) Compact Fluorescent light sources.

f. Exterior wall packs should be utilized for ramps and stairs located near the temporary structure.

g. No incandescent lamps should be used.

G. Interior Lighting a. The illumination levels for various areas shall be provided as shown in Table E‐1. The

HB‐10 reference shall be used for areas that may not be included in the table.

b. The interior lighting shall comprise a variety of LED luminaires, including but not limited to: Wall Washers, Linear, 4‐6 inch Round Recessed, 2x2 recessed troffers, 2x4 recessed troffers, soffit/cove.

c. Interior lighting design should incorporate indirect lighting where appropriate.

d. Interior lighting design should incorporate lighting of walls and other vertical surfaces where appropriate.

e. Special fixtures like pendants, under cabinet and focused spots should be used for specific task related activities.

f. Direct view of the fixtures light source should be avoided whenever possible. This can be accomplished by the fixture design, lensing, and cove/soffit lighting.

H. Exterior Lighting a. Provide a uniform nighttime illumination on the circulation roadways to enable

motorists to quickly, distinctly and comfortably view the roadway alignment, vehicles, obstacles, or obstructions at extended distances ahead, even during inclement weather.

b. Lighting Poles for parking and roadway lighting shall be located inside of curbs, on traffic islands and walks, and along parking lot perimeter. Placement shall present a minimum obstruction to movement and parking of cars. Poles shall be protected from physical damage by the concrete pole foundation base which extends not less than 2’‐6” above grade and not more than 3’‐0”.

c. Lighting poles for any pedestrian scale luminaires shall be mounted with the base and cover sitting directly on a finished surface or if placed in a grassy area, with a 4” to 6” exposed foundation base.



d. Light Pole positioning shall be required to meet lighting uniformity ratios, be coordinated with the proposed landscaping scheme and prevent off‐property spill light.

e. Exterior Stairway and Ramp luminaires are dependent on the location. Either pole mounted or wall mounted luminaires shall be used, whichever is more appropriate.

f. Landscape lighting shall be complimentary and not overpower the architectural features of the train facility. Applicable references are HB‐10 and RP‐33. Modest lighting on tree canopies and shrubs shall be coordinated with the landscape architect. The LED lighting fixtures shall be selected from reputable landscape lighting manufacturers, only lighting fixtures intended for landscape lighting shall be used for landscape lighting. Special care shall be given as to not cause unintentional glare to drivers and pedestrians.

g. Public art installation lighting shall be coordinated with the artist and authority to ensure a pleasing illuminated sculpture. Applicable references are HB‐10 and RP‐33. Special care shall be given as to not cause unintentional glare to drivers and pedestrians.

I. Emergency Lighting and Exit Signs

1. Emergency lighting design shall conform to the NEC, CEC, NFPA 101, NFPA 130, IESNA Lighting Handbook, and the New York State Building Code.

2. Exit lighting fixtures and signs shall be provided to illuminate and mark the designated egress passageways, stairways, and the entrances and exits to stairways. Exit sign fixtures shall be wall or bracket mounted at a mounting height visible to all occupants within the occupied spaces. Exit lighting fixtures and signs shall be separately wired from other electrical loads (to the emergency panelboard) and shall be connected to the UPS system.

3. Emergency lighting for stairways and escalators shall be designed to emphasize illumination on the top and bottom steps or landings. All escalator steps newel and comb lighting shall be on emergency feeder circuits in accordance with NFPA 130.

4. Emergency lighting fixtures and exit lights and signs in underground occupancies shall be located so as to minimize the possibility of being obscured by stratified smoke in a fire.

5. Emergency lighting and exit signs shall be incorporated on the train platform, illuminating and marking safe passage to the emergency exit ways.

6. Exit signs shall be internally illuminated with a LED light source.

J. Lighting Control System

1. Control artificial lighting automatically where practical by selecting from among various lighting control devices. The most useful controls for increasing lighting energy‐efficiency are timers, dimmers, photocells, day‐light harvesters, and



occupancy sensors. Select control strategies based upon the following types of lighting situations.

2. Office lighting should be controls by wall switch occupancy sesors.

3. Exterior area and road lighting shall utilize a photocontrol and time clock switch system that automatically activates the luminaire before dusk and deactivates the luminaire past dawn.

4. Continuous Lighting is designed to continuously illuminate an area during a combination of hours of darkness and hours of operation. Examples of continuous lighting could be found at station stops, platforms, vehicle approaches, and parking lots. Suitable controls for continuous lighting are timers and photocells.

5. Standby Lighting is similar in design to continuous lighting, except not continuously operated. Standby lighting is turned on automatically when activity is detected in the area or manually as necessary to occupy a space. Standby lighting is suitable only for “instant on” lamps. Examples of standby lighting could be found in utility closets, offices, or restrooms. Suitable controls for standby lighting include discrete “on/off” switches, occupancy sensors, and dimmers.

TABLE E-1 INTERIOR ILLUMINATION LEVELS TABLE

Room #/Area

Room Name

Average Maintained Horz. (FC)

Horz. Location (FEET AFF)

Average to Minimum Ratio

(AVG:MIN)

Average Maintained Vert. (FC)

Vert. Location (FEET AFF)

Phase

1A Waiting 15 2.5 3:1 5 2.5 PH I

1B Waiting 15 2.5 3:1 5 2.5 PH I

1C Waiting 15 2.5 3:1 5 2.5 PH II

2 Queue 15 2.5 3:1 5 2.5 PH I

3 Ticketing 30 3.0 3:1 10 5.0 PH I

4 Vestibule 15 0.0 2:1 7.5 5.0 PH I

5 Baggage Work Rm

30 3.0 3:1 15 5.0 PH I

6 Baggage Claim

20 3.0 3:1 10 5.0 PH I

7 Baggage

Equipment 30 0.0 3:1 10 4.0 PH I

8 Retail 40 2.5 3:1 15 2.5 PH I



9 Retail 40 2.5 3:1 15 3 PH I

10 Staff 15 4.0 3:1 5 4.0 PH I

11 Bathroom 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5 PH I

12 Bathroom 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5 PH I

13 Office 30 2.5 1.5:1 15 3.5 PH I

14 Corridor 10 0.0 3:1 3 4.0 PH I

15 NOT USED

16 Bathroom 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5 PH I

17 Bathroom 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5 PH I

18 Bathroom 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5 PH I

19 NOT USED

20 Outdoor Storage

SEE TABLE E‐2

21 Outdoor Storage

SEE TABLE E‐2

22 NOT USED

23 NOT USED

24 NOT USED

25 NOT USED

26 NOT USED

27 Corridor 10 0.0 3:1 3 4.0 PH I

28 MRL Closet

Ctrl 30 0.0 3:1 30 5.0 PH I

29 Storage 10 0.0 2:1 3 4.0 PH I

30 Storage 10 0.0 2:1 3 4.0 PH I

31 PIDS Server 30 0.0 3:1 30 5.0 PH I

32 Revenue Server

30 0.0 3:1 30 5.0 PH I

33 Comm. 30 0.0 3:1 30 5.0 PH I

34 Electrical 30 0.0 3:1 30 5.0 PH I

35 NOT USED



36 Mechanical 30 0.0 3:1 30 5.0 PH I

37 NOT USED

38 Office 30 2.5 1.5:1 15 3.5 PH II

39 Office 30 2.5 1.5:1 15 3.5 PH II

40 Office 30 2.5 1.5:1 15 3.5 PH II

41 Office 30 2.5 1.5:1 15 3.5 PH II

42 Staff 15 4.0 3:1 5 4.0 PH II

43 Bathroom 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5 PH II

44 Dispatch 30 2.5 1.5:1 15 3.5 PH II

45 Ticketing 30 3.0 3:1 10 5.0 PH II

46 Baggage 20 3.0 3:1 10 5.0 PH II

47 Corridor 10 0.0 3:1 3 4.0 PH II

Elevator Interior

15 0.0 3:1 5 5.0 PH I

Escalators 15 0 2:1 7.5 5 PHI

Stairs and Ramps

15 0 2:1 7.5 5 PHI

ATM'S, PIDS, Phone,

Fountains

20 3 3:1 10 4 PH I

TABLE E-2 EXTERIOR ILLUMINATION LEVELS TABLE

Tag Number

Area Name

Minimum

Maintained Horz. (FC)

Average Maintained Horz. (FC)

Min. Maintained Vert. (FC)

Maximum to

Minimum Ratio (Max:Mi

n)

Average to

Minimum Ratio (Avg:Mi

n)

Veiling Luminance Ratio (Lmax:La

vg)

Phase

EL‐1 Parking Lots

0.5 0.25 15:1 PH I and PH II

EL‐2 Roadways 0.9 6:1 0.4 PH I and



PH II

EL‐3

Crosswalks and

Intersections

1.8 6:1 PH I and PH II

EL‐4 Plaza 1 3 0.5 PH I and PH II

EL‐5 Baggage Canopy

1 3 0.5 PH I and PH II

EL‐6A Platform (Covered)

5 10 2:1 PH I and PH II

EL‐6B Platform (Open)


EL‐7 Platform at Edge


EL‐8 Pedestrian Tunnel

3 15* 2:1 PH I and PH II

EL‐9 Building Façade

3‐5 PH I and PH II

EL‐10 Bus Drop Off (Open)

0.8 0.4 3:1 PH I and PH II

‐ Stairs and Ramps


‐ Sidewalks 1 4:1 PH I and PH II

Room 20 ‐ 21

Outdoor Storage

1 3 0.5 PH I and PH II



* measured at 5’-0” AFF.

TABLE E-3 TEMPORARY STATION ILLUMINATION LEVELS TABLE

Room #/Area Average

Maintained Horz. (FC)

Horz. Location (FEET AFF)

Average to Minimum Ratio

(AVG:MIN)

Average Maintained Vert. (FC)

Vert. Location (FEET AFF)

1A 15 2.5 3:1 5 2.5

1B 15 2.5 3:1 5 2.5

2 15 2.5 3:1 5 2.5

3 15 4.0 3:1 5 4.0

4 20 3.0 3:1 10 5.0

5 30 3.0 3:1 10 5.0

6 30 2.5 1.5:1 15 3.5

7 10 0.0 2:1 3 4.0

8 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5

9 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5

10 15 3.5 2:1 5 3.5

11 10 0.0 2:1 3 4.0

EXTERIOR STAIRS, RAMPS

10 0 2:1 2.5 5

13.9 Receptacles

A. Receptacles shall be fed from receptacles panels only. Alternate the circuits and phases between adjacent receptacles.

B. Unless otherwise noted, furnish and install at least one receptacle in each room or area in the Station. However, there shall be no receptacles in the shower areas and the Hazardous Material (Hazmat) Storage Room. Actual quantities and types of receptacles shall be as per the following sections.

C. On each receptacle’s faceplate, furnish and install labeling indicating the panelboard name and circuit number.



D. Explosion proof receptacles shall not be fed from the same circuits feeding nonexplosion proof receptacles.

E. Provide electrical floor boxes with integrated receptacles where indicated on the plan. Coordinate location of floor boxes with layout of seating.

F. Unless otherwise noted, for all other receptacles refer to the applicable section.

G. Receptacles for electrical equipment and appliances shall be furnished and installed throughout the Station per equipment requirements, as per the Comprehensive User’s Requirements and as noted in the following sections.

H. Independent outlet boxes shall be used for different types of receptacles, such as convenience, isolated ground, GFCI and all other receptacles.

I. Each receptacle’s pin configuration shall match that of the connected equipment’s plug.

J. Receptacle spacing indicated in the following sections, is between the centers of the receptacles.

K. Installation:

1. In general, the receptacle type shall be suitable for the type of area in which it is to be furnished and installed, e.g. explosion‐proof in classified areas, weatherproof and corrosion resistant in wet or harsh/corrosive atmosphere locations.

2. Coordinate receptacle locations with cubicle, equipment and furniture layouts. Relocate receptacles where furniture and other equipment interfere with receptacle access, but do not exceed the maximum spacing requirements.

3. Install the receptacles so that they do not interfere with the opening/closing of the gates, grilles, doors, windows, and other barriers.

4. Branch circuits for receptacles installed inside Communications cabinets (including but not limited to file server and data cabinets) shall be run above each cabinet on a cable ladder and then down into the cabinet using flex conduit.

13.9.2 General Purpose Duplex Convenience Receptacles

A. Unless otherwise noted below, furnish and install one 20A, 125VAC general purpose duplex convenience receptacle every 10’ on walls or fence posts in each area and room throughout the Station except for the wet areas, corrosive atmosphere areas, hazardous areas, and the maintenance areas (refer to the following sections for the specific requirements for those areas). Where the room or area perimeter is less than 10’, there shall be one 20A general purpose duplex convenience receptacle installed there (or as required in the following sections).

B. General Purpose convenience duplex receptacles shall be installed in addition to any other receptacles required in this OPR (such as IG, quad, reel or power receptacles) and as shown on the Conceptual Drawings. Furnish and install additional dedicated receptacles for Owner‐



furnished/Design‐Builder‐installed equipment (refer to Appendix A for more information) and for Design‐Builder‐furnished/Design‐Builder‐installed equipment.

C. Where receptacles are to be mounted a certain distance apart on the walls, the following shall apply:

1. All entrances, open or barriered, shall be counted as part of the walls.

2. Barriers include but are not limited to doors, fences, grilles and gates.

3. Where the space’s or room’s enclosure consists of a fence (wholly or in part), install the receptacles on the fence posts.

4. Adjust the spacing and number of receptacles if necessary so that the receptacle spacing does not exceed the maximum requirement.

D. Where the spacing criteria causes a receptacle to fall at an entrance to the space or room, install the receptacle adjacent to the entrance on the nearest wall or fence post.

E. Space receptacles evenly apart unless otherwise required by equipment or room restrictions.

F. Where a space’s or room’s perimeter falls between integer multiples of the required receptacle spacing, the number of receptacles to be furnished and installed shall be as per the next higher integer multiple. In no case shall receptacles be spaced at more than the maximum distance indicated or noted. For example, a four‐wall room that has a perimeter of 12’ and has a maximum receptacle spacing requirement of 10’ has a perimeter‐to‐spacing ratio of 1.2, and the next higher integer is 2, so therefore the room shall have 2 receptacles in it.

G. Furnish and install general purpose convenience duplex receptacles in the following areas as noted:

1. Every 6’ on centers in the following areas:

2. Every 20’ in the following areas:

3. One in each of the following areas:

13.9.3 Power Receptacles

A. Furnish and install the following types of mechanically‐interlocked power receptacles as indicated, in addition to the other required types of receptacles. Refer to the Conceptual Drawings for information regarding the power receptacles. Refer to the Equipment List in Appendix A for the quantities of the equipment. There shall be only one interlocked power receptacle per circuit for the following:

1. Isolated Ground (IG) and Quadplex Receptacles:

a. IG receptacles shall be furnished and installed as follows: o Furnish and install IG receptacles panels for all computer workstations, file

servers and computer data racks, and feed each from a dedicated isolation



transformer and a dedicated UPS. The power feeds to computer and other electronics equipment shall meet current industry standards.

o All IG receptacles shall be UPS‐conditioned receptacles, hospital‐grade, and colored orange, and duplex (unless otherwise noted).

o Neutrals for all IG receptacles, isolation transformers, IG receptacles panelboards, subdistribution‐boards, distribution boards and associated disconnect switches shall be rated at 200% of the circuit breaker ampacity and higher if required to compensate for voltage drop.

o IG receptacles shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s directions. Furnish and install an isolated ground wire and a common building ground wire to each isolated ground receptacle.

o IG receptacles shall be mounted 4’ high on the shop area wall, at desk height in the offices, and shall be located adjacent to the computer data outlets.

o For each IG receptacle furnished and installed, also furnish and install one dedicated 20A specification grade non‐IG general purpose quadplex receptacle not farther than one foot (1’‐0”) from the IG receptacle.

b. Furnish and install the following dedicated, 20A, 125VAC IG receptacles as indicated below in addition to the required general purpose duplex receptacles. Refer to Section 14 Communications Requirements, Communications Specifications and Communications Conceptual Drawings for more details:

o Furnish and install one IG duplex receptacle for each computer, VDT and CCTV monitor, and as per the Communications OPR requirements.

o Main Communications Room:

o Dedicated duplex IG receptacles:

1) One, for the security equipment.

2) One, below each telephone terminal board (TTB).

o Quadplex IG receptacles, each on a dedicated 20A lockable circuit breaker:

1) One, for the Telephone Switch.

2) Two, for the paging system.

3) Two, for the CCTV cabinets.

o Dedicated IG Data Cabinet receptacles. Install on the inside bottom of each cabinet (To Be Further Developed):

1) Data Cabinet #01 (Cables): One quadplex NEMA 5‐20R.

2) Data Cabinet #02 (Data Equipment):

a) Two duplex NEMA 5‐20R

b) Two NEMA L6‐20R twistlock



o One dedicated quadplex IG receptacle per each piece of wall mounted telephone equipment along the walls near the equipment and at each desk.

o Communications Closets:

1) One dedicated duplex IG receptacles, below each telephone terminal board (TTB).

2) One dedicated quadplex IG receptacle per each piece of wall mounted telephone equipment along the walls near the equipment and at each desk.

3) Dedicated IG Data Cabinet receptacles. Install on the inside bottom of each cabinet:

4) Three quadplex IG receptacles on dedicated lockable 20A circuit breakers.

o One duplex IG receptacle plus one quadplex non‐IG receptacle for each data outlet (data drop). Refer to the Communications OPR for information regarding the data outlets.

o Property Protection Booths/Guard Booths (PPBs): One dedicated IG duplex receptacle for each piece of Communications and security equipment that is not hardwired, and as per Communications OPR requirements.

o One dedicated duplex IG receptacle at each "KRONOS", timekeeping unit and punch clock location. Refer to Section 14 Communication Requirements for the Kronos locations.

o Telco Room:

1) Two dedicated IG receptacles for each data cabinet, mounted 84” AFF on the wall behind each cabinet:

• One 250VAC, 30A single.

• One 125VAC, 20A quadplex.


3) For the Telco’s multiplexer equipment furnish and install: two NEMA L5‐20R, 125VAC receptacles, each connected to a 20A dedicated breaker; and two NEMA L6‐30R, 250VAC receptacles, each connected to a dedicated 30A two‐pole breaker. These receptacles shall be fed from the Main Communications Room panel fed via the UPS. These receptacles shall be mounted near each cabinet.

B. 20A, 125VAC duplex GFCI receptacles:



1. Furnish and install GFCI receptacles as noted. Except in wet locations, the Elevator Machine Room and Elevator Pit, GFCI receptacles are in addition to the other types of receptacles required by Section 14 and the Conceptual Drawings:

o At sinks in the toilets and washrooms:

a. One GFCI receptacle where there is only one sink;

b. One GFCI receptacle between each pair of sinks where there are two or more sinks, up to two receptacles.

o In all lunch rooms/areas, kitchens and at sinks and as otherwise noted.

o On maximum 6’ centers in the Destination Sign Room.

o On maximum 10’ centers in the following areas:

• Elevator Machine Room.

• Elevator pit.

• All areas classified as wet or harsh/corrosive atmosphere locations.

o In the Kitchen (Specific quantities TBD):

• Six 20A, 250V duplex GFCI receptacles with dedicated 20A, 208V circuit breakers.

• Ten 20A 125V duplex GFCI receptacles with dedicated 20A circuit breakers for two (2) commercial refrigerators, two slicers, two cash registers, two food warmers, and two steam tables. Locations are to be coordinated with the Architectural kitchen equipment layout.

o One within 1’ of each nonclassified‐area sump pit.

o For each water fountain and water cooler (exception: if the unit is hardwired, furnish and install a specification grade single receptacle fed from a GFCI circuit breaker in the panelboard).

o For roof mounted equipment: one dedicated GFCI receptacle per piece of equipment, mounted at the equipment location regardless of any other requirement for receptacles in any other discipline’s OPR.

o One, surface mounted on each outdoor highmast lighting pole base.

o As required by the Codes.

o Where a piece of equipment requires GFCI protection and a GFCI receptacle is not available in that voltage or current rating, furnish and install a dedicated heavy‐duty specification grade receptacle and dedicated GFCI circuit breaker of the required poles, voltage and ampere ratings for that



equipment. If a GFCI breaker is not available in that configuration, furnish and install a hardwired GFCI device near the receptacle.

C. Other Receptacles ‐ Furnish and install the following receptacles as indicated. All receptacles listed below shall be specification‐grade, rating as per equipment requirements:

D. Heat Tracing ‐ Furnish and install heat tracing/freeze protection on all water lines, drainage lines (including but not limited to those for heat recovery units), steam lines, hydraulic lines (including but not limited to bus washer soap detergent lines and those for elevators), and valves and/or traps, that are outside heated areas and within 10’ of the overhead roll‐up doors in all directions inside the Station. Also furnish and install heat tracing/freeze protection on all Generator Room sprinkler, hydraulic and other lines subject to freezing when the radiator grille is open.

E. UPS Systems:

1. Furnish and install UPS conditioned power. The UPSs shall be as manufactured by Powerware (or approved equal). Each UPS shall be limited to 50kVA. The UPSs shall also be sized with 30% spare capacity of the connected loads in kVA.

2. The UPSs shall also be fed from the generator.

3. Each emergency‐lighting UPS shall provide a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency lighting during a power outage.

4. All other UPSs shall provide a minimum of 30 minutes of power to the applicable equipment during a power outage.

5. Unless otherwise noted, furnish and install UPS‐backed power to all of the following equipment:

o Receptacles servicing the file server;

o Receptacles servicing data and communications racks;

o All computer workstations (isolated ground receptacles), including those near lifts in the maintenance areas;

o All access control equipment including file servers, client workstation, system controller and power supply panels;

o Trak system;

o Building Management System (BMS);

o All CCTV equipment including camera power supplies;

o Telecommunications equipment;

o Emergency HID lighting. The UPSs feeding the HID emergency lighting fixtures must be rated for reactive loads and shall be able to handle the harmonics created by the ballasts.

o Wireless access points.



6. Unless otherwise noted, furnish and install UPS‐backed power to all of the equipment in the following rooms, including receptacles and lighting:

o All computer and data rooms;

o All communications rooms;

o TELCO room;

o Server rooms;

o Communication closets.

7. An alarm system shall be incorporated in the UPS system and broadcast a visible alarm across all LAN screens in the Station, and shall sound a loud audible alarm at the server console, a 24‐hr manned position either in the maintenance office or at the guard shack console whenever the UPS system takes over from Rochester Gas & Electric power. The alarm message on the workstation screens shall indicate that power is down, and shall warn system administrators and users to log off and power down their systems. The broadcast shall include estimated time to shutdown.

8. The UPS system shall be network‐monitorable. The UPS shall be grounded as required by the manufacturer. The UPS shall be installed so as not to create electrical/electronic interference with the file server or any other equipment.

9. All central or rack‐mounted UPS devices shall include an SNMP network interface card and temperature alarm module, connected to the Local Area Network for remote management purposes.

F. Lightning Protection ‐ Furnish and Install lightning protection and surge arresters as per NFPA 780 including but not limited to the roof perimeter, highmast lighting poles, lowmast lighting poles, outdoor CCTV camera poles, and any metallic equipment mounted on the roof. Refer to the attached Specifications for more information.

G. Surge Protection for Communications Panelboards ‐ Surge protectors shall be installed at each communications equipment panelboard, MCG type “LS” series or approved equal. The surge protectors shall offer minimum three redundant protection paths per phase, solid copper bus bar construction, field replaceable modules with lifetime warranty, high headroom varistors with high‐speed thermal disconnect, EMI/RFI filtering, continuously monitored protection circuits, internal and external status indicators, minimum 14‐gauge steel NEMA 4 enclosure, and shall meet UL1449 and NEMA LS1.

H. Temporary Station:

1. Provide Temporary Utility Power

2. All details will be provided in future submission of this document.

3. Coordinate all requirements with Amtrak TBD

J. Other Requirements



1. Furnish and install power to all mechanical, communications and control equipment including but not limited to: VAV boxes, fire/smoke dampers, electric duct heaters, supply/exhaust fans, boilers, elevators, compressors.

2. Electric hook‐ups for portable equipment (e.g. portable welding machines, et al) shall be safe and meet Code.

A. Furnish and install all electrical items of work required for a complete, fully operational, energy efficient and low maintenance electrical system in Rochester Station. The design shall consider equipment life expectancy, energy costs, future expansion, maintainability, and maintenance costs.

B. All electrical equipment and materials furnished and installed under this Contract shall be compatible in all respects with the other equipment in the respective system.

C. The design shall meet or exceed all current industry standards and applicable codes. Electrical equipment (including elevators and escalators) attachments and supports shall be designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Building Code of New York State.

D. The room sizes for the EDR, Generator Room, Electrical closets, EPRs, and subdistribution rooms shown on the Conceptual Drawings are for guidance only. The Design Professional shall determine the actual room sizes and locations. Any changes to the room sizes must be justifiable and approved by the Department. Similarly, the ratings and sizes of the electrical equipment, if shown, are the minimum requirements; the actual ratings and sizes shall be determined by the Design Professional.

E. In the case of any conflict between the Specifications, Codes, Standards, Drawings, Comprehensive User’s Requirements and/or the Project Requirements for the same subject, the Design‐Builder shall comply with the most stringent requirement.

F. All Electrical equipment shall be of heavy‐duty industrial‐grade quality. Catalog cuts and samples of equipment (such as wires/cables, devices and fittings) shall be submitted to Amtrak for information. All electrical equipment shall be UL Listed.

G. All electrical equipment including but not limited to distribution equipment, conduit, wires/cables, fixtures, panels, and receptacles shall be furnished and installed with permanent nameplates or tags that shall identify the equipment, voltage, circuit number, source, phase orientation, and destination of power flow as applicable.

H. For any repetitive type of installation such as lighting fixtures, receptacles and reel receptacles, a sample mock‐up shall be installed for review and approval by the Department.

I. Design for the Environment where required by law. Follow ASHRAE requirements.

J. Provide tables and schedules listing the manufacturers, ratings and details of all overcurrent protective devices and electrical equipment (including but not limited to switchboards, panels, disconnects and transformers). Provide full‐size drawings showing the locations of all panels (distribution boards, subdistribution boards, panelboards (typical)) on each floor. Use Amtrak standard panel schedules and fill in all information.



K. All wires, cables, busses, lugs and electrical connections shall be copper. Lugs shall be suitable for copper cables only.

L. All electrical distribution equipment shall be fully rated for the available short circuit current. Series rated equipment and systems are not acceptable.

M. The Contract documents detail the minimum requirements for equipment, material and installation procedures. All equipment and material that is furnished and installed, and all installation procedures, must meet or exceed these minimum requirements.

N. There shall not be any plumbing (water, sewer, or drain), gas, sprinkler, steam or hydraulic lines passing through any electrical or Communications equipment rooms. In all other locations, a minimum of 12” separation in all directions shall be maintained between electrical raceway and plumbing, steam, hydraulic, and other lines and their appurtenances.

O. All Amtrak Standard Drawings included in the RFP documents shall be part of the design package.

P. Upon completion of equipment installation, the Design‐Builder shall fill in and waterproof all openings in an approved manner. All waterproofing shall be maintained when penetrating exterior walls, ceilings, roofs and slabs.

Q. UPS‐backed electrical panels in the Communications Rooms shall only feed the equipment inside the respective room. UPS backed panels feeding computer workstations outlets and other loads outside the communication rooms shall not be installed inside the communications rooms.

R. Power, lighting, and receptacle panels and disconnects shall not be installed in the same rooms as Communications panels, UPSs and transformers if they are not dedicated for the equipment in that room.

S. Coordinate the design with all other trades and also furnish and install power as required to all mechanical, architectural, instrumentation and controls, communications, and other equipment, including but not limited to electrically operated skylights, doors, gates, grilles, all cranes (including jib and monorail cranes). Provide General Arrangement drawings showing the coordination of all equipment.

T. Lighting, power and receptacle requirements for all prefabricated outdoor enclosures including the temporary trailer shall comply with the requirements set forth in the applicable sections of this Part 3 Project Requirements. Refer to the Architectural Specifications for more details.

U. Follow NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 408.3(E) for electrical equipment phase arrangement.

V. Electrical equipment requiring examination, adjustment, servicing or maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn qualified personnel of potential electric arc flash hazards in accordance with NEC Article 110.16.


A. For applicable codes and standards refer to the attached Specifications.



B. Symbols on drawings shall comply with current ANSI standards.

C. All installations that have to be approved by the Fire Department of the City of Rochester, including the power supply to the fire water pump and the fire alarm panel, shall comply with Fire Department requirements.

D. Calculations ‐ The Design‐Builder shall provide the following design calculations certified by a licensed Professional Engineer for Department records:

1. Load calculations ‐ The complete electrical system shall be sized for the connected load plus an additional 30% spare capacity. This includes but is not limited to all feeders, switchboards, distribution boards, subdistribution boards, panelboards, transformers, and uninterruptible power supplies.

2. Voltage Drop calculations:

a. The system working voltages shall satisfy ANSI C84.1.

b. The total voltage drop from the power source (main circuit breaker) to the utilization device shall not exceed 5% except as noted below in 3) and 4).

c. The total voltage drop in the main and sub feeders shall not exceed 3%.

d. The voltage drop in the branch circuit conductors shall not exceed 3%.

e. The motor feeder total voltage drop shall not exceed 4%. Fire water pump motor feeder voltage drop on inrush shall not exceed 15%.

f. The voltage drop on separately derived systems for sensitive electronic equipment such as computers shall not exceed the limits as per NEC Article 647.4D.

3. Short circuit current calculations ‐ The short circuit ratings of all the power distribution equipment shall be based on short circuit study calculations, with minimum ratings as per Section 13.6. The Design‐Builder shall obtain, in writing, the available short circuit current at the utility from Rochester Gas & Electric. Provide a detailed short circuit current calculation from Rochester Gas & Electric’s transformer vault to the final panelboard or disconnect switch on each bus and feeder on the one‐line diagram, taking into account all transformers, motors, feeder and branch circuit lengths.

E. Coordination study ‐ The over‐current protective devices shall be sized and set based on a coordination study developed at the design development phase. The study shall contain the fault and load current values listed at key points on the one‐line diagram to determine the necessary equipment fault ratings. Ground fault protection shall be furnished and installed on the main circuit breaker and on all feeder breakers. Zone selective interlocking shall be used to achieve the best possible coordination with the downstream breakers. Provide a coordination study showing that the primary‐side circuit breaker can handle the inrush current of any associated transformer(s). The design professional shall propose solutions to any problems and demonstrate that coordination can be achieved with the proposed devices.

F. Lighting calculations:



1. IES standards shall be used to calculate illumination levels unless otherwise noted elsewhere in this document.

2. Light‐loss‐factors (LLFs) shall be calculated based on the environmental conditions of the respective area and on the specific characteristics of each component of the lighting system (lamps, ballasts, lighting fixtures) including voltage drop, luminaire reflectance and transmittance changes, lamp outages, lamp lumen depreciation, luminaire dirt depreciation, and lamp mortality rates. The maintenance and parking areas of the facility are especially dirty due to exhaust fumes, grease and other pollutants. The metal halide lamp has a particularly severe lamp lumen depreciation curve that must also be factored into the calculations. Therefore, all LLFs must be carefully determined in order to achieve the minimum required maintained footcandle levels.

3. Coefficients of utilization (CUs) shall be determined based on the lighting fixture manufacturer’s photometric data, taking into account the Room and Ceiling Cavity Ratios, and room boundary reflectances.

4. Submit a detailed list of all LLFs and CUs and provide justification for the determination of each variable.

5. Luminaires shall be selected, located, and aimed so as to minimize objectionable glare and interference (calculate the Visual Comfort Probability of each area and conform to the latest IES Lighting Handbook). Furnish and install lighting fixtures specifically designed for rooms with video display terminals (VDTs) to reduce glare on the VDT screens.

6. The required average maintained illumination levels are listed in Table E‐1 and E‐2 along with the light sources. The illumination levels shall be measured in accordance to all applicable IESNA standards and guidelines.

G. Structural Design Calculations ‐ Furnish and install seismic restraints & vibration isolation for all supporting systems for electrical equipment, including but not limited to conduit racks and lighting fixtures.

13.3 Area Types

A. Classified (Hazardous) Areas ‐ The area classifications given here are the minimum requirements. The Design‐Builder shall make a comprehensive study of the entire Amtrak Station to identify all areas that are required to be classified and determine their classifications. The extent of classification shall be as per area classification drawings based on the comprehensive study. All classification drawings shall be certified by a licensed Professional Engineer and shall be submitted to the Department for information. Area classifications shall be based on the use of diesel fuel or as noted. The study shall include:

1. calculations to determine the actual extent of the classified areas; 2. explanation of NEC classifications; 3. fueling regulations and considerations; 4. design criteria for electrical systems in hazardous locations;



5. ventilation requirements; 6. temperature limits of diesel fuels before ignition/detonation; 7. references.

B. The study should comply with all applicable local and national codes. The following areas in Rochester Station shall be considered to be Class 1, Division 1, Group ‘D’ throughout the area regardless of height unless otherwise noted below:

1. All areas TBD.

2. Wherever possible, all electrical equipment shall be installed outside the classified areas except where required by the Codes or equipment restrictions. All feeder and branch circuit conduits shall be installed exposed.

3. Wet Areas ‐ (Wherever possible, except where required by the Codes or equipment restrictions, the electrical equipment shall be installed outside of the wet areas or at least out of the direct path of water.)

4. The following open areas plus the 25’ periphery around them:

o Outdoors, including under canopies and platforms; o Under skylights; o Any other areas required by the Codes. o Enclosed (the indicated area only): o Water meter room; o Sewer ejector pump room; o High‐pressure wash room; o Elevator pit; o Escalator pit; o Sump pits; o Restrooms, toilets and personnel wash areas; o Any other areas required by the Codes. o Harsh/corrosive atmosphere areas: o Battery charging room; o Boiler room; o Any other areas required by the Codes. o Wet and classified: o Pits

13.4 Maintenance requirements

A. Provide workspace around all electrical equipment as required by the National Electric Code.

B. All lighting fixtures shall be accessible with a stepladder (up to 10 feet) or a scissors‐lift (higher than 10 feet) for lamp replacement and other maintenance.

C. Free space on both sides of a panelboard shall be minimum 2’‐0”. Exception: if there is a minimum of 3’‐0” from the top of the panel to the ceiling, and if there is sufficient entrance



space at the top panel surface for conduit for spare breakers, then the minimum spacing may be 6” between panels.

D. Roll‐up doors shall be furnished and installed in the EDR of sufficient height and width to allow the installation and removal of equipment, and the use of man‐lifts in the room.

E. Furnish and install personnel access and exit doors as per Code requirements in all electrical equipment rooms.

F. The switchboards shall be installed in the center of the EDR, so they are accessible from the front, rear and the sides.

G. All equipment shall be installed to permit easy access for operation and maintenance.

H. There shall be no switchgear, transformers, panels or any other electrical distribution equipment in the communications rooms not dedicated for communications equipment.

13.5 Mounting of equipment

A. Mounting arrangement (general):

1. Unless otherwise noted, mount all electrical equipment as per applicable codes, manufacturer’s recommendations and the attached Specifications;

2. No equipment shall interfere with operation of the facility, especially the movement of the buses and personnel;

3. Maintain proper clearances around all equipment as required by code and maintenance considerations;

4. Furnish and install bollards to protect panelboards, transformers and other electrical distribution equipment exposed to vehicle travel;

5. Provide dedicated space for conduit runs at the ceiling, including minimum 15% space (of the width of the rack) for installing future additional conduit without obstructing access to existing conduit or other equipment. Ceiling conduit runs shall not cast shadows;

6. Furnish and install, from each of panels in the EDR, one 1” conduit, extended from the panel to the outside of the EDR. Cap and label the conduits.

7. Furnish and install seismic restraints and vibration isolation as per the Mechanical Engineering Specifications and as required by Codes.

B. Lighting Fixtures:

1. Mounting heights of fixtures in the maintenance areas shall be based on the Architectural drawings (installed above the required clearances shown on the drawings).

2. Lighting fixtures shall not be installed in classified areas unless they are suitable for use in Class 1, Division 1, Group D locations;



3. The bottoms of the lighting fixtures in the utility rooms and other areas with forklift access must clear whichever is greater:

4. 10’ AFF; or

5. The height of the door(s)

6. Do not install lighting fixtures above anything that would block the light from reaching the work plane. Relocate the fixtures if required, adding fixtures as necessary to maintain the required lighting levels;

7. The arrangement of lighting fixtures shall be coordinated with the layout of the areas/rooms in which they are installed.

C. Receptacles

1. Install the computer receptacles at desk height.

2. Mount all receptacles 18” AFF, unless otherwise detailed on the plan drawings.

D. Lighting Switches:

1. Install all lighting switches in the office area 48” above finished floor to the top of the operating handle.

2. Where there is a single door, install the lighting switches near the door strike plate. Where there is a double door, install the lighting switches on the end of the right‐hand‐side of the door swing.

E. Distribution and Panel Boards ‐ Install distribution and panel boards on channels.

F. Switchboards‐ Allocate floor space for future switchgear, minimum 25% or enough for one additional vertical section, whichever is greater. Also refer to the attached Specifications.

G. Transformers ‐ Install transformers on vibration isolators.

H. Generator(s) ‐ Install the generator(s) on vibration isolators. Also refer to the attached Specifications.

I. Rubber mats ‐ Furnish and install rubber mats in front of electrical equipment in each room containing electrical distribution equipment, including: EDR; EPRs; electrical closets; UPS room; ATS Room; and Generator Room.

J. Disconnect Switches ‐ Install disconnect switches on channels. The mounting height shall be 4’‐0” AFF to the bottom of the switch in Station garage areas, and 5’‐0” AFF in all other areas.

K. Owner‐furnished/ Design‐Builder‐installed equipment:

1. See Appendix A for power and voltage ratings (single or three phase), quantities and locations of owner furnished equipment. Furnish and install power, dedicated disconnects and/or receptacles for all such equipment.

2. The power requirements for all Owner‐furnished/Design‐Builder Installed equipment shown in Appendix A are over and above the receptacle requirements described in



Section 13.9. For all Owner‐furnished/Design‐Builder Installed equipment, furnish and install a dedicated receptacle (compatible with the plug on the equipment) in the respective area or room indicated in Appendix A, plus the receptacles required in Section 13.9.

3. Install a horsepower‐rated heavy‐duty disconnect switch for all motorized equipment near the equipment.

4. Feed all equipment to be hardwired via a horsepower‐rated heavy‐duty disconnect switch.

L. Existing Conditions ‐ To be coordinated

13.6 Electrical Service:

13.6.1 Utility

Furnish and install a 3‐phase, 4‐wire surge‐protected electrical service into the Station from the utility company (Rochester Gas & Electric). The preferred service voltage is 480/277V. The Design‐Builder shall construct, furnish, and install all required equipment as per Rochester Gas & Electric’s final service layout (ruling):

A. If the service layout calls for transformer vaults and network protector (NWP) compartments, the requirement could be:

1. Transformer Vaults, either:

• Below grade in the sidewalk and/or Amtrak property; or

• Above grade inside Amtrak property (with direct access to the outside).

2. Network Protector Compartments ‐ Above grade inside Amtrak property. Install the NWP compartments inside the Amtrak building per Rochester Gas & Electric requirements.

3. If the service layout calls for pad‐mounted transformers, the requirement would be:

• Pad Mounted Transformers ‐ Installed above grade on concrete pads inside Amtrak property. Furnish and install bollards and a fence to protect the equipment on the pad. There shall be direct, independent access to the transformers from the sidewalk.

• Or any other Rochester Gas & Electric requirement.

In any of the above cases, furnish and install property line boxes (PLBs) as per Rochester Gas & Electric requirements, and cables from the PLBs to the NWP compartments. The final location of the transformers, vaults and NWP compartments shall be based on Rochester Gas & Electric’s final service layout (ruling). The Design‐Builder shall coordinate the design and construction of the network protector rooms and transformer vaults or pads with Rochester Gas & Electric, and build as per Rochester Gas & Electric’s requirements. Crabs for



connecting Rochester Gas & Electric cables to AMTRAK cables shall be as approved by Rochester Gas & Electric.

4. Service Rating (Capacity)

a. The service shall be based on the total connected load plus a 30% (of connected load) spare capacity. The spare capacity shall be included in the sizing of the service/feeder breakers, distribution boards, subdistribution‐boards panelboards uninterruptible power supplies and other electrical equipment, Furnish and install 30% spare breakers in the switchboard distribution boards, subdistribution boards and panelboards.

b. The minimum number of service takeoffs shall be determined per the total connected load requirements plus a spare capacity of 30% of the total connected load. Each takeoff shall be limited to a maximum of 4000A regardless of the Rochester Gas & Electric supply voltage. If there are multiple takeoffs, then the takeoffs shall have equal Ampere ratings. Each takeoff shall include 30% spare capacity.

c. Rochester Gas & Electric approval for service equipment shall be obtained prior to installation. Coordination with Rochester Gas & Electric, furnishing and installing all required equipment as specified, and complete installation as per Rochester Gas & Electric standards shall be the responsibility of the Design‐Builder.

d. The Design‐Builder shall prepare and submit a load request letter (via email) for electrical service to the Department for signature and transmission to the electrical utility (Rochester Gas & Electric). A sample letter shall be furnished upon request. A load breakdown letter listing the connected and demand loads (winter and summer), must be furnished to Rochester Gas & Electric refer to Exhibit “A” for a blank form

e. Fuse cut outs shall be furnished and installed for the fire alarm systems and other stand alone panels and as required by the City of Rochester Fire Department in coordination with Communications Engineering Division. The fire alarm control panel shall monitor the indication of ATS power failure.

f. The service feeders shall be installed in ducts between the point of entry and the main switchboard or transformer vault(s), whichever is applicable. All electrical service work shall comply with all of Rochester Gas & Electric’s regulations. The installation of service equipment and the number of network protector rooms and transformer vaults shall be based on the approved final service layout and approved shop drawings.

g. Rochester Gas & Electric’s equipment (transformers, switchgear and network protectors) shall be brought to and installed in the electrical vault/network protector room (where applicable) by the Design‐Builder under Rochester Gas & Electric supervision.



h. There shall be no breaks in the service lateral or metering conduits unless approval is obtained in writing from Rochester Gas & Electric. Conduits and pull boxes are considered breaks in the conduit.

i. Furnish and install cable limiters as per Rochester Gas & Electric’s requirements where three or more sets of service cables are used between the PLB and the CT cabinets. The cable limiters shall be installed on both ends of the service cables.

13.6.2 Electrical Distribution Rooms, Electrical Panel Rooms and Electrical Closets

A. All electrical distribution equipment shall be installed inside dedicated electrical equipment rooms. Provide 25% spare wall space in the electrical distribution and panel rooms for future use. Provide electrical closets at various locations for distribution boards and panelboards.

B. Mechanical ventilation is required for all electrical equipment rooms. The preferred method of cooling/ventilating electrical equipment rooms is with ventilation/exhaust fans. Refer to the Mechanical OPR for temperature limits. If such temperature limits cannot be reached via fans, submit an alternate scheme for approval.

C. Provide equipment replacement clearances and removal routes in all electrical rooms.

13.6.3 Main Disconnect and Switchboard

A. The main disconnect will be a 100% rated draw‐out circuit breaker of the required overcurrent and short circuit interrupting ratings:

1. Main circuit breakers shall not work in conjunction with current limiters at available short circuit current levels up to and including 200kA;

2. For available short circuit current levels more than 200kA, circuit breakers with integral current limiters shall be accepted;

3. The main and switchboard distribution circuit breakers shall be electronic‐trip, with adjustments for long‐term, short‐term, instantaneous and ground fault conditions.

4. Furnish and install undervoltage relays with voltage and time settings on all main circuit breakers to trip the breakers in the event of an undervoltage condition.

B. Circuit breakers shall be installed for over‐current protection of all switchboards, distribution boards, subdistribution boards and panelboards. Branch circuit protection shall be by breakers only.

C. Each switchboard shall have the required number of spare feeder breakers, specifics TBD.

D. Coordinate all tripping curves (long term, short term, instantaneous, and ground fault) to the specific facility electrical conditions. Submit a detailed coordination study.

E. The switchboard busses shall be copper, and rated for and braced to withstand minimum 200,000A of available short circuit current (Rochester Gas & Electric short circuit plus



rotating or other equipment contribution), or more if determined by the short circuit current calculations required.

F. Circuit monitors: Square D CM4000T series (with remote monitoring capability) or approved equal shall be installed on the switchboard/main distribution board. A communications interface shall enable a PC to communicate remotely with a circuit monitor through the circuit monitor communications port: furnish and install the necessary phone, ethernet and data outlets in the vicinity of the switchboard. The circuit monitors shall be installed on the line sides of the main breakers on both the Rochester Gas & Electric and generator power supplies.

G. Building Management System (BMS)

1. The BMS shall monitor all line‐to‐line and line‐to‐neutral voltages (on the line side of the main disconnect, in order to monitor Rochester Gas & Electric power), line and neutral currents, kilowatts and kilowatt‐hours used, voltage frequency, and power factor at all switchboards.

2. The BMS shall record all of the required values with timestamps, and shall output the information in a format suitable for inclusion in a report. The BMS shall record any alarms with the time of occurrence. These alarms shall consist of voltages greater or less than 5% of the standard incoming Rochester Gas & Electric voltage. The BMS shall also record currents that exceed the transformer rating.

3. All monitored variables shall be made available to the BMS system through an industry standard communications protocol such as BACNET, MODBUS, or approved equal, along with any required hardware and/or software interface, such that it is compatible with the BMS system being furnished and installed.

4. Refer to Section 15, Instrumentation and Controls, for more details regarding the BMS.

13.6.4 Distribution System

A. Power Distribution ‐The power in the Amtrak Station shall be distributed preferably at 480/277V. In case power is obtained at a different voltage from Rochester Gas & Electric, the voltage shall be stepped up or down (as applicable) to 480/277V.

B. Furnish and install step‐down transformers of adequate capacity for all equipment requiring 220V three‐phase and single‐phase power supply. Refer to Appendix “A” for information.

C. Furnish and install step‐down transformers of adequate capacity for all equipment requiring 208/120V power supply including but not limited to:

1. Convenience receptacles;

2. Communications equipment;

3. Security equipment;

4. Clock and Kronos system;



5. Computer loads;

6. Any other equipment needing 208/120V power supply;

7. Fire detection system.

D. Short Circuit Current Ratings of Equipment ‐ The short circuit current ratings of all power distribution equipment shall be based on a short‐circuit current study prepared and furnished by the Design Professional. The available short circuit current at Rochester Gas & Electric shall be obtained in writing from the Electric Utility. However, all circuit breakers shall have the following minimum short circuit current interrupting ratings, RMS symmetrical:

1. Main Switchboard(s): 200,000A; 2. Distribution Boards (DBs): 65,000A; 3. Subdistribution Boards: 42,000A; 4. Panelboards: 22,000A

Where the short circuit current exceeds the above minimum values based on the calculations, the circuit breakers shall be rated at the next higher standard interrupting rating above the calculated short circuit current value.

E. Distribution boards, subdistribution boards and panel boards:

1. In order to minimize the sizes of the service switchboards and the number of feeder runs, furnish and install distribution boards of adequate capacity (plus spare) in each EPR or electrical closet to feed the local panelboards. Do not feed the individual panelboards directly from the main service switchboards.

2. All electrical panels (henceforth defined as any distribution boards, subdistribution boards, panel boards) and MCCs shall be furnished and installed with main breakers, and copper phase, neutral and ground bus bars. No panels shall have more than 42 single pole breakers excluding the 3‐pole main breaker. Every panel’s feeder shall have appropriately sized neutral (minimum size equal to phase cable size; larger if required to handle nonlinear loads) and ground cables.

3. Feeders for all panels shall be sized as per the main circuit breaker frame rating, not the trip rating (Example: a 400AF/300AT panel will have its feeder sized for 400A, not 300A).

4. Furnish and install dedicated electrical panels in rooms/areas that have concentrated loads or special electrical requirements.

5. Panelboards for nonlinear loads (including computers) shall have 200% rated neutrals. Adjust the neutral busses in all required electrical equipment accordingly.

6. Two spare panelboards along with incoming feeders of adequate capacity for each panelboard shall be furnished and installed in the main EDR, the details of which are:



7. In each separately derived isolated ground system, the main isolated ground distribution board and each isolated ground panel board shall also contain an isolated ground bus in addition to the common ground bus.

8. Furnish and install one UPS‐backed XXA, 3‐Phase, 4‐wires, 208/120VAC, 42 Breakers electrical panel inside the Main Communications Room to feed dedicated 20 Amp circuit outlets (1 duplex and 1 quad for telephone equipment; 1 duplex and 1 quad for paging equipment; 1 quad 125VAC and 1 single 250VAC for each data cabinet), and all dedicated circuit outlets required in the Computer room and Telco room.

9. Furnish and install TBD UPS‐backed XX A, 3‐Phase, 4‐wires, 208/120VAC, 12 Breakers electrical panel, one each inside each Communications Closet to feed four dedicated 20A receptacles (1 duplex and 1 quad installed on the wall 18 inches above the finished floor below each telephone terminal board, and 1 quad installed on the wall 84 inches above the finished floor at the rear of each data cabinet/rack to feed the power strip installed on the cabinet/rack).

10. All panels feeding computer loads shall be protected against voltage and current surges and lightning strikes as per spec IEEE/ANSI standard C62.41 Category A and B testing levels, and shall meet UL spec 1449. Maximum allowable surge levels shall be calculated and affixed to the system. The surge protector shall be type SPB as manufactured by MCG Electronics or approved equal.

F. Transformers:

1. All transformers shall be delta‐wye.

2. All transformers shall be sized with 30% spare capacity of the full connected load. Dedicated primary and secondary protection breakers shall be furnished and installed for all transformers. The main circuit breaker of a panel or distribution board on the secondary side of the transformer does not constitute secondary protection by Amtrak standards, and shall not be accepted. Also refer to the attached Specifications.

3. The design shall compensate for harmonics currents created by nonlinear loads by the reduction or elimination of the harmonics currents. Isolation transformers for nonlinear loads shall be UL listed 1561 for K‐factor operation, triple‐shielded for high common mode noise attenuation, and filtered for high‐frequency noise attenuation. K‐rated isolation transformers shall be type “Ultra‐K” as manufactured by Controlled Power Company or approved equal.

4. Neutral wires and busses for computer and other nonlinear loads shall be 200% rated, from the isolation transformer, to the disconnect switch, to the panel, and to the load.

5. All transformer coil windings shall be copper.

G. Disconnect switches:



1. A dedicated horsepower‐rated, heavy‐duty, industrial‐grade disconnecting means shall be furnished and installed for all electrical equipment including packaged units and all other mechanical, communications and/or architectural equipment covered in the complete Project Requirements, regardless if the equipment is supplied by Amtrak or the Design‐Builder. Furnish and install power for all of the equipment installed by all other disciplines as required, and/or as per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Furnish and install local isolating switches for all electrical equipment within 5’ of the equipment with an enclosure rated for the area in which it is installed. Wherever a manufacturer has not furnished a disconnect means, furnish and install a dedicated external horsepower‐rated disconnect sized as per the NEC.

2. Furnish and install Code sized disconnects for all Owner‐furnished/Owner‐installed, Owner‐furnished/Design‐Builder‐installed and Design‐Builder‐ furnished/Design‐Builder‐installed power equipment.

H. Raceway, Boxes and Fittings ‐ Unless otherwise noted, all cables and wires shall be installed in raceways.

1. Raceways shall be of the following types:

o Hot‐dip galvanized rigid steel conduits (HDG RSC) with hot‐dip galvanized malleable iron (HDG) fittings and HDG cast iron boxes;

o Hot‐galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (HG EMT) with raintight galvanized steel compression fittings and galvanized stamped steel boxes.

o Underground fiberglass or PVC ducts in ductbanks.

o Zero‐halogen‐jacketed galvanized liquidtight flexible metallic conduit, galvanized liquidtight fittings and galvanized stamped steel boxes.

o Infloor ducts for built‐in type furniture only, where required by the furniture layout.

2. Furnish and install HDG cast iron boxes for any transition between HDG RSC and any of the other raceway types.

3. Any raceway passing through any particular area on its way to its destination shall be rated for use in that area (e.g., wet, classified, corrosive), and not only for the final area in which the load is located.

4. Concrete‐encased fiberglass or PVC ducts shall be used for the following applications. The minimum size of fiberglass or PVC ducts shall be 4” with a minimum of two fiberglass or PVC ducts (at least one spare) per run or as noted below. Refer to Specification Section XX for more details.

5. Incoming underground service feeders. Furnish and install a minimum of two spare 4” fiberglass or PVC ducts.



o From the PLB to the transformer vaults where there are transformer vaults and Network Protector Rooms.

o From the PLB to the CT Cabinet where there are no transformer vaults and no Network Protector Rooms.

o From the pad ‐mounted transformers to the PLBs, and then to the CT cabinets in the EDR, where there are pad‐mounted transformers.

6. Power feeds from electrical rooms to all outdoor facilities (including but not limited to: outdoor compactor/trash area, property protection booths, hazardous materials rooms, staircases, enclosures, and equipment storage sheds) except exterior lighting and exterior receptacles: underground fiberglass or PVC ducts.

7. Under the concrete slab.

8. Classified locations:

o Dry areas: HDG RSC, explosion proof HDG cast iron boxes and couplings, HDG sealing fittings.

o Wet areas and harsh/corrosive atmosphere locations: HDG RSC, explosion proof HDG cast iron boxes and couplings, HDG sealing fittings, all polyurethane coated.

9. Nonclassified locations:

o Wet areas and harsh/corrosive atmosphere locations: HDG RSC, HDG cast iron boxes and HDG malleable iron fittings, all polyurethane coated.

o Under the concrete slab ‐ Polyurethane‐coated HDG RSC and fittings, minimum size 1”, maximum 2”, from the load side of the local disconnect switch to the shop equipment (e.g., brake lathes and other heavy machinery). Only if:

1. The slab thickness is 12” minimum; and

2. There is no vehicle travel in the area.

o The locations of the conduit shall be clearly indicated in the vicinity of installation.

o In hung ceiling areas, behind the sheetrock walls for devices only: galvanized, zero‐halogen‐jacketed flexible metallic conduit.

o Dry industrial areas exposed to vehicle travel, including the maintenance area, up to 12’ AFF: HDG RSC, HDG cast iron boxes and HDG fittings.

o For emergency circuits consisting of: power, communications (including the fire alarm equipment, fuse cut‐out boxes and CCTV equipment), emergency lighting,(including illuminated exit signs), and the fire water pump: HDG RSC, HDG cast iron boxes and HDG fittings.

o Remaining nonclassified dry locations: hot galvanized EMT and galvanized steel raintight compression fittings and galvanized stamped steel boxes.



10. All steel raceways shall be electrically continuous and grounded.

11. Furnish and install overhead exposed raceways on racks in maintenance and other areas throughout the Station.

12. All conduits feeding lighting fixtures on the outside walls shall be concealed.

13. There shall not be any underground or underfloor ducts within the Station except where noted.

14. All raceways shall be as per the National Electrical Code in approved sizes of: ¾”, 1”, 1¼”, 1½”, 2”, 2½”, 3”, 3½” and 4” only.

15. Hangers from the ceiling steel or concrete for the conduit supporting trapezes shall be furnished and installed. Use hot‐dip galvanized steel in dry and noncorrosive atmosphere areas, and Type 304 stainless steel everywhere else.

16. In areas without hung ceilings, raceways shall be installed exposed in all of the rooms/areas on that floor. In areas with hung ceilings, raceways shall be installed above the hung ceilings for all lighting, receptacle and power systems. The vertical runs running under the hung ceiling shall be concealed within the walls. All device boxes shall be mounted flush in the walls.

17. Waterproof all incoming ducts. Seal all ducts containing cables with watertight expandable plugs, OZ/Gedney type “CSBG” or approved equal. Seal all spare ducts with watertight caps.

18. Raceway shall not run through any structural members.

19. No electrical raceway (conduit, tubing, or trough) shall be installed inside any utility room, space, shaft (elevator room, hoist way and shaft, gas meter room, pump room, machinery space/room, communications room, control room or space), computer room is not dedicated for the electrical equipment in that room. Do not through‐feed any other raceway in any such areas.

20. Sealing fittings shall be installed at maximum 80 foot intervals for all conduit runs longer than 80 feet that pass through classified (hazardous) areas.

21. Conduit seals and drain fittings shall be installed as per Code in conduit runs from classified areas to unclassified areas on all sides of the classified area.

22. All electrical equipment, feeders (conduits) and wiring installed in classified areas shall be suitable for Class 1, Division 1, Group ‘D’ locations. Threaded, rigid steel hot‐dip galvanized conduits, explosion‐proof fittings, couplings, boxes, hubs, sealing fittings, sealing compounds and other associated requirements per both the Building Code of New York State and the NEC (NFPA 70 Articles 500 thru 505 and 511 thru 516) shall be used in these areas.

23. Conduit shall not block or interfere with the operation of windows, doors, skylights, HVAC equipment, communications equipment and other electrical equipment. Do not install conduit directly below skylights or across windows or other openings.



13.6.5 Wiring

A. All cables and wires, except those dedicated for the outdoor highmast and lowmast lighting fixtures and highmast lighting pole receptacles, shall be installed in the applicable type of raceway.

B. Wiring for the following electrical systems shall be installed in their own dedicated raceway systems: emergency compact fluorescent lighting, explosion proof lighting, explosion proof receptacles, communications, fire alarm panel, fire water pump, computers, telephone, telecommunications, data, clock, paging, CCTV, and security systems.

C. Cover all cable connections in the manholes and property line boxes with heavy‐duty, thick‐wall, waterproof, heat‐shrink splice insulation with integral silicone sealant.

D. The minimum size wire shall be No. 12 AWG, rated at 15A maximum. No. 10 AWG wire shall be rated at 20A maximum. All larger wire/cable sizes shall be rated as per the NEC. All wires and cables shall be rated at 75°C. The branch circuit wires tapped off the home runs for lighting fixtures shall be minimum No. 12 AWG, and those for receptacles shall be minimum No. 10 AWG. All wires and cables (including ground wires) shall be sized as required to account for the load and the voltage drop, and shall fit the terminals of the device or equipment properly. Cutting strands off of the wire/cable to fit the terminals is not permitted. In the event that the feeder cables/wires do not fit the equipment terminals, furnish and install a transition to cables/wires that will.

E. Install a pull cord in each empty conduit/tube.

F. Each electrical raceway shall contain insulated grounding conductor(s). Isolated ground circuits shall contain two grounding conductors: one for the system ground, and one dedicated isolated equipment ground. The system ground conductor shall have green insulation, and the isolated equipment ground conductor shall have green insulation with a yellow stripe.

G. All fire water pump supply conductors (from both Rochester Gas & Electric and the generator) routed through inside the building shall be encased within 2 inches of concrete, or within an enclosed construction dedicated to each fire water pump circuit, and shall have a minimum one hour fire resistance rating.

H. Only for the outdoor highmast and lowmast lighting fixtures, and the receptacles at each highmast pole, cable suitable for direct burial, may be used for the power feeds from the respective panelboards. Run the cables in conduits when AFF within the Station building line, and above grade outdoors.

13.6.6 Enclosures

A. Switchboard enclosures shall be NEMA 1A gasketed.

B. All electrical equipment enclosures (including panel and distribution boards, disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers) for dry and nonclassified areas shall be combination NEMA 12/3R, hot‐dip galvanized after fabrication.



C. All equipment enclosures for wet and corrosive atmosphere locations shall be minimum 12 gauge NEMA 4X type 304 stainless steel.

D. All equipment enclosures for dry classified (hazardous) locations shall be NEMA 7, suitable for Class 1, Division 1, Group D locations.

13.6.7 Grounding and Ground Fault Protection

A. All electrical equipment shall be grounded as per the NEC, IEEE standards, and Amtrak Specifications and Standard Drawings.

B. The grounding system shall consist of the following systems bonded together. Rochester Gas & Electric, the utility company, shall approve the grounding system. Ground resistance shall be less than 5 Ohms:

1. The water pipe on the street side of water meter;

2. Steel pilings and the metal frame of the building bonded together with cable;

3. Concrete encased grounding electrode system;

4. Grounding rod.

C. All below‐grade ground connections shall be done using the ‘Cadweld’ process. All above ground connections shall be with pressure type connectors. All connectors shall be covered with epoxy paint or taped.

D. All ground connections shall be as per AMTRAK Standards.

E. Rochester Gas & Electric’s neutral shall be grounded as per code on the line side of the service equipment.

F. Each transformer shall have its secondary neutral grounded for a separately grounded system. (For transformers on the load side of the service).

G. Exposed non‐current carrying metal parts and cord and plug connected electric equipment, as well as some electric equipment (track of electrically operated cranes, frames of non‐electric elevators, metal partitions, etc), that might accidentally become energized shall be grounded through an equipment grounding conductor.

H. Computer room grounding shall be as per TIA/EIA and IEEE standards.

I. The main grounding grid bus in the EDR, EPRs and other electrical rooms shall be copper, sized as per Code but minimum 4” x ¼“.

J. Ground fault protection shall also be installed downstream breakers of the main disconnect to prevent a ground fault on any one feeder from interrupting power to all feeders.

K. All panels, motors, starters, the metal hung ceiling system, and other permanently mounted electrical equipment shall be permanently and effectively grounded.

L. Furnish and install bonding jumpers in all boxes and enclosures.



M. After installation, the grounding system shall be tested. All related tests and measurements should be performed by the Design‐Builder in the presence of the Engineer.

13.7 Generator Service and Power Distribution

13.7.1 Generator

A. Furnish and install a generator in a dedicated Emergency Power Supply System (Generator and ATS) room, preferably next to the EDR, along an exterior wall. The generator shall use fuel oil and shall have independent fuel supply and exhaust systems as well as its own HVAC systems for the room and for the engines. The engine shall be radiator cooled. The installations shall meet all the Code requirements and manufacturer’s installation recommendations;

B. The generator shall meet all EPA Tier 2 emission requirements.

C. The whole system (the engine, generator and all other major auxiliary equipment) shall be built, tested and shipped by the same manufacturer;

D. Furnish and install a day tank with rupture basin. Refer to Section 12 Mechanical Requirements for fueling details;

E. The system shall include all necessary accessories including a silencer, overcurrent protection, exhaust system, over‐voltage protection, detailed instrumentation panel (voltage, ampere, kW and run time electronic recording meters), battery and battery chargers, local and remote annunciator, keep‐warm system, and fuel pumps;

F. The remote annunciator shall be installed in Rm. XX;

G. The generator shall have the ability of being exercised (manual/automatic) on a regular basis;

H. All accessories for the generator that require power (fuel pumps, heaters, and other equipment) shall be fed from the generator;

I. The parameters of the complete integrated engine‐generator system (consisting of the engine‐generator set(s), automatic transfer switch(es), switchboards, uninterruptible power supplies, and all appurtenances (fuel pumps, heaters, damper motors, et al)) shall be monitored by the BMS. The monitored parameters shall include, but not be limited to:

1. System and appurtenances electrical and mechanical parameters;

2. System and appurtenances fluids (fuel, oil, coolant, antifreeze, et al) parameters (pressures, levels, temperatures, et al);

3. Operational records (event history, run times and durations, system warnings and shutdowns, et al);

4. Time delays;

5. System and appurtenances parameters (including serial and model numbers);

6. System and appurtenances diagnostics;



7. System and appurtenances warnings;

8. NFPA 110 Alarms;

9. Digital inputs;

10. Switchgear inputs;

11. Digital outputs;

12. User‐defined faults and status indicators (refer to the I&C and Communications OPRs)

13. Any other system parameters as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

J. A power failure shall start the generator automatically.

K. The generator shall be sized based on 100% of the total sum of items 1) through 7) below, plus 20% spare of this sum. If the calculated value is not a standard frame size, the next higher standard generator frame size shall be furnished and installed:

1. 100% of whichever is greater: the heating system plus the ventilation system, or the cooling system plus the ventilation system. Include all appurtenances for each system in the determination.

2. 100% of the nameplate rating of the fire water pump and associated equipment.

3. 100% of the rated connected fluorescent lighting load

4. 120% of the rated connected HID and LED lighting load.

5. 140% of the nameplate ratings of all UPSs.

6. All general convenience duplex receptacles as per the NEC.

7. 4W/ft2 for all remaining loads.

L. The nameplate (input) power ratings, not BHPs, of all load motors shall be used in determining the rating of the generator.

13.7.2 Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

A. The generator shall be connected to the distribution system via an automatic transfer and bypass isolation switch, ASCO 7000 Series with Group 5 control panel (or approved equal) and all required accessories. The Design Professional shall determine the actual number of bypass‐isolation ATSs required;

B. The power supply to the Fire Alarm Panel shall be made as per the requirements of the City of Rochester Fire Department. A fuse‐cutout box shall be installed after the ATS, which will be installed between Rochester Gas & Electric power and the generator. Power will be tapped from the line side of the main breaker. An additional 30‐amp spare fuse‐cutout box shall be installed for future use. The entire installation shall be approved by the City of Rochester Fire Department and written approval shall be submitted to the Department



Additional auxiliary contacts shall be furnished and installed in the ATS for monitoring the switch position and/or power failure as required by Section 14 Communications.

C. All Automatic Transfer Switches shall be equipped with accessories to detect fault conditions (short‐circuit, ground‐fault, and/or other faults) downstream, and shall prevent the transfer from Rochester Gas & Electric to the Generator in that situation.

D. The ATS enclosure shall be furnished and installed with an integral generator‐side circuit breaker of the required AIC with ground‐fault protection relay.

E. The Automatic Transfer Switch(es) shall be installed in the Emergency Power Supply System (Generator) Room.

13.7.3 Power to the following shall be fed through UPSs

A. BMS;

B. Generator control panel;

C. Equipment included in section 6.10;

D. Egress lighting;

E. All circuits required for telecommunications equipment.

13.8 Lighting

Lighting System Requirements; the following general requirements shall be incorporated in the lighting design for all areas:

A. Lighting designs Tables E‐1 and E‐2 of this document categorize by Room/Area/Locations for required lighting levels or reference to follow including specific lighting sources (types) that shall be used in said areas.

B. The lighting system design shall be designed to be relatively simple and minimize initial capital cost, as well as frequency and expense of maintenance.

C. Lighting shall be designed to be functional, yet complementary to those other aesthetic features in the space that provide an atmosphere of relative comfort, pleasantness and cleanliness of surroundings, and a sense of personal safety and security.

D. Adequate lighting levels, uniformity ratios, contrast, and other visibility attributes necessary to stimulate productivity, facilitate the use of facilities by patrons or the useful completion of tasks in a timely yet safe manner, and maintain the appropriate surveillance levels under all ambient lighting conditions shall be provided.

E. Shall be energy efficient and comply with the IGCC, all IESNA Recommended Practices, ASHRAE and ANSI standards.

F. Lighting shall be designed to satisfy security requirements and to provide a pleasant and bright environment.

G. Lighting fixture locations shall permit easy accessibility for re‐lamping and periodic cleaning.



H. Any required illumination shall be arranged and wired so that the failure of any single lighting unit or circuit shall not leave the area in total darkness.

I. Lighting shall be designed to avoid “spill” light, objectionable glare, and light trespass.

J. Lighting fixtures shall be vandal‐resistant in spaces accessible to patrons or to the general public.

K. Lighting designs shall effectively control glare or other extraneous reflections in the visual field.

L. Lighting shall meet or exceed recommendations in this guide in accordance with all applicable IESNA Standard Practices.

M. Manufacturers of lighting fixtures, poles, and accessories there of shall have a minimum of 10 years of reputable performance in the industry.

N. Quality of Illumination

1. Lighting designs shall be free from distracting and uncomfortable glare; care shall be exercised to prevent specular reflection on signage, direct glare from exposed lamps, high brightness areas of individual fixtures and reflections in glazing or other specular surfaces

2. Uniformity ratios shall not exceed the recommended levels as directed by IESNA.

3. The color temperature of light fixtures shall be within the ranges specified in the contract specifications. Lamps of the same type within each area of illumination shall have the same color temperature. In areas where different types of light fixtures are required, the color temperature of each type shall be matched as close as practicable to ensure uniformity of color.

4. Special care shall be taken to avoid objectionable glare to streets, tracks and adjacent properties. Light fixtures shall be positioned to minimize spill light. Light fixtures shall be provided with internal shielding and located to prevent spill light and glare in the direction of adjacent properties. Light fixtures within 50’‐0” of elevated freeways and overpasses shall be designed to provide absolute cutoff in the direction of moving traffic.

O. Facility Illumination Level ‐ The illumination levels for various areas shall be provided as shown in Tables E‐1 and E‐2. The normal method for calculating these levels shall be in accordance with the IESNA Lighting Handbook with modifications or other requirements stated herein. The “point to point” method of computing illumination shall be used to verify and substantiate illumination and uniformity lighting levels.

P. Circulation Roadway Lighting ‐ Provide a uniform nighttime illumination on the circulation roadways to enable motorists to quickly, distinctly and comfortably view the roadway alignment, vehicles, obstacles, or obstructions at extended distances ahead, even during inclement weather. The lighting design shall comply with the latest applicable codes and IESNA Recommended Practices.



Q. Street and/or Motorway Lighting ‐ Street and/or motorway lighting shall conform to the standards and/or design requirements of the local and/or State jurisdiction.

R. Parking Lot Lighting

1. Lighting at surface parking lots shall meet the recommendations in the latest edition of the IESNA RP‐20, Lighting for Parking Facilities

2. Lighting Poles shall be located inside of curbs, on traffic islands and walks, and along parking lot perimeter. Placement shall present a minimum obstruction to movement and parking of cars. Where poles are placed near automobile traffic or parking, they shall be protected from physical damage by a concrete base of at least 2’‐0” diameter which extends not less than 2’‐6” above grade

3. Light Pole positioning shall be as required to meet lighting uniformity ratios, be coordinated with the proposed landscaping scheme and prevent off‐property spill light.

S. Exterior Stairway Lighting ‐ The types of luminaires to be used are dependent on the location. Either pole mounted or wall mounted luminaires shall be used whichever is more appropriate. See Table E‐1 and E‐2 for recommend illumination levels for exterior stairways.

T. Security Lighting ‐ Lighting shall be provided such that all areas throughout the facility are illuminated to ensure against unwanted visitors. Fixture shall be vandal resistant. Refer to Table E‐1 and E‐2 for illumination levels.

U. Light Pollution Mitigation ‐ The designer must design the exterior lighting using the latest IESNA‐TM‐11 documentation as a guideline to control the light trespass. All luminaires used shall have a U0 BUG rating (Full Cutoff) in accordance with the IESNA.

V. Emergency Lighting and Exit Signs:

1. Emergency lighting design shall conform to the NEC, CEC, NFPA 101, NFPA 130, IESNA Lighting Handbook, and the New York State Building Code.

2. Emergency lighting shall be designed to maintain a minimum of 10 lux (1fc) horizontal illumination at the finished floor elevation throughout the areas of pedestrian egress.

3. Exit lighting fixtures / signs shall be provided to illuminate the designated egress passageways, stairways, and the entrances/exits to stairways. Exit lighting fixtures shall be wall or bracket mounted at a mounting height visible to all occupants within the occupied spaces. Exit lighting fixtures / signs shall be separately wired from other electrical loads (to the emergency panelboard) and shall be connected to the UPS system.

4. Emergency lighting for stairways and escalators shall be designed to emphasize illumination on the top and bottom steps or landings. All escalator steps newel and comb lighting shall be on emergency feeder circuits in accordance with NFPA 130. A minimum of 1 10 lux (1fc).



5. Emergency lighting fixtures and exit lights / signs in underground occupancies shall be located so as to minimize the possibility of being obscured by stratified smoke in a fire.

W. Lighting Control System ‐ Control artificial lighting automatically where practical by selecting from among various lighting control devices. The most useful controls for increasing lighting energy‐efficiency are timers, dimmers, photocells, and occupancy sensors. Select control strategies based upon the following types of lighting situations:

1. Lighting designed to continuously illuminate an area during a combination of hours of darkness and hours of operation. Examples of continuous lighting could be station stops, platforms, vehicle approaches, and parking lots. Suitable controls for continuous lighting are timers and photocells.

2. Standby Lighting is similar in design to continuous lighting, except not continuously operated. Standby lighting is turned on automatically when activity is detected in the area or manually as necessary to occupy a space. Standby lighting is suitable only for “instant on” lamps. Examples of standby lighting could be utility closets, offices, or restrooms. Suitable controls for standby lighting include discrete “on/off” switches, occupancy sensors, and dimmers.

X. Lighting Fixtures ‐ The luminaires for the project shall be constructed of the highest quality materials and designed to provide a minimum of 20 years of operation. All exterior luminaires, along with those interior luminaires that require an occasional wash down, shall be UL Listed for Wet Locations and for Direct Spray. The luminaires chosen shall incorporate the most effective source for the application and shall be easily maintainable and removable without the use of tools. No interior luminaries shall be constructed using a fiberglass or polymer housing. All luminaires shall be cast or extruded aluminum with stainless steel hardware.

Y. Poles, Bracket Arms, and Miscellaneous Hardware ‐ All poles shall be galvanized round tapered steel constructed to provide the ultimate security during inclement weather. All the poles shall include a grounding lug positioned in the pole opposite the reinforced hand hole. Additionally, all poles shall incorporate an internal vibration dampener to minimized vibration during steady winds or structural vibrations. The bracket arms shall be constructed using 2 inch schedule 40 tubing bent to the desired shape and completely galvanized after fabrication. Any holes that are required for mounting off accessories on the pole must be made during the manufacturing process and before any galvanizing or surface finishing is performed. All pole hardware shall be stainless steel.

13.9 Receptacles

13.9.1 Typical for All Types of Receptacles

A. For details regarding the receptacles and their appurtenances refer to the attached Specifications, Section XX, and to the Conceptual Drawings To Be Developed.



B. Receptacles shall be fed from receptacles panels only. Alternate the circuits and phases between adjacent receptacles.

C. Unless otherwise noted, furnish and install at least one receptacle in each room or area in the Station. However, there shall be no receptacles in the shower areas and the Hazardous Material (Hazmat) Storage Room. Actual quantities and types of receptacles shall be as per the following sections.

D. On each receptacle’s faceplate, furnish and install labeling indicating the panelboard name and circuit number.

E. Explosion proof receptacles shall not be fed from the same circuits feeding nonexplosion proof receptacles.

F. Unless otherwise noted, for all other receptacles refer to the applicable section.

G. Receptacles for electrical equipment and appliances shall be furnished and installed throughout the Station per equipment requirements, as per the Comprehensive User’s Requirements and as noted in the following sections.

H. Independent outlet boxes shall be used for different types of receptacles, such as convenience, isolated ground, GFCI and all other receptacles.

I. Each receptacle’s pin configuration shall match that of the connected equipment’s plug.

J. Receptacle spacing indicated in the following sections, is between the centers of the receptacles.

K. Installation:

1. In general, the receptacle type shall be suitable for the type of area in which it is to be furnished and installed, e.g. explosion‐proof in classified areas, weatherproof and corrosion resistant in wet or harsh/corrosive atmosphere locations.

2. Coordinate receptacle locations with cubicle, equipment and furniture layouts. Relocate receptacles where furniture and other equipment interfere with receptacle access, but do not exceed the maximum spacing requirements.

3. Install the receptacles so that they do not interfere with the opening/closing of the gates, grilles, doors, windows, and other barriers.

4. Branch circuits for receptacles installed inside Communications cabinets (including but not limited to file server and data cabinets) shall be run above each cabinet on a cable ladder and then down into the cabinet using flex conduit.

13.9.2 General Purpose Duplex Convenience Receptacles

A. Unless otherwise noted below, furnish and install one 20A, 125VAC general purpose duplex convenience receptacle every 10’ on walls or fence posts in each area and room throughout the Station except for the wet areas, corrosive atmosphere areas, hazardous areas, and the maintenance areas (refer to the following sections for the specific requirements for those areas). Where the room or area perimeter is less than 10’, there shall be one 20A general



purpose duplex convenience receptacle installed there (or as required in the following sections).

B. General Purpose convenience duplex receptacles shall be installed in addition to any other receptacles required in this OPR (such as IG, quad, reel or power receptacles) and as shown on the Conceptual Drawings. Furnish and install additional dedicated receptacles for Owner‐furnished/Design‐Builder‐installed equipment (refer to Appendix A for more information) and for Design‐Builder‐furnished/Design‐Builder‐installed equipment.

C. Where receptacles are to be mounted a certain distance apart on the walls, the following shall apply:

1. All entrances, open or barriered, shall be counted as part of the walls.

2. Barriers include but are not limited to doors, fences, grilles and gates.

3. Where the space’s or room’s enclosure consists of a fence (wholly or in part), install the receptacles on the fence posts.

4. Adjust the spacing and number of receptacles if necessary so that the receptacle spacing does not exceed the maximum requirement.

D. Where the spacing criteria causes a receptacle to fall at an entrance to the space or room, install the receptacle adjacent to the entrance on the nearest wall or fence post.

E. Space receptacles evenly apart unless otherwise required by equipment or room restrictions.

F. Where a space’s or room’s perimeter falls between integer multiples of the required receptacle spacing, the number of receptacles to be furnished and installed shall be as per the next higher integer multiple. In no case shall receptacles be spaced at more than the maximum distance indicated or noted. For example, a four‐wall room that has a perimeter of 12’ and has a maximum receptacle spacing requirement of 10’ has a perimeter‐to‐spacing ratio of 1.2, and the next higher integer is 2, so therefore the room shall have 2 receptacles in it.

G. Furnish and install general purpose convenience duplex receptacles in the following areas as noted:

1. Every 6’ on centers in the following areas:

2. Every 20’ in the following areas:

3. One in each of the following areas:

13.9.3 Power Receptacles

A. Furnish and install the following types of mechanically‐interlocked power receptacles as indicated, in addition to the other required types of receptacles. Refer to the Conceptual Drawings for information regarding the power receptacles. Refer to the Equipment List in Appendix A for the quantities of the equipment. There shall be only one interlocked power receptacle per circuit for the following:



1. Isolated Ground (IG) and Quadplex Receptacles:

a. IG receptacles shall be furnished and installed as follows:

o Furnish and install IG receptacles panels for all computer workstations, file servers and computer data racks, and feed each from a dedicated isolation transformer and a dedicated UPS. The power feeds to computer and other electronics equipment shall meet current industry standards.

o All IG receptacles shall be UPS‐conditioned receptacles, hospital‐grade, and colored orange, and duplex (unless otherwise noted).

o Neutrals for all IG receptacles, isolation transformers, IG receptacles panelboards, subdistribution‐boards, distribution boards and associated disconnect switches shall be rated at 200% of the circuit breaker ampacity and higher if required to compensate for voltage drop.

o IG receptacles shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s directions. Furnish and install an isolated ground wire and a common building ground wire to each isolated ground receptacle.

o IG receptacles shall be mounted 4’ high on the shop area wall, at desk height in the offices, and shall be located adjacent to the computer data outlets.

o For each IG receptacle furnished and installed, also furnish and install one dedicated 20A specification grade non‐IG general purpose quadplex receptacle not farther than one foot (1’‐0”) from the IG receptacle.

b. Furnish and install the following dedicated, 20A, 125VAC IG receptacles as indicated below in addition to the required general purpose duplex receptacles. Refer to Section 14 Communications Requirements, Communications Specifications and Communications Conceptual Drawings for more details:

o Furnish and install one IG duplex receptacle for each computer, VDT and CCTV monitor, and as per the Communications OPR requirements.

o Main Communications Room:

o Dedicated duplex IG receptacles:

1) One, for the security equipment.

2) One, below each telephone terminal board (TTB).

o Quadplex IG receptacles, each on a dedicated 20A lockable circuit breaker:

1) One, for the Telephone Switch.

2) Two, for the paging system.

3) Two, for the CCTV cabinets.



o Dedicated IG Data Cabinet receptacles. Install on the inside bottom of each cabinet (To Be Further Developed):

1) Data Cabinet #01 (Cables): One quadplex NEMA 5‐20R.

2) Data Cabinet #02 (Data Equipment):

a) Two duplex NEMA 5‐20R

b) Two NEMA L6‐20R twistlock

o One dedicated quadplex IG receptacle per each piece of wall mounted telephone equipment along the walls near the equipment and at each desk.

o Communications Closets:

1) One dedicated duplex IG receptacles, below each telephone terminal board (TTB).


3) Dedicated IG Data Cabinet receptacles. Install on the inside bottom of each cabinet:

4) Three quadplex IG receptacles on dedicated lockable 20A circuit breakers.

o One duplex IG receptacle plus one quadplex non‐IG receptacle for each data outlet (data drop). Refer to the Communications OPR for information regarding the data outlets.

o Property Protection Booths/Guard Booths (PPBs): One dedicated IG duplex receptacle for each piece of Communications and security equipment that is not hardwired, and as per Communications OPR requirements.

o One dedicated duplex IG receptacle at each "KRONOS", timekeeping unit and punch clock location. Refer to Section 14 Communication Requirements for the Kronos locations.

o Telco Room:

1) Two dedicated IG receptacles for each data cabinet, mounted 84” AFF on the wall behind each cabinet:

• One 250VAC, 30A single.

• One 125VAC, 20A quadplex.




3) For the Telco’s multiplexer equipment furnish and install: two NEMA L5‐20R, 125VAC receptacles, each connected to a 20A dedicated breaker; and two NEMA L6‐30R, 250VAC receptacles, each connected to a dedicated 30A two‐pole breaker. These receptacles shall be fed from the Main Communications Room panel fed via the UPS. These receptacles shall be mounted near each cabinet.

B. 20A, 125VAC duplex GFCI receptacles:

1. Furnish and install GFCI receptacles as noted. Except in wet locations, the Elevator Machine Room and Elevator Pit, GFCI receptacles are in addition to the other types of receptacles required by Section 14 and the Conceptual Drawings:

o At sinks in the toilets and washrooms:

a. One GFCI receptacle where there is only one sink;

b. One GFCI receptacle between each pair of sinks where there are two or more sinks, up to two receptacles.

o In all lunch rooms/areas, kitchens and at sinks and as otherwise noted.

o On maximum 6’ centers in the Destination Sign Room.

o On maximum 10’ centers in the following areas:

• Elevator Machine Room.

• Elevator pit.

• All areas classified as wet or harsh/corrosive atmosphere locations.

o In the Kitchen (Specific quantities TBD):

• Six 20A, 250V duplex GFCI receptacles with dedicated 20A, 208V circuit breakers.

• Ten 20A 125V duplex GFCI receptacles with dedicated 20A circuit breakers for two (2) commercial refrigerators, two slicers, two cash registers, two food warmers, and two steam tables. Locations are to be coordinated with the Architectural kitchen equipment layout.

o One within 1’ of each nonclassified‐area sump pit.

o For each water fountain and water cooler (exception: if the unit is hardwired, furnish and install a specification grade single receptacle fed from a GFCI circuit breaker in the panelboard).



o For roof mounted equipment: one dedicated GFCI receptacle per piece of equipment, mounted at the equipment location regardless of any other requirement for receptacles in any other discipline’s OPR.

o One, surface mounted on each outdoor highmast lighting pole base.

o As required by the Codes.

o Where a piece of equipment requires GFCI protection and a GFCI receptacle is not available in that voltage or current rating, furnish and install a dedicated heavy‐duty specification grade receptacle and dedicated GFCI circuit breaker of the required poles, voltage and ampere ratings for that equipment. If a GFCI breaker is not available in that configuration, furnish and install a hardwired GFCI device near the receptacle.

C. Other Receptacles ‐ Furnish and install the following receptacles as indicated. All receptacles listed below shall be specification‐grade, rating as per equipment requirements:

D. Heat Tracing ‐ Furnish and install heat tracing/freeze protection on all water lines, drainage lines (including but not limited to those for heat recovery units), steam lines, hydraulic lines (including but not limited to bus washer soap detergent lines and those for elevators), and valves and/or traps, that are outside heated areas and within 10’ of the overhead roll‐up doors in all directions inside the Station. Also furnish and install heat tracing/freeze protection on all Generator Room sprinkler, hydraulic and other lines subject to freezing when the radiator grille is open.

E. UPS Systems:

1. Furnish and install UPS conditioned power. The UPSs shall be as manufactured by Powerware (or approved equal). Each UPS shall be limited to 50kVA. The UPSs shall also be sized with 30% spare capacity of the connected loads in kVA.

2. The UPSs shall also be fed from the generator.

3. Each emergency‐lighting UPS shall provide a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency lighting during a power outage.

4. All other UPSs shall provide a minimum of 30 minutes of power to the applicable equipment during a power outage.

5. Unless otherwise noted, furnish and install UPS‐backed power to all of the following equipment:

o Receptacles servicing the file server;

o Receptacles servicing data and communications racks;

o All computer workstations (isolated ground receptacles), including those near lifts in the maintenance areas;

o All access control equipment including file servers, client workstation, system controller and power supply panels;



o Trak system;

o Building Management System (BMS);

o All CCTV equipment including camera power supplies;

o Telecommunications equipment;

o Emergency HID lighting. The UPSs feeding the HID emergency lighting fixtures must be rated for reactive loads and shall be able to handle the harmonics created by the ballasts.

o Wireless access points.

6. Unless otherwise noted, furnish and install UPS‐backed power to all of the equipment in the following rooms, including receptacles and lighting:

o All computer and data rooms;

o All communications rooms;

o TELCO room;

o Server rooms;

o Communication closets.

7. An alarm system shall be incorporated in the UPS system and broadcast a visible alarm across all LAN screens in the Station, and shall sound a loud audible alarm at the server console, a 24‐hr manned position either in the maintenance office or at the guard shack console whenever the UPS system takes over from Rochester Gas & Electric power. The alarm message on the workstation screens shall indicate that power is down, and shall warn system administrators and users to log off and power down their systems. The broadcast shall include estimated time to shutdown.

8. The UPS system shall be network‐monitorable. The UPS shall be grounded as required by the manufacturer. The UPS shall be installed so as not to create electrical/electronic interference with the file server or any other equipment.

9. All central or rack‐mounted UPS devices shall include an SNMP network interface card and temperature alarm module, connected to the Local Area Network for remote management purposes.

F. Lightning Protection ‐ Furnish and Install lightning protection and surge arresters as per NFPA 780 including but not limited to the roof perimeter, highmast lighting poles, lowmast lighting poles, outdoor CCTV camera poles, and any metallic equipment mounted on the roof. Refer to the attached Specifications for more information.

G. Surge Protection for Communications Panelboards ‐ Surge protectors shall be installed at each communications equipment panelboard, MCG type “LS” series or approved equal. The surge protectors shall offer minimum three redundant protection paths per phase, solid copper bus bar construction, field replaceable modules with lifetime warranty, high headroom varistors with high‐speed thermal disconnect, EMI/RFI filtering, continuously



monitored protection circuits, internal and external status indicators, minimum 14‐gauge steel NEMA 4 enclosure, and shall meet UL1449 and NEMA LS1.

H. Temporary Station:

1. Provide Temporary Utility Power



I. IT Trailer:

1. Provide Temporary IT connections



J. Other Requirements

1. Furnish and install power to all mechanical, communications and control equipment including but not limited to: VAV boxes, fire/smoke dampers, electric duct heaters, supply/exhaust fans, boilers, elevators, compressors.

2. Electric hook‐ups for portable equipment (e.g. portable welding machines, et al) shall be safe and meet Code.

3. Automatic Fare Collection/Revenue Equipment

a. Automatic Fare Collection/Revenue Equipment, needs power. Furnish and install all required power equipment ( including but not limited to cables, circuit breakers, HDG RSC, boxes, fittings, disconnect switches) to feed power to all of the indicated equipment.

b. The Design‐Builder shall make the system fully operational.



TABLE E-1 ILLUMINATION LEVEL TABLE To Be Further Developed

Area Foot-candles,

Maintained

NOTES: 1. Any area or room not covered in above Table E‐1 shall be provided with a minimum of

30 foot‐candles illumination level. The light source shall be suitable for the type of area. 2. All lighting fixtures shall be supplied and installed with lamps and ballasts. 3. All highmast and lowmast pole lighting fixtures shall be furnished with installed house‐

side shields to block light from falling onto neighboring properties. 4. Emergency lighting levels shall be as per NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 5. All illumination levels shall be achieved without natural light (sunlight or moonlight)

contribution, and shall be measured on a dark night.



TABLE E‐2 LAMP TABLE To Be Further Developed

Lamp type Wattage/ size

No.

Of lamps per

fixture

Area of use Ballast

type

Maximum number of fixtures per 277V single phase circuit

NOTE:

1. Lighting fixtures with other kinds of compact fluorescent lamps may be used for some specialized applications like emergency lighting units with battery backup. The maximum number of compact fluorescent lamps per circuit shall not exceed 12.

2. HID fixtures count as one lamp per fixture. 3. Fluorescent lighting fixtures may have one, two, three or four lamps only. 4. Linear fluorescent lamps shall be 4’ long only.



Definitions:

1. Utility Room: EDR, EPR, Electrical Closet, Generator Room, Electrical Vault.

2. EDR (Electrical Distribution Room): switchboard room.

3. EPR (Electrical Panel Room): where the panel and distribution boards dedicated for a particular area in the facility are located. There shall be several EPRs per floor. Disconnect switches shall be located next to the loads served by them, not in the EPR, unless the loads are in the EPR.

4. Electrical Closet: same as EPR.

5. Panelboard (PB): an electrical panel that only feeds branch circuit loads and has a main breaker that does not exceed 250A. This includes lighting panels, receptacle panels, power panels and communications panels.

6. Distribution Board (DB): an electrical panel that has a main breaker exceeding 250A, or feeds at least one other panel (regardless of main breaker size).

7. Lighting Panel (LP): an electrical panel that only feeds lighting branch circuits. Lighting fixtures shall be fed only from Lighting Panels. There shall be separate LPs for indoor and outdoor lighting fixtures.

8. Receptacle Panel (RP): an electrical panel that only feeds either convenience, computer or reel receptacle branch circuits. Receptacles shall be fed only from Receptacle Panels. There shall be separate RPs for reel, computer, and convenience receptacles.

9. Power Panel (PP): an electrical panel that feeds motors, power equipment, power receptacles and miscellaneous electrical loads.

10. Computer Workstation: any computer (data outlet) location, regardless of area in the entire Station.

11. Provide: furnish and install the required electrical equipment.

12. Raceway: conduit, tubing, trough, cable tray or duct.

13. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Boiler rooms, compressor rooms, fire water pump room, tire repair areas/rooms, HVAC equipment rooms, water meter room, gas meter room.

14. Dedicated receptacle: one receptacle per circuit breaker.

15. Dedicated disconnect: only one piece of equipment per disconnect.

16. Office: any room, area or space with a desk.

17. Outlet: receptacle.



Abbreviations: 1. RSC: Rigid Steel Conduit 2. HDG: hot‐dip galvanized 3. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing 4. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride 5. FG: Fiberglass 6. IBC: International Building Code 7. Designer/Engineer: Designer and Engineer 8. UL: Underwriters Laboratories 9. IG: isolated ground 10. AFF: Above finished floor. 11. HG: Hot galvanized. 12. Typ: Typical 13. PPB: Property Protection Booth/Guard Booth 14. AF: Circuit breaker Amperes‐frame size 15. AT: Circuit breaker Amperes‐trip setting 16. GFCI: Ground fault current interrupter/interrupting 17. P&E: Plant and Equipment (maintenance) 18. OPR: Owner’s Project Requirements 19. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency 20. BHP: Brake horsepower 21. GOC: Garage operating center 22. MOC: Farebox repair shop 23. a/k/a: also known as 24. CWA: Constant wattage autotransformer 25. DOB: Department of Buses 26. AFC: Automatic Fare Collection 27. HPS: High pressure sodium 28. PSMH: Pulse start metal halide. 29. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 30. TIA/EIA: Telecommunications Industry Association 31. rec.: receptacle



Exhibit A

Rochester Gas & Electric Load Request Letter To Be Further Developed

Exhibit B

Typical Panelboard Schedule

Notes:

1. The voltage shown in the table is for a 208VAC, 3‐phases, 4‐wires system. However, this table shall also be used for 480VAC, 3‐phases, 4‐wires systems, with the appropriate changes to the voltage designation at the top right of the table.

2. For total Volt‐Amp calculations, use the highest phase current (out of Phases A, B, C).



SECTION 14. COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS

14.1

Facility Requirements

The Design Builder (DB) must adhere to the following criteria encompassing the work required to design, furnish, install and test/commission the following systems;

• Telecommunications System • Public Address System • Fire Alarm System • Digital Signage

The work required under this section is applicable to the Temporary Station Trailers and the final Station configuration for Phase I and II.

Before commencing on the design and installation of any work in this section, the DB Contractor shall meet with the proper agency (Fire Department, Amtrak IT, Amtrak Police) to coordinate the location of devices and infrastructure and ensure compliance to referenced Amtrak standards.

14.2 Standards and Codes

Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards V1.0

Amtrak Police Department ‐ Corporate Security Standard Design Practice 2011

Amtrak Engineering Stations Standard Design Practices (SDP) June 2012

ANSI TIA/EIA‐568

NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code 2011

NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

14.3 Telecommunication System

A. Design, furnish and install incoming telecommunication service, network connectivity and structured cabling facilities to support Telecommunication Systems (voice and data) requirements for the Temporary Station and Station (Phase I and II).

B. The design portrayed on the Contract Documents provides a representation of expected layouts and topology of systems. DB Contractor shall coordinate specific requirements, location of devices and final configuration of all system with Amtrak and Trailways.



C. Coordinate with the Authority's Telecommunications Services to provide the required services from the Telephone Company.

D. Horizontal Copper Cabling

A. All horizontal cabling shall from telecommunications outlet (TO) and workstation area outlet (WAO) shall be category 6.

B. All horizontal cabling shall be designed and arranged in star topology.

C. All horizontal cabling above accessible ceiling shall be installed exposed and mounted on J‐hooks. J‐hook spacing shall not exceed five (5) feet horizontally.

D. Telecommunication Outlets (TO) shall have a minimum of a 1 ¼” conduit extending from TO to above the ceiling. Conduit shall have a 90 degree bend perpendicular to the wall toward the center of the room. The end of the conduit shall have a nylon bushing. Rough ends of conduits are not acceptable.

E. All horizontal cabling from TO/WAO shall be terminated in a Category 6 RJ45‐100 patch panel in the telecommunications room (TR). This portion of the telecommunications wiring system that extends from the telecommunication outlet (TO) in the work area to the telecommunications wiring closet is considered the Horizontal Link.

F. All Horizontal Links should be terminated in a telecommunications room that is on the same floor. Ground level telecommunication outlets are shown to be terminated in a wall mounted telecommunication IT wall mount cabinet. DB Contractor to coordinate with Amtrak IT department for the following design options (OR):

i. Acceptable to have a wall mount cabinet on Ground Level of Station to connect to Telecommunication Room (TR)/Communication Room on Concourse Level.

ii. Requirement for a dedicated Communication Closet on Ground Level of Station.

iii. Acceptable to have all horizontal links routed to Concourse Level Telecommunicaiton (TR) / Communication Room on Concourse Level.

G. All Horizontal Links shall not exceed 90 meteres (295 feet).

H. Quick‐Trak Kiosks are subject to Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) requirements. Refer to Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards V1.0 Section 2.3.3 for requirements of these Telecommunication Outlets (TO). All cabling associated with these outlets shall be installed in rigid galvanized steel conduit.

I. Telecommunication Outlets (TO) should be provided at vending locations as shown on the plans. These TOs shall follow the PCI DSS standards also. All cabling from these TOs should be coordinated with the Telecommunication provider and terminated near the demarcation point. TOs are provided in the case that data connectivity are required at vending. All cabling associated with these outlets shall be installed in rigid galvanized steel conduit.



J. Color coding of voice and LAN jacks shall be per the Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards V1.0

K. Labeling of all cabling shall be Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards V1.0

L. Listing of acceptable manufacturers for cable, jacks, patch panels and patch‐cords are listed in Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards V1.0.

M. All horizontal cable on the Concourse Level shall be comprised of a low‐smoke jacket to meet the intent of the wiring requirements of NPFA 130.

E. Backbone Cable Distribution Systems

A. Where Communication Closets are located, utilize backbone type cable distribution to interconnect the Communication Closets to the Telecommunication Room (TR).

B. Refer to Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards V1.0for cabling specifications.

C. All Backbone Cables Distribution Systems shall be routed in rigid galvanized steel conduit.

D. At a mimimum backbone cabling shall be:

i. 50 pair of twisted shielded copper cabling

ii. 24 strands of single mode fiber optic cable

iii. 24 strands of multi‐mode fiber optic cable

F. Temporary Station Telecommunication Design

A. Coordinate with local telecommunication service provider for service to Temporary Station Trailers. Route incoming telecommunication service from site into designated demarcation point within trailers.

B. Furnish and Install a wall mounted cabinet to house Amtrak provided active equipment (switch, server, router).

C. Route all horizontal cabling from Telecommunication Outlets to wall mounted IT cabinet. Terminate all cables on approved patch panel and label per AMTRAK PREMISE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM STANDARDS V1.0.

D. Provide a eight (8) foot by four (4) foot marine grade plywood backboard painted with three (3) coats of fire retardant white paint. Use this surface to mount any required punchdown blocks or additional IT infrastructure that will not be housed within the wall mounted IT cabinet.

G. Telecommunications Room (TR) / Communications Room shall serve as the main distribution center for telecommunication systems and the gateway to the network. This room will also house the Authority's future fiber optic transmission equipment. It shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:

1. Provide Telephone Terminal Board on wall (labeled "AMTRAK‐Telephone") to terminate horizontal telephone cables from telephone/fax sets, multi‐pair riser cables between



main Communications rooms and Communications closets and between main Communications rooms and Telco closet, and cables from zone paging speakers. Install terminal boards on the wall 24 inches above the finished floor. Provide an additional Telephone Terminal Board on wall (labeled "AMTRAK‐Fiber Optic") to terminate cables from the future authority's fiber optic network. Furnish and install protection blocks, punch down blocks and cable rings as required for both terminal boards.

2. Furnish and install three (3) data cabinets, one for data distribution and one for data equipment and one for future IT components. Use the data distribution cabinet to terminate horizontal data cables from computer workstation outlets, vertical backbone multi‐pair copper and fiber optic cables, and all required connectivity hardware/equipment.

3. All walls shall be provided with marine grade plywood painted with three (3) coats of fire retardant white paint. Plywood shall extend from one (1) foot above the floor to nine (9) feet above the floor.

4. All active IT component/equipment (servers, switches, routers, etc.) shall be furnished and installed by Amtrak’s Network Operations Group unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

5. All equipment cabinets shall be located so that the cabinet front and rear meet the requirements indicated in Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards.

6. Provide overhead cable ladder system inside the room above equipment cabinets and telephone terminal board for exposed cables run from/to equipment.

7. Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements, for details regarding the dedicated electrical panel inside the main Communications room to feed dedicated panels and all dedicated circuit outlets required in the Computer room and Telco room. All circuits required for telecommunications equipment shall be connected from the building's emergency generator and UPS system. UPS backed electrical panel in the communications rooms shall feed only the equipment within the corresponding room. UPS backed panels feeding computer workstations outlets and other loads outside the communication rooms shall not be installed inside the room. The outlets for telephone and paging equipment shall be installed on wall 18 inches above the finished floor below the telephone terminal board to feed the telephone switch and paging equipment. The electrical outlets for the data distribution and data equipment cabinets shall be installed at the inside bottom of each cabinet to feed power strips installed in the cabinet.

8. Provide a telecommunications grounding system bus bar that is tied back to the nearest building's electrical grounding system. All metallic racks, cabinets, cable ladders, raceways, Network/Telecommunications equipment shall be properly grounded as per TIA/EIA‐607, NEC codes (Articles 250 & 800).

9. Provide two 4‐inch rigid conduits between main Communications room and every Communications closet and Satellite communications room to install backbone copper and multimode fiber cables.



H. Passenger Information Display System (PIDS) Server Room shall serve as the main distribution center for PIDS systems and the gateway to the network. This room shall be designated as a Communication Closet and be connected to the Telecommunication Room (TR) with the necessary backbone cabling described above. It shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:

1. Furnish and install one (1) data cabinets for housing the PIDS video display drivers, patch panels and necessary equipment to provide an active electronic signage system throughout the station.


3. All active IT component/equipment (servers, switches, routers, etc.) shall be coordinated with Amtrak’s preferred vendor. Refer to Section 14.8 Digital Signage for applicable details.



6. Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements, for details regarding the dedicated electrical panel inside the main Communications room to feed dedicated panels and all dedicated circuit outlets required in the Computer room and Telco room. All circuits required for telecommunications equipment shall be connected from the building's emergency generator and UPS system. UPS backed electrical panel in the communications rooms shall feed only the equipment within the corresponding room. UPS backed panels feeding computer workstations outlets and other loads outside the communication rooms shall not be installed inside the room. The outlets for telephone and paging equipment shall be installed on wall 18 inches above the finished floor below the telephone terminal board to feed the telephone switch and paging equipment. The electrical outlets for the data distribution and data equipment cabinets shall be installed at the inside bottom of each cabinet to feed power strips installed in the cabinet.


I. Revenue Server Room shall serve as the main distribution center for Quik‐Trak Kiosk systems and the required electronic media revenue systems. This room shall be designated as a Communication Closet and be connected to the Telecommunication Room (TR) with the necessary backbone cabling described above. It shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:



1. Furnish and install one (1) data rack for housing the revenue equipment as required by Amtrak.





6. All electrical circuits shall be derived from the PIDS Server room adjacent to this room.


J. Elevator Control Rooms

1. Furnish and install necessary cabling for elevator cab intercom.

2. Coordinate call down number for elevator cab intercom.


K. Revenue Server Room shall serve as the main distribution center for Quik‐Trak Kiosk systems and the required electronic media revenue systems. This room shall be designated as a Communication Closet and be connected to the Telecommunication Room (TR) with the necessary backbone cabling described above. It shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:

1. Furnish and install one (1) data rack for housing the revenue equipment as required by Amtrak.







6. All electrical circuits shall be derived from the PIDS Server room adjacent to this room.


L. Submittals: The following is the minimum product data to be submitted:

A. Category 6 cable

B. Single‐mode fiber optic cable

C. Multi‐mode fiber optic cable

D. Category 6 patch panels

E. Fiber optic patch panels

F. Fiber optic cable terminations

G. IT racks

H. IT cabinets

I. Data jacks

J. Face plates

14.4 Public Address System

A. The Public Address System design portrayed on the Contract Documents provides a representation of expected layouts and topology of security systems. DB Contractor shall coordinate specific requirements, location of devices and final configuration of all system with Amtrak.

B. Category Design, furnish and install paging speakers and structured cabling to support a telephone accessible and central amplified (70V) zone paging system. The system shall consist of the following:

1. Provide overhead paging speakers throughout the facility and the roof area (indoor and outdoor versions as required) to generate at least 15 dBA signal output over the ambient noise. Provide all required speaker brackets, and hardware for mounting speakers. Mount paging speakers on the lighting poles, in the car parking area.

2. Ceiling paging speakers shall be provided with wall mounted volume control unit in the office areas, supervisors’ rooms, lunch rooms and conference rooms. Provide all required brackets, back boxes and hardware for mounting speakers.



3. Speakers shall be grouped in zones and cabling to zone speakers shall be distributed from the terminal board inside the main Communications room (see Section 7.2.2). Furnish and install two pair cable to each zone speakers and terminal blocks to terminate zone speaker wiring. Each zone speaker cable shall be tagged to identify the zone and phasing on the cable and terminal block. Speaker wiring/zoning shall be as follow: TBD

4. Zone speakers wiring to the parking areas shall be provided with a wall mounted volume control unit mounted on the paging terminal board inside the Communications room.

5. Determine and tap the wattage level at speakers as per the listening area coverage, ambient noise level in the listening area and speaker spacing. Provide design calculation documenting speaker wattage tap, speaker quantity and power amplifier requirement for each zone coverage.

6. Paging shall be done using dedicated paging microphones and /or telephones.

8. AMTRAK’s Telecommunications Services shall furnish and install zone paging controller, telephone access paging module, paging amplifiers, and telephone switch. AMTRAK’s Telecommunications Services will program paging zones.

C. Submittals: The following is the minimum product data to be submitted:

1. Speakers

2. Amplifiers

3. Cabling

4. Mounting brackets

14.5 Fire Alarm System

A. The Fire Alarm System design portrayed on the Contract Documents provides a representation of expected layouts and topology of security systems. DB Contractor shall coordinate specific requirements, location of devices and final configuration of all system with the local Fire Department.

B. Provide a manual and automatic, zone coded and non‐zone coded supervised, addressable fire alarm and detection system for the entire building. The system shall have alarm verification, self‐checking features, voice announcement, and equipment for future expandability and central office connection/equipment for alarm transmission to the Fire Department. The fire alarm system shall be coded. The system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the latest National Fire Protection Agency (N.F.P.A.) codes, the New York State Building code and any other applicable agencies having jurisdiction, including but not limited to the AMTRAK Office of System Safety and the Federal Transit Administration. The complete fire detection and alarm system shall include but not be limited to the following:



1. Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel(s) of the multiplex type system with the capability of sounding fire alarms through indicating devices and displaying alpha‐numeric alarm through a liquid crystal display, shutting down equipment and sufficient alarm points to individually annunciate the activation of smoke detectors, duct detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, sprinkler water flow/valve tamper switches, and other initiation and supervisory devices. The main fire control panel shall be wall mounted in the Main Lobby, near the main entrance of the facility where accessible by the Fire Department.

2. Remote annunciator panels shall be installed in 24 hours manned locations and at building entry point:

3. An eight inch bell and three illuminated signs with 3 inch letter imprinted ("Fire”) to be installed at the top of main control panels and remote annunciator panels to indicate alarms. Fire alarm sign shall be lit steady on fire alarm. The bell shall be activated for fire alarms.

4. Provide addressable double action type manual pull stations. These units shall be installed by every exit/entry door and hallways as recommended by the NFPA 72 guidelines. Each pull station shall be provided with protective cover, tamper‐proof clear polycarbonate shield and frame with horn.

5. Provide addressable smoke/heat detectors of the photoelectric type/ 135oF fixed temperature type respectively. These units shall be installed for area fire detection. However final placing of these units shall be based on the type of ceiling, air movement, physical obstacles, etc and the NFPA 72E guidelines. Provide addressable smoke detectors in Electrical Distribution Rooms/Closets, Emergency Generator Rooms, Communications Rooms/Closets, Computer Rooms, Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Elevator Machine Rooms/Shafts/Lobbies, Battery Charging Rooms and Haz‐Mat Storage Building. Provide addressable heat detectors in areas where substances can rapidly burn and reach high temperatures.

6. Provide photoelectric type addressable duct smoke detectors for HVAC and HRU system. Duct smoke detectors are required in the supply side of supply air system greater than 2000 cfm, and both supply and return sides of re‐circulating air handler system greater than 15,000 cfm. Duct smoke detectors shall be interlocked to shutdown the associated HVAC and HRU equipment.

7. Provide Water flow switches of the vane type and pressure type for the sprinkler and fire pump systems (water flow alarms and high/low pressure indications). Provide tamper switches where required.

8. Provide horns/strobes and strobes of the wall or ceiling mounted type in compliance with NFPA 72 guidelines. The horn/strobe units shall incorporate circuitry for synchronized strobe flash. The strobes shall be clear unfiltered or clear filtered white light. The horns shall be field programmable in order to provide multiple distinctive tone patterns (Code3 Temporal for fire alarms).



9. Provide all required control relay modules to interlock re‐circulating air handler system equipment rated 15,000 cfm or greater, supply air system equipment rated 2,000 cfm or greater, exhaust fans, smoke hatches at the top of the shaft, roll‐up doors, elevators, escalators, other systems as required by applicable codes. Coordinate with Instrumentation and Controls for interlocking/shutdown.

10. Provide monitor modules to make non‐addressable devices function as addressable devices, so that each field device and its protection zone are properly identified at the main fire alarm control panel. The main fire alarm control panel shall have the capability to receive and annunciate the following equipment/sub system panels indication signals:

11. All stand‐alone fire suppression system panels indication signals (alarm, trouble and supervisory)

12. Provide battery back up for the complete fire alarm system. The battery back‐up power supply shall be capable of operating the system under normal load for a period of 24 hours followed immediately by a period of five minutes in alarm condition.

C. Submittals: The following is the minimum product data to be submitted:

1. Fire Alarm Control Panel

2. Riser Diagram of all devices and wiring requirements.

3. Manual pull stations

4. Smoke detectors

5. Heat detectors

6. Annunciator Panels

7. Horn‐Strobe devices

8. Visual devices

9. Fire Alarm cables.

14.6 Digital Signage

A. The DB Contractor shall coordinate with Amtrak for locations and quantity of digital signage and Passenger Information Display Systems (PIDS) to be installed at the Temporary Station and permanent Station.

B. The DB Contractor shall contract with Amtrak’s preferred vendor for Passenger Information Display System (PIDS) through Amtrak’s Master Service Agreement.

C. The DB Contractor will provide the necessary infrastructure from the PIDS Server Room to locations of PIDS displays in the station (temporary and permanent) and the platform.

D. The DB Contractor will coordinate directly with Amtrak’s preferred vendor to quantify design infrastructure requirements including: number of conduits, size of conduits, cable



counts, IT rack space allocation, power requirements and all appurtenances to make a cohesive solution.

D. The DB Contractor will coordinate with locations of digital signage to provide adequate infrastructure to each location. Coordinate data cabling quantity and sizes along with power requirements at each sign.

E. Submittals: The following is the minimum product data to be submitted:

1. Riser diagram of all signage and PIDS with cabling and power shown



Facility Requirements

14.1.1 Security System

Design, furnish and install security system for the entire building, including integrated Access Control and Intrusion Alarm Monitoring, and Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) systems.

The integrated access control and alarm monitoring system shall make access granted/denied decisions to restricted areas and building's perimeter/roof doors, define time zones and access levels/groups, import/export Amtrak's employee data base, detect unauthorized entries within restricted areas and building's perimeter/roof doors, detect alarm points from motion detectors and dry contacts, generate reports of each alarm type, time and location. The system shall also interface with CCTV system for alarm recording and alarm call‐up features. The system shall include but not be limited to the following devices, modules and equipment:

Combined card reader and keypad with rain shield (as indicated in Table (7‐1) [k1][SEA2]shall be provided at exterior of all building's perimeter employee entry/exit doors, stairwell entry/exit doors from roof, emergency exit doors, Employee Parking Area Entrance, outside of main communications room, all communications closets and computer room for authorized access. The card reader shall be capable of reading the AMTRAK’s Employee Pass and Identification Card (EPIC). The card reader installation shall meet ADA requirements. Card readers for Employee Parking Area Entrance shall be installed such that the driver will be able to swipe his EPIC card from his driving position. The card reader system shall be interlocked with the Semaphore arm control units at the Employee Parking Area Entrance, such that a valid swipe shall cause the corresponding Semaphore arm to open. Provide Semaphore arm bypass switches in the Property Protection booths. Coordinate with Architectural, Instrumentation and Controls, and Electrical for motorized Semaphore arm requirements.

Magnetic locks shall be provided at building's perimeter employee entry/exit doors, stairwell entry/exit doors and emergency exit doors where card readers are required. Magnetic locks shall be released when access is granted by the system from card reader, request‐to‐exit device activation, electromechanical exit panic hardware in an emergency, or upon fire alarm system activation. Coordinate with Architectural discipline for door hardware requirements.

Push button and motion detector devices shall be provided for request‐to‐exit at interior of all employee entry/exit doors (in lobby and vestibules) and other doors where card readers are required, except stairwell doors and emergency exit doors. The push button installation shall meet ADA requirements.

Coordinate with Architectural discipline for provision of an electromechanical panic hardware and a sign "AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY. ALARM WILL SOUND FOR UNAUTHORIZED USE" on every stairwell’s exit door and every emergency exit door leading from building. The panic hardware shall be integrated with the access control and security



alarm system for providing access for authorized employees egress and ingress from card readers installed both outside and inside of the building as well as allow immediate egress in an emergency. A strobe shall be installed at the interior of emergency exit doors to indicate alarm for unauthorized egress. The unauthorized exit alarm signal shall also be remotely transmitted to the alarm monitoring system inside the security booth and CCTV system indicated for alarm recording and alarm call‐up features.

Magnetic door contacts shall be provided for door status and security alarm monitoring on all building's perimeter employee entry/exit doors, stairwell entry/exit doors, emergency exit doors, and all interior doors of rooms with high security profiles. Magnetic door contacts for all building’s perimeter roll‐up doors are not required.

Magnetic door contacts installed on entry/exit doors, stairwell entry/exit doors and emergency exit doors where card readers are required for building access and egress shall be connected to the dual card reader module. All other magnetic door contacts, motion detectors, glass sensors, and other alarm devices shall be connected to the input control modules. Magnetic door contacts installed in view of a surveillance camera shall also be connected to CCTV system for alarm recording and alarm call‐up features.

Provide motion detectors for security alarm monitoring in all storage rooms.

Provide glass sensors for vision windows.

Provide a head end lockable enclosure (in main Communications room) to house the system interface modules. It shall house the dual card reader interface modules, input control modules, output control modules, power supplies for interface modules and magnetic locks. The head end enclosure shall also house the intelligent system controller interface module, network interface module, and power supplies for interface modules. Provide required cabling between head end enclosure and the access control/alarm devices. Tamper switches shall be provided on the head end enclosure. Tamper switch and power supply failure from enclosure shall be monitored by the system. The access system controller shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system to allow egress in case of fire.

Provide a database server/client workstation computer in the main communications room for the security alarms and access controls system. The database server/client workstation computers shall communicate with the AMTRAK’s employee database server located at the ADDRESS TBD for database synchronization and alarm/diagnostics reporting. Provide WAN connections between ADDRESS TBD and the facility. Provide LAN connections for client workstation computers, database server/client workstation computer and intelligent system controller (head end enclosure) in the facility. Provide required software for the security alarms and access controls system computers.

Provide security workstation computer in TBD Rms.

Provide alarm printers and a report printer inside the main communications room.



The closed circuit television (CCTV) system shall include but be not limited to:

Digital color video cameras in housings for monitoring all perimeter entrances and areas vulnerable to intruders, as indicated on the conceptual drawings. Cameras shall be integrated with door alarm contacts for alarm recording and alarm call‐up features. Camera housings in the fuel area shall be the explosion proof type.

Provide Pan/Tilt/Zoom digital cameras in housings in front of the building at the employee parking area and on poles at the visitor parking area. Provide Pan/Tilt/Zoom digital cameras in housings in the maintenance area inside the facility on overhead tracks.

Power supply for the cameras shall provide sufficient voltage and wattage at each camera and camera indoor/outdoor housing to operate properly. It shall supply 24VAC and 28VAC with selectable output tap. It shall be equipped with a circuit breaker on each output for over current protection, with self‐reset when fault is corrected. Each camera shall be fed from an individual breaker on the power supply.

The lens shall be a vari‐focal lens and equipped with auto iris. The lens focal length and “f” stop shall be determined during the survey of camera locations.

Survey and determine the exact location of each camera before installation to insure that the selected location will provide optimum view of the area to be monitored. Coordinate final locations with AMTRAK.

Video matrix switcher equipment with alarm inputs (wiring from security system alarm dry contacts for alarm recording and alarm call‐up features) and pan‐tilt‐zoom camera controller unit. It shall accommodate at least 256 cameras for current and possible future addition.

All CCTV equipment (cameras, video switchers, video controllers and monitors) shall be from the same manufacturer.

State of the art proven digital video recorder/server in a locked console cabinet in the main Communications room. The unit shall be capable of recording and storing images, without human intervention, for 30 days. Provide a flat screen monitor and LAN connection for the digital video recorder/server. Provide the required software to integrate with the security alarm monitoring and access control system computers for video monitoring and alarm management.

Provide a pull box with a 5 ft. of wire slack coiled inside, at each camera location.

Design, furnish and install networks connectivity and structured cabling facilities to support Telecommunication Systems (voice and data) requirements for the building. Coordinate with the Authority's Telecommunications Services to provide the required "T1" lines, central office lines and public telephone services from the Telephone Company. Approximately, a total of four "T1" lines will be needed for voice and data transmission over network between the



building and AMTRAK Communications Network. The design shall include provisions for continuation of communication services in case of "T1" or power failure.

Provide a separate "Telco Closet", a "Communications Room", and "Computer Room", and additional "Communications Closets" as needed and as shown on the drawings, to keep horizontal data cable length under 300 feet between each data outlet and its corresponding data cabinet.

"Communications Room" shall serve as the main distribution center for telecommunication systems and the gateway to the network. This room will also house the Authority's future fiber optic transmission equipment. It shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:

Provide Telephone Terminal Board on wall (labeled "AMTRAK‐Telephone") to terminate horizontal telephone cables from telephone/fax sets, multi‐pair riser cables between main Communications rooms and Communications closets and between main Communications rooms and Telco closet, and cables from zone paging speakers. Install terminal boards on the wall 24 inches above the finished floor. Provide an additional Telephone Terminal Board on wall (labeled "AMTRAK‐Fiber Optic") to terminate cables from the future authority's fiber optic network. Furnish and install protection blocks, punch down blocks and cable rings as required for both terminal boards.

Furnish and install two (2) data cabinets, one for data distribution and one for data equipment. Use the data distribution cabinet to terminate horizontal data cables from computer workstation outlets, vertical backbone multi‐pair copper and fiber optic cables, and all required connectivity hardware/equipment.

Designate a floor space for a telephone switch, a 19" paging equipment cabinet, a CCTV cabinet, four 23" fiber optic equipment cabinets, a storage cabinet, a desk and a chair. The communications room shall not be less than 450 sq. feet[k3].

LAN and wireless switches, DSU’s and routers shall be furnished and installed by Amtrak’s Network Operations Group.

All equipment cabinets shall be located so that the cabinet front and rear are a minimum of four feet from walls and the cabinet side is a minimum of two feet from the side wall, allowing easy access for equipment installation and maintenance on cabinets.

Provide overhead cable ladder system inside the room above equipment cabinets and telephone terminal board for exposed cables run from/to equipment.

Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements, for details regarding the dedicated electrical panel inside the main Communications room to feed dedicated panels and all dedicated circuit outlets required in the Computer room and Telco room. All circuits required for telecommunications equipment shall be connected from the building's emergency generator



and UPS system. UPS backed electrical panel in the communications rooms shall feed only the equipment within the corresponding room. UPS backed panels feeding computer workstations outlets and other loads outside the communication rooms shall not be installed inside the room. The outlets for telephone and paging equipment shall be installed on wall 18 inches above the finished floor below the telephone terminal board to feed the telephone switch and paging equipment. The electrical outlets for the data distribution and data equipment cabinets shall be installed at the inside bottom of each cabinet to feed power strips installed in the cabinet.

Provide a telecommunications grounding system bus bar that is tied back to the nearest building's electrical grounding system. All metallic racks, cabinets, cable ladders, raceways, Network/Telecommunications equipment shall be properly grounded as per TIA/EIA‐607, NEC codes (Articles 250 & 800).

Provide two 4‐inch rigid conduits between main Communications room and every Communications closet and Satellite communications room to install vertical backbone copper and multimode fiber cables, as per drawings.

Communications Closets shall serve as distribution centers for telecommunication system and shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:

Provide Telephone Terminal Boards on wall to terminate horizontal telephone cables from telephone sets, multi‐pair riser cables between the main Communications room and Communications closets. Terminal boards shall be installed on wall 24 inch above the finished floor.

Furnish and install one (1) data cabinet, for data distribution and data equipment. Use the data cabinet to terminate horizontal data cables from computer workstation outlets, vertical backbone multi‐pair copper and fiber cables, and all required connectivity hardware/equipment.

LAN and wireless switches, DSU’s, routers etc. shall be furnished and installed by the Amtrak Network Operations Group.


Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements, for details regarding the dedicated electrical panels and all circuits required for telecommunications equipment shall be connected from building's emergency generator and UPS system.

Provide a telecommunications grounding bus bar that is tied back to the nearest building's grounding system. All metallic racks, cabinets, cable ladders, raceways, Network/Telecommunications equipment shall be properly grounded as per TIA/EIA‐607, NEC codes (Articles 250 & 800).



Computer Room shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:

Provide required data cabling to the data distribution cabinet located inside the Communications rooms/closets. See Table 7.1[k4].

Furnish and install a file server cabinet. Provide overhead cable ladder system inside the room above file server cabinet for exposed cables run from/to equipment.

Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements, for details regarding the two (2) dedicated 125VAC/20A quad outlets connected to the building’s UPS/Emergency Generator Power. The quad outlets shall be installed at the inside bottom of the server cabinet. The dedicated circuits shall be fed from the electrical panel inside the main communications room indicated in Section 14 Communication Requirements.

Computers, file servers etc shall be furnished and installed by Amtrak.

Telco Closet shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:

Provide Telephone Terminal Boards (labeled "Telco") on wall to terminate multi‐pair riser cables between the main Communications room and Telco room, and Telco's feeder cables (both copper and fiber cables) from utility manhole.

Provide 1‐100 pair cable in rigid conduit and one empty 2 inch conduit for Telco's cable run between terminal boards inside Telco Closet and the main Communications room and the satellite communications room, as shown on the drawings.

Designate a floor space for one equipment cabinet (for Hi‐Cap and POTS multiplexer equipment) to be furnished and installed by the Telephone Company.


Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements, for details regarding the dedicated outlets connected from the building's UPS/Emergency Generator system for Telco's multiplexer equipment be installed on cabinet. The dedicated circuits shall be fed from the electrical panel inside the main Communications room indicated in Section 14 Communication Requirements.

Provide a telecommunications grounding bus bar that is tied back to the nearest building's grounding system. All metallic racks, cabinets, cable ladders, raceways, Network/Telecommunications equipment shall be properly grounded as per TIA/EIA‐607, NEC codes (Articles 250 & 800).

Horizontal telephone cabling shall include but not limited to:



Provide required horizontal telephones cables (Category 6 cables) from the Communications room/closet telephone terminal board to each outlet located at every workstation computer and telephone outlets as indicated in Table 7‐1[k5]. The horizontal telephone cables shall be terminated on RJ‐45 jacks. The telephone jacks shall be in color of Red.

Provide emergency type telephone sets as needed and shown. Furnish and install required horizontal telephones cables from the Communications room/closet telephone terminal board to each emergency type telephone set. See Table 7‐1[k6].

Provide a junction box and empty 1‐inch conduit runs from the Telephone Company's demarcation board inside Telco room to the public pay telephone locations as indicated in Table 7‐1[k7]. Coordinate with architectural work for locations of the public telephones. Coordinate with electrical work to provide the required electrical outlets for ADA compliant pay telephones. The Telephone Company shall provide all required telephone cables and equipment.

Provide a telephone terminal box and a 12 pair cable in 1 inch conduit run to every vending/kitchen room from the telephone company's demarcation board inside the Telco room for outside‐line telephone services to be used by the vendors.

Provide telephone cables from the Communications room/closet telephone terminal board to the locations indicated in Table 7‐1[k8] for remote monitoring of system equipment control panels such as HVCMS control system, and other systems, such as compressor, and generator. The horizontal telephone cables shall have 10 foot of slack cable coiled near equipment control panels.

Provide telephone cables and outlets next to the satellite TV outlet in rooms indicated in table 7‐1 [k9]for satellite receiver programming.

Horizontal data cabling shall include but not limited to:

Provide required horizontal data cables (Category 6, 4‐ pair UTP plenum cable 23 AWG cables) from Communications room/closet data distribution cabinets to every desk location and workstation computer, and as indicated in table 7‐1[k10]. The horizontal data cables shall be terminated on RJ‐45 jacks, along with horizontal telephone cables (indicated in Section 14 Communication Requirements) in a single outlet. The data jacks shall be in color of Blue. Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements for details regarding dedicated duplex outlet (125VAC/20A, 1 PH, IG) at each workstation outlet location. Provide electrical outlets fed from a UPS backed panel for computer workstations in every office, including all offices directed by Amtrak.

Provide “KRONOS” data cabling for the Employee Timekeeping System (two Category 6 cables in 3/4 inch conduit) from Communications room/closet data distribution cabinets to areas indicated in table 7‐1[k11]. Each Category 6 cable shall be terminated in a male RJ‐45 jack, to permit connection to "KRONOS" timekeeping unit supplied by the Authority. The outlet box



shall be installed 51 inch above the finished floor and next to the punch clock indicated in Section 7.9[k12]. Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements for details regarding dedicated duplex outlet (125VAC/20 A, 1 PH, IG) in each "KRONOS" location indicated above from a UPS backed up electrical panel.

Typically at every desk or computer workstation location, install telephone jacks and data jacks in the same outlet box with a four‐port faceplate. Unused port shall be provided with blank inserts.

Provide 200 pair vertical backbone telephone cable to interconnect the main Communications room and each communications closet and 100 pair cables to interconnect main Communications and Satellite communications rooms to Telco room.

Provide vertical backbone cables (36‐strand and 12‐strand multimode plenum Fiber Optic cable 50 Micron 50/125um) to interconnect data cabinets inside the main/satellite Communications room and data cabinets inside each Communications closet. Also provide 25 pair copper cable to interconnect the data cabinets and telephone terminal boards inside the main Communications room and the satellite communications room.

Provide redundant connection (1‐12 strand multimode plenum Fiber Optic cable 50 Micron 50/125um) from each communications closet, in the facility, to the building core, in the main communications room.

Provide four Cat 6 4 pair twisted cables from each wireless antenna in the facility to the nearest communications closet. Locations of wireless antennas, shown on the drawings, are approximate. The final locations shall be determined in the field, after an approved wireless access points antenna survey.

Provide data communication system as follows:

The Design‐Builder shall furnish and install the cable infrastructure work for the data/voice system. It shall consist of, but not be limited to: data/voice patch panel, data equipment cabinets, power strips, fiber optic cable distribution panels, copper cable (CAT 6) patch panels, connecting blocks, vertical/horizontal cable management system, cable ladder/tray, empty shelves, data/phone jacks and computer workstation outlets.

AMTRAK’s Network Operations Group shall furnish, install and configure all LAN and wireless switches, DSU’s, routers etc.

Spacing of equipment and patch panels in the cabinet shall allow for proper cable management. Horizontal cable management shall be provided below every patch panel in the cabinet.

In general, every computer workstation outlet shall be terminated with data horizontal cables from the data cabinet patch panels located inside each Communications room/closet



throughout the facility. If required by design, furnish and install a wall mounted data cabinet (E2‐WM‐SC‐362424‐RH‐PD‐BL by the Copper B‐Line) in an environmentally controlled office for feeding computer workstation outlets exceeding the 300 feet limit to its corresponding data cabinet. A 12‐strand multimode plenum fiber optic backbone cable shall be provided and configured from the data cabinet to the main Communications room. The remote data cabinet shall be provided with integral fan/filter, power strip, fiber patch panel, CAT 6 patch panel, horizontal cable management as required by the number of outlets to be fed) and all required mounting hardware.

Provide communications system for Elevators. The system shall consist of the following:

Sound power telephones in elevator cab and Machinery room to provide communications for elevator maintenance force. Sound power telephone jacks shall be installed in elevator cab, top of cab, pit and elevator machine room.

Provide an ADA compliant recessed speakerphone inside elevator for communication between elevator and the two 24 hour manned property protection and dispatcher offices for emergency passenger assistance. Coordinate with the elevator cab manufacturer.

Provide a telephone terminal box and 12 pair cable in 1‐inch conduit from elevator machine room to telephone terminal board in Communications room. Make all required connections to provide communications for elevator speakerphone with telephone in both property protection booths.

Design, furnish and install paging speakers and structured cabling to support a telephone accessible and central amplified (70V) zone paging system. The system shall consist of the following:

Provide overhead paging speakers throughout the facility and the roof area (indoor and outdoor versions as required) to generate at least 15 dBA signal output over the ambient noise. Provide all required speaker brackets, and hardware for mounting speakers. Mount paging speakers on the lighting poles, in the car parking area.

Ceiling paging speakers shall be provided with wall mounted volume control unit in the office areas, supervisors’ rooms, lunch rooms and conference rooms. Provide all required brackets, back boxes and hardware for mounting speakers.

Speakers shall be grouped in zones and cabling to zone speakers shall be distributed from the terminal board inside the main Communications room (see Section 7.2.2). Furnish and install two pair cable to each zone speakers and terminal blocks to terminate zone speaker wiring. Each zone speaker cable shall be tagged to identify the zone and phasing on the cable and terminal block. Speaker wiring/zoning shall be as follow: TBD

Zone speakers wiring to the parking areas shall be provided with a wall mounted volume control unit mounted on the paging terminal board inside the Communications room.



Determine and tap the wattage level at speakers as per the listening area coverage, ambient noise level in the listening area and speaker spacing. Provide design calculation documenting speaker wattage tap, speaker quantity and power amplifier requirement for each zone coverage.

Paging shall be done using dedicated paging microphones and /or telephones.

AMTRAK’s Telecommunications Services shall furnish and install zone paging controller, telephone access paging module, paging amplifiers, and telephone switch. AMTRAK’s Telecommunications Services will program paging zones as described in Section 7.6.3 and zone groups as follows: TBD

Provide a manual and automatic, zone coded and non‐zone coded supervised, addressable fire alarm and detection system for the entire building. The system shall have alarm verification, self‐checking features, voice announcement, and equipment for future expandability and central office connection/equipment for alarm transmission to the Fire Department. The fire alarm system shall be coded. The system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the latest National Fire Protection Agency (N.F.P.A.) codes, the New York State Building code and any other applicable agencies having jurisdiction, including but not limited to the AMTRAK Office of System Safety and the Federal Transit Administration. The complete fire detection and alarm system shall include but not be limited to the following:

Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel(s) of the multiplex type system with the capability of sounding fire alarms through indicating devices and displaying alpha‐numeric alarm through a liquid crystal display, shutting down equipment and sufficient alarm points to individually annunciate the activation of smoke detectors, duct detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, sprinkler water flow/valve tamper switches, and other initiation and supervisory devices. The main fire control panel shall be wall mounted in the Main Lobby, near the main entrance of the facility where accessible by the Fire Department.

Remote annunciator panels shall be installed in 24 hours manned locations: TBD, to provide information on fire alarms.

An eight inch bell and three illuminated signs with 3 inch letter imprinted ("Fire”) to be installed at the top of main control panels and remote annunciator panels to indicate alarms. Fire alarm sign shall be lit steady on fire alarm. The bell shall be activated for fire alarms.

Provide addressable double action type manual pull stations. These units shall be installed by every exit/entry door and hallways as recommended by the NFPA 72 guidelines. Each pull station shall be provided with protective cover, tamper‐proof clear polycarbonate shield and frame with horn.

Provide addressable smoke/heat detectors of the photoelectric type/ 135oF fixed temperature type respectively. These units shall be installed for area fire detection. However final placing of these units shall be based on the type of ceiling, air movement, physical



obstacles, etc and the NFPA 72E guidelines. Provide addressable smoke detectors in Electrical Distribution Rooms/Closets, Emergency Generator Rooms, Communications Rooms/Closets, Computer Rooms, Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Elevator Machine Rooms/Shafts/Lobbies, Battery Charging Rooms and Haz‐Mat Storage Building. Provide addressable heat detectors in areas where substances can rapidly burn and reach high temperatures.

Provide photoelectric type addressable duct smoke detectors for HVAC and HRU system. Duct smoke detectors are required in the supply side of supply air system greater than 2000 cfm, and both supply and return sides of re‐circulating air handler system greater than 15,000 cfm. Duct smoke detectors shall be interlocked to shutdown the associated HVAC and HRU equipment.

Provide Water flow switches of the vane type and pressure type for the sprinkler and fire pump systems (water flow alarms and high/low pressure indications). Provide tamper switches where required.

Provide horns/strobes and strobes of the wall or ceiling mounted type in compliance with NFPA 72 guidelines. The horn/strobe units shall incorporate circuitry for synchronized strobe flash. The strobes shall be clear unfiltered or clear filtered white light. The horns shall be field programmable in order to provide multiple distinctive tone patterns (Code3 Temporal for fire alarms).

Provide all required control relay modules to interlock re‐circulating air handler system equipment rated 15,000 cfm or greater, supply air system equipment rated 2,000 cfm or greater, exhaust fans, smoke hatches at the top of the shaft, roll‐up doors, elevators, escalators, other systems as required by applicable codes. Coordinate with Instrumentation and Controls for interlocking/shutdown.

Provide monitor modules to make non‐addressable devices function as addressable devices, so that each field device and its protection zone are properly identified at the main fire alarm control panel. The main fire alarm control panel shall have the capability to receive and annunciate the following equipment/sub system panels indication signals:

Fire pump controller system panel indication signals (power on, pump running, phase failure, phase reversal, fire pump on back up power)

All stand‐alone fire suppression system panels indication signals (alarm, trouble and supervisory)

Refer to Section 13 Electrical Requirements for details regarding fuse cut out box in Electrical room for fire alarm control panel. The power shall be fed from a dedicated circuit from the ATS power system. Fire alarm control panel shall monitor indication of ATS power failure. Coordinate with Electrical.



Provide battery back up for the complete fire alarm system. The battery back‐up power supply shall be capable of operating the system under normal load for a period of 24 hours followed immediately by a period of five minutes in alarm condition.

Furnish and install portable fire extinguishers throughout the building as per NFPA 10 guidelines and UL standards.

Provide 20 pounds multi‐purpose dry chemical portable fire extinguisher (rated 20A: 120BC), 15 pounds carbon dioxide portable fire extinguisher (rated 10B:C) and 125 pounds multi‐purpose dry chemical wheeled fire extinguishers (rated 40A: 240BC) as required.

20 pounds multi‐purpose dry chemical portable fire extinguisher shall be placed for each 1,250 sq. ft. of office space or fraction thereof and as many as needed throughout the facility to insure that a traveling distance not to exceed 75 feet between units.

15 pounds carbon dioxide portable fire extinguisher shall be placed in electrical distribution rooms, instrumentation/control rooms, communications rooms/closets, computer rooms, mechanical equipment rooms.

Provide all required mounting and fastening materials. Portable fire extinguishers shall be mounted so that the bottom of the extinguisher is at least 4 inches above finished floor and the top of the extinguisher is not more than 4 1/2 feet above finished floor.

Portable fire extinguishers in office areas and corridors shall be installed in recessed break‐glass type cabinets.

Provide a complete synchronous time clock system throughout the facility, which shall be synchronized with the Universal Time Signal, transmitted by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (WWV/WWVH radio broadcasting system) from Colorado. The system shall include but not be limited to the following:

Clock antenna shall be installed on roof parapet. Antenna coaxial cable (RG‐58) shall be installed in steel conduit from roof to master clock receiver. Antenna and coaxial cable shall be grounded as per NEC codes (Articles 250, 810 & 820).

Master clock receiver shall be wall mounted inside the main communications room.

Time control center unit shall be wall mounted inside the main communications room next to the master clock receiver. Time control center unit shall include all required interface circuits boards, WWV interface board, CPU and power boards, coded and impulse boards. Time control center unit shall synchronize the secondary time clocks and activate the audible signaling of all brakes at all shifts and other daily scheduled events.

Synchronous secondary time clocks shall be wall mounted in locations as indicated in Table 7‐1[k13].



Time attendance recorders (punch clocks) shall be wall mounted outside of the TBD office.

Provide one (1) electrical duplex outlet (125VAC/20A, 1 PH, IG) in each location indicated above to power punch clock and "KRONOS" timekeeping units (as indicated in Table 7‐1[k14]) from an UPS backed Electrical panel. "KRONOS" timekeeping unit will be provided by the Authority.

Provide cards and card racks for all maintenance employees. Time card racks shall be wall mounted next to the time attendance recorders.

Design, furnish and install structured cabling system for the Direct Broadcast Satellite Television Distribution System at a TBD location. The satellite television system (dish and receivers) shall be installed and programmed by a local satellite television company as arranged by the Authority. The structured television cabling and equipment used in the system shall support satellite and local broadcast TV reception (54 MHz ‐ 2150 MHz), shall provide acceptable signal levels to every receiver in the system and shall be furnished with but not be limited to the following:

Determine a location to mount the antennas on the roof at unobstructed line‐of‐sight to receive the best signal quality of Satellite and local TV broadcast. Furnish and install an outdoor TV antenna (Terk, HDTV 60 or approved equal) for receiving the off‐air broadcast VHF/UHF/HDTV local channels. Provide mast and mast mounting hardware as required and fasten the antenna in a position that gives the best reception. The antenna shall be grounded as per NEC codes (Articles 250, 810 & 820).

Provide four RG‐58 coaxial cables in 2 inch conduit up to roof level from the TBD Communication Closet and terminate conduit with a waterproof junction box mounted on roof parapet, and seal all openings. One RG‐58 coaxial cable shall be terminated directly to the clock antenna (indicated in Section 7.9[k15]), one RG‐58 coaxial cable shall be terminated directly to the outdoor TV antenna and two RG‐58 coaxial cables shall have 10 feet coiled for future connection to a dual output LNB satellite dish. Outdoor coaxial cables with ground wire shall be used between outdoor TV/Satellite antennas and multi‐switches, and shall be terminated with weatherproof male "F" type connectors (RCA #D905 or approved equal).

All outdoor coaxial cables from the roof shall be grounded as per NEC codes (Articles 250, 810 & 820). Provide required coax cable grounding blocks (RCA #D902 or approved equal) inside Communication Closet.

Provide four wall mounted dual LNB/distribution multi‐switches (RCA #D6530 or approved equal) inside the TBD Communication Closet to serve as central distribution point. Each multi‐switch shall allow both Satellite and VHF/UHF signals to travel down a single coaxial cable up to four satellite receivers. Furnish and install three 4‐way power dividers (RCA #D2471 or approved equal) and required interconnect coax cables connected to multi‐switches.



Provide coaxial cables (RG‐58/U) home run from the central distribution point inside the TBD Communication Closet to the satellite TV receiver locations as indicated in Table 7‐1[k16]. Every home run coaxial cable shall be terminated to a female‐female "F" type connector in a wall outlet. Furnish and install a diplexer (RCA #D926 or approved equal) and required interconnect coax cables connected between diplexer and wall outlet.

Provide in‐line amplifiers (RCA #D903 or approved equal) at the beginning of each run of RG‐58 coaxial cable run greater than 100 feet (between outdoor TV/Satellite antennas and central distribution point and between central distribution point and wall outlets).

Install an electrical duplex outlet (120 VAC, 20 A, 1 PH) next to satellite TV outlet in rooms indicated in table 7.1 [k17]and next to the Central Distribution Point in the TBD Communications Closet indicated in 7.10.4 [k18]to power television/satellite receiver equipment and multi‐switch distribution equipment.

Install a RJ‐45 telephone outlet next to satellite TV outlet in rooms indicated in table 7.1 [k19]for satellite receiver programming.


Provide all communications items of work required for the facility, including the following:

Design, furnish and install various communications systems as listed above in compliance with all applicable state and national electrical codes, current industry standards, and electrical area classifications required under electrical description of work, including but not limited to Underwriters Laboratories Inc., National Fire Protection Association, NYS Building Code, NYS Energy Conservation Construction Code, American National Standards Institute, National Electrical Manufacturers Association, Federal standards an Specifications, TIA/EIA‐568B and TIA/EIA‐607. The most stringent of the codes shall apply.

Provide all necessary work for integration with other systems, including Mechanical, Instrumentation and Control, and Electrical.

Provide all necessary wires and cables for complete and operational systems as required and recommended by the various manufacturers.

Provide all necessary cables raceway systems, (rigid conduit, messenger, metal raceways, cable ladders, cable trays, etc.,) along the horizontal and perpendicular line of the building and at a height so as not to obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway or passageway and not to interfere with operation or access to any mechanical or electrical equipment. Each system (Telephone/Data, Clock, Paging, CCTV, Security, and Fire Alarm) shall have its own raceway system. 120 volts AC power wires/cables shall be installed in a separate conduit system. Test all wires and cables installed. Tag all wires and cables.



Provide a complete cable ladder system in Communications Rooms/Closets, Telco Room and Computer Rooms for running cables within these enclosures. Install all cables/wires in concealed conduits/steel race ways in office areas.

All conduits shall be hot dip galvanized steel, except as described in Section 7.11.7 [k20]below. Conduit size smaller than 3/4 inch shall not be used and size smaller than 1 inch shall not be concealed.

For all hazardous (classified) areas use threaded rigid galvanized steel conduits, sealing fittings, sealing compound, explosion proof fittings and enclosures for all installation within the classified area above finished floor and 18 inches below the ceiling as required for Class 1, Division 1, NEMA 7, Group D in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) specifically Article 510. The explosion proof requirements will not apply for non essential Communications system equipment (paging and clock).

For all wet areas, all threaded rigid galvanized steel conduits, boxes and fittings shall be coated with polyurethane (Rob Roy).

For the office areas with hung ceiling, electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with compression fittings and stamped steel boxes shall be used in plenum area.

Follow the electrical classified areas requirements specified in Section 13 Electrical Requirements.

Provide readily visible signs for fire alarm devices hidden above hung ceiling for maintenance purposes.

Perform all tests on the installed systems to verify their proper operation and the integrity of each of their elements and their compliance with applicable codes.

Install all equipment in a readily accessible location for maintenance.

All equipment provided shall have 50 percent spare inputs available for future expansion.

Provide As‐Built drawings, manuals, programming and training on the installed systems.

There shall be no gas piping, water piping, sprinkler piping, drainage piping or drains in the main Communications room, the Communications closets, the Computer room, and Telco room.

SECTION 15 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS REQUIREMENTS



15.1 Building Management System (BMS) (DfE)

A. The system shall incorporate Direct Digital Controllers (DDC), centralized monitoring and control functions and shall also interface with the facility fire alarm system. The system shall consist of the following elements:

1. Microprocessor based controllers, interfacing directly with local sensors and actuators for the control and monitoring of HVAC and Lighting Systems throughout the facility. The BMS shall also monitor the systems as outlined in the BMS Monitoring Overview section below. The BMS shall also have Energy Management capabilities.

2. All controllers shall be networked providing bi‐directional communication with the Building Management System Workstation (BMS‐WS).

3. The BMS shall include a remote alarm monitoring display. Locally detected alarms shall be displayed and printed on the local monitor and retransmitted to the remote display.

B. BMS Monitoring Overview

1. Electric Distribution System

2. Emergency Generator System

3. Fire Alarm System

4. Elevator System

5. Escalator System

6. Compressed Air System

7. Facility Air Curtains

8. Heat Recovery Units (HRU’s)

C. Heating Ventilating Air Conditioning (HVAC) Units

1. All HVAC Units shall be provided with “Hand‐Off‐Auto” selector switches mounted on the unit. With the switch in the “Auto” position, the unit will automatically function to produce the requested air discharge temperature. This temperature set point will be selected from the BMS by the system operator and be transmitted to the locally mounted HVAC controller via the BMS network.

2. A low temperature safety thermostat shall be provided to stop the operation of the supply fan and close all dampers, whenever a temperature of 40 degrees Fahrenheit or below is sensed downstream of the furnace.

3. Each HVAC unit shall be automatically shutdown due to high or low supply air temperature or a high smoke condition. Addressable smoke detectors shall be used for smoke detection. These conditions shall also be annunciated through the BMS‐WS display. A differential pressure switch shall be provided for each system to monitor air filter condition. A high‐pressure differential shall be annunciated on the BMS‐WS display.



D. Ventilation Fans (VF)

1. Ventilation Fans shall be controlled by the BMS. Each ventilation fan starter shall be provided with a Hand‐OFF‐Auto selector switch and a speed selector switch. In the “Auto” position, the fans shall be controlled by the BMS, and the “Hand” position shall be used for local operation. The “manual” speed selector switch shall function only in the “Hand” position. In the “Auto” position, the BMS shall control the starting, stopping, and the speed of that fan.

2. Each starter shall be equipped to provide status (ON/OFF) and speed (High/Low) indications to the BMS. The BMS shall turn on the associated Ventilation Fan when a Heat Recovery Unit (HRU) turns on, and shall select the speed of the Ventilation Fan (High/Low) to match the fan speed of the HRU.

E. Exhaust Fans (EF)

1. Each EF shall be provided with “Hand‐Off‐Auto” selector switch located at the motor starter. With the switch in the “Auto” position, the EF shall be operated in accordance with the facility’s normal operating procedure.

2. The local controllers for the EF shall be networked to the BMS.

F. Safety Interlocks ‐ Provide electrical safety interlocks to interface with the fire alarm system to shut down heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems and associated motorized dampers. Battery chargers shall also be electrically interlocked, preventing operation when the battery charging area ventilation system is not functioning. Each safety interlock shall include all enclosures, relays and associated components necessary provide a fully integrated system.

G.A. Air‐Curtain Monitoring ‐ Facility Air‐Curtains shall be monitored by the BMS for associated hand‐off‐auto (H‐O‐A) control switch position as well as on/off and failure status. All alarm conditions and statuses shall be generated at the BMS‐WS. Sensors shall be provided to monitor fan airflow, motor current and Air‐Curtain discharge air temperature.

SECTION 15. SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

15.1 Facility Requirements

The Design Builder (DB) must adhere to the following criteria encompassing the work required to design, furnish, install and test/commission the following systems;

• Video Surveillance Systems • Physical Accesss Control System

The work required under this section is applicable to the Temporary Station Trailers and the final Station configuration for Phase I and II.

Before commencing on the design and installation of any work in this section, the DB Contractor shall meet with the proper agency (Fire Department, Amtrak IT, Amtrak Police) to



coordinate the location of devices and infrastructure and ensure compliance to referenced Amtrak standards.

15.2 Standards and Codes

Amtrak Premise Distribution System Standards V1.0

Amtrak Police Department ‐ Corporate Security Standard Design Practice 2011

Amtrak Engineering Stations Standard Design Practices (SDP) June 2012

ANSI TIA/EIA‐568

NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code 2011

NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

15.3 Video Surveillance System

A. Design, furnish and install security components in accordance with Amtrak Police Department ‐ Corporate Security Standard Design Practice and as coordinated with the Amtrak Police Department.

B. The Video Surveillance System design portrayed on the Contract Documents provides a representation of expected layouts and topology of security systems. DB Contractor shall coordinate specific requirements, location of devices and final configuration of all system with Amtrak and Trailways.

C. All camera locations shall provide unobstructed view of expected scenes. The DB Contractor shall coordinate locations of cameras with Amtrak Police.

D. Camera Location Survey:

1. The DB Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the selected camera locations will provide the optimum display of viewing area.

2. The DB Contractor shall submit for review a template form of the expected site survey

indicating location, types of equipment used and views. 3. The DB Contractor is to conduct a site survey in the presense of the Engineer and

Amtrak Police after substantial completion of construction of designated areas using a portable camera with lenses to replicate specified camera and lenses. The specified lighting and signage for area being monitored shall be installed when survey is performed.



4. The views for the survey shall be single views for fixed cameras and four (4) views at 0, 90, 180, 270 degree increments on the aiming angle specified during the survey by Amtrak Police for pan‐tilt‐zoom cameras.

5. Where site cameras are to be pole mounted, the DB Contractor shall utilize a bucket

truck to provide the required height of the specified pole mounted camera.

E. Camera Types: Camera types shall be per the Amtrak Police Department ‐ Corporate Security Standard Design Practice. The DB Contractor shall coordinate all locations for fixed, pan‐tilt‐zoom (PTZ), long distance and wide‐area/high resolution cameras with Amtrak Police

F. Camera Recording: Recoding of camera outputs shall be per the Amtrak Police Department ‐ Corporate Security Standard Design Practice. The DB Contractor shall provide calculations to support size of network storage media

G. Integration with Physical Access Control System: Where required by Amtrak, cameras shall be interconnected to the locations secured by the Physical Access Control System to provide surveillance of secured doors and areas.

H. Raceways: All Video Surveillance System wiring shall be routed in rigid galvanized steel conduit. All junction boxes associated with the Video Surveillance System shall have tamper resistant hardware.

I. Video Surveillance Power Supplies

1. Power Over Ethernet (POE): For cameras utilizing power over ethernet (POE), head end ethernet switch shall be rack mounted and capable of providing necessary power to cameras.

2. Low‐Voltage Power Supply (12V or 24V): For cameras utilizing low‐voltage power supplies (12V or 24V), the power supply shall be: a. Rack mounted

b. 120V 60 Hertz input

c. Minimum of sixteen (16) Class 2 PTC protected circuits with screw post terminals

J. Submittals: The following is the minimum product data to be submitted:

1. CCTV Site Survey form

2. CCTV Site Survey results



3. Cameras

4. Mounts

5. CCTV Cabling Riser Diagram – Depicting all cameras with video wiring and power wiring defined.

6. Digital Video Recorders

7. Power Supply

15.4 Physical Access Control System

A. Design, furnish and install security components in accordance with Amtrak Police Department ‐ Corporate Security Standard Design Practice and as coordinated with the Amtrak Police Department.

B. The Physical Access Control System design portrayed on the Contract Documents provides a representation of expected layouts and topology of security systems. DB Contractor shall coordinate specific requirements, location of devices and final configuration of all system with Amtrak and Trailways.

C. The integrated access control and alarm monitoring system shall make access granted/denied decisions to restricted areas and building's perimeter/roof doors, define time zones and access levels/groups, import/export Amtrak's employee data base, detect unauthorized entries within restricted areas and building's perimeter/roof doors, detect alarm points from motion detectors and dry contacts, generate reports of each alarm type, time and location. The system shall also interface with CCTV system for alarm recording and alarm call‐up features. The system shall include but not be limited to the following devices, modules and equipment as prescribed in the Amtrak Police Department ‐ Corporate Security Standard Design Practice:

1. Card readers

2. Magnetic locks

3. Door switches

4. Push buttons

5. Motion Detectors

6. Intelligent System Controllers

7. Dual Reader Controllers (DRIM)

D. Refer to Amtrak Police Department ‐ Corporate Security Standard Design Practice for typical arrangement of electric door hardware configurations (#1 through #21). Where designed door configuration does not apply to typical arrangements, coordinate with Amtrak Police for proposed arrangement of devices.



E. The Intelligent System Controller (ISC), Dual Reader Controllers (DRIMs) and power supplies

shall be installed in a lockable sheet steel NEMA 1 enclosure within the Communications Room.

F. Coordinate with Architectural discipline for provision of an electromechanical panic

hardware and a sign "AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY. ALARM WILL SOUND FOR UNAUTHORIZED USE" on every stairwell’s exit door and every emergency exit door leading from building. The panic hardware shall be integrated with the access control and security alarm system for providing access for authorized employees egress and ingress from card readers installed both outside and inside of the building as well as allow immediate egress in an emergency. A strobe shall be installed at the interior of emergency exit doors to indicate alarm for unauthorized egress. The unauthorized exit alarm signal shall also be remotely transmitted to the alarm monitoring system inside the security booth and CCTV system indicated for alarm recording and alarm call‐up features.

G. All wiring associated with the Physical Access Control System shall be installed in rigid galvanized steel conduit.

H. Door contacts shall be provided for door status and security alarm monitoring on all

building's perimeter employee entry/exit doors, stairwell entry/exit doors, emergency exit doors, and all interior doors of rooms with high security profiles. Magnetic door contacts for all building’s perimeter roll‐up doors are not required.

I. Provide a database server/client workstation computer in the main communications room for the security alarms and access controls system. The database server/client workstation computers shall communicate with the AMTRAK’s employee database servers for database synchronization and alarm/diagnostics reporting.

J. DB Contractor to integrate Station security system to Amtrak WAN security system.

K. Provide required software for the security alarms and access controls system computers.

L. Provide security workstation computer.

M. Provide alarm printers and a report printer inside the main communications room.

N. Submittals: The following is the minimum product data to be submitted:

1. Card readers

2. Magnetic locks

3. Door switches

4. Push buttons



5. Motion Detectors

6. Intelligent System Controllers

7. Dual Reader Controllers (DRIM)

8. Power Supply

9. Riser Diagram indicating all doors, devices and wiring requirements.

SECTION 156. FACILITY PARKING AND TRAFFIC REQUIREMENTS

156.1 Parking

The Design‐Builder shall provide short‐term parking for parcel and passenger drop‐off and pick‐up. Paid and secure parking lots including accessible parking shall be constructed in Phase I, with a goal of 257 parking spaces at the conclusion of Phase II per Amtrak 30 year projections. Phase I shall include the construction of a parking area that will become the future Phase II bus loop.

Vehicular Parking shall consist of standard nine foot by nineteen foot stalls, oriented at 90°. Accessible parking spaces, with van accessibility shall be provided. A minimum of fifteen employee spaces for Amtrak and Trailways shall be differentiated; the Design‐Builder shall coordinate with both Amtrak and Trailways for final employee parking counts. Pedestrian walkways shall link the parking lot to station building, including traffic calming speed tables at major crossing points.

156.2 Pay Stations

The Design‐Builder shall install accommodations for three parking pay stations at the station building, visible from the street. This includes two standard pay stations, one ADA height pay station. The pay stations are to be located against an exterior wall, away from free flowing pedestrian traffic but in the same general area. Pay stations shall be spaced such that each station can be opened for fee collection. Amtrak and its parking management company shall provide the pay station equipment, perform the connections to the pay station, and perform all testing. The Design‐Builder is responsible for providing and installing the infrastructure, including conduits and wiring, for the pay stations and coordinating the hookup arrangements.

The Design‐Builder shall also provide and install gate arms as indicated on the Preliminary Design plans, including:

A. Conduit and pull string to the gate arm locations

B. Loop detector and necessary conduit connections for future use with the gate arm

No other equipment is necessary for initial construction.

156.3 Bus Access

Bus berths for five forty‐five foot long intercity buses with two spaces for additional berths for overnight bus parking are programmed into the site. The bus loop shall have separate access



from the street with a minimum driveway width of thirty feet and turning radii of at least forty‐two feet. Sufficient space is required beneath the canopy for five buses. Two additional layover spaces shall be accommodated within the bus loop for waiting and overnight bus parking. Finally, two on‐street parallel bus bays shall be provided for RGRTA buses to stop, board, and alight passengers without obstructing a travel lane. These bays shall be located at North Clinton and Joseph Avenues and shall provide level and accessible boarding. The Design‐Builder shall provide bus shelters at each bus stop location.

156.4 Accommodations for Bicylists

To accommodate bicycle riders, the Design‐Builder shall reference the City of Rochester’s Bicycle Equipment Standards. U‐shaped bike racks with space for a minimum of twenty (20) bicycles shall be installed beneath the bus boarding area canopy, as well as at the bus shelters adjacent to the RGRTA bus berths at North Clinton and Joseph Avenues, each with space for a minimum of ten (10) bicycles. A minimum of ten (10) Bicycle bicycle lockers shall be installed beneath the Phase II bus canopy, as well as a tamper‐resistant public bicycle work stand and separate public bicycle pump.

SECTION 16. FRA TIGER Grant Submittal Requirements

The Design Builder shall prepare the following submittal requirements to be provided by NYSDOT to the FRA:

A. Final Staging Plan B. Station Building Final Design C. Platform Final Design D. Tunnel Final Design E. Track Final Design

The Design Builder shall work cooperatively with NYSDOT in resolving FRA comments on submittal requirements listed in Section 16.